EZ-ZONE PM ®

User’s Guide

Integrated Controller Models

TOTAL
CUSTOMER
SATISFACTION
3 Year Warranty

ISO 9001

1241 Bundy Boulevard., Winona, Minnesota USA 55987 Registered Company

Winona, Minnesota USA
Phone: +1 (507) 454-5300, Fax: +1 (507) 452-4507
http://www.watlow.com
0600-0059-0000 Rev. N Made in the U.S.A.

January 2015
Safety Information
We use note, caution and warning symbols throughout this book to draw your attention to
important operational and safety information.
• A “NOTE” marks a short message to alert you to an important detail.
• A “CAUTION” safety alert appears with information that is important for protecting your
equipment and performance. Be especially careful to read and follow all cautions that
apply to your application.
• A “WARNING” safety alert appears with information that is important for protecting you,
others and equipment from damage. Pay very close attention to all warnings that apply to
your application.
• The safety alert symbol, (an exclamation point in a triangle) precedes a general
CAUTION or WARNING statement.
• The electrical hazard symbol, (a lightning bolt in a triangle) precedes an electric
shock hazard CAUTION or WARNING safety statement. Further explanations follow:
Symbol Explanation
CAUTION – Warning or Hazard that needs further explanation than
label on unit can provide. Consult User's Guide for further informa-
tion.

ESD Sensitive product, use proper grounding and handling techniques

when installing or servicing product.

Unit protected by double/reinforced insulation for shock hazard pre-

vention.

Do not throw in trash, use proper recycling techniques or consult

manufacturer for proper disposal.

Enclosure made of Polycarbonate material. Use proper recycling

techniques or consult manufacturer for proper disposal.

Unit can be powered with either alternating current (ac) voltage or

direct current (dc) voltage.

Unit is a Listed device per Underwriters Laboratories®. It has been

evaluated to United States and Canadian requirements for Process
Control Equipment. UL 61010 and CSA C22.2 No. 61010. File E185611
QUYX, QUYX7. See: www.ul.com
Unit is a Listed device per Underwriters Laboratories®. It has been
evaluated to United States and Canadian requirements for Hazardous
Locations Class 1 Division II Groups A, B, C and D. ANSI/ISA 12.12.01-
2007. File E184390 QUZW, QUZW7. See: www.ul.com
 Unit is compliant with European Union directives. See Declaration of
Conformity for further details on Directives and Standards used for
Compliance.
Unit has been reviewed and approved by Factory Mutual as a
Temperature Limit Device per FM Class 3545 standard. See: www.
fmglobal.com
Unit has been reviewed and approved by CSA International for use as
Temperature Indicating-Regulating Equipment per CSA C22.2 No. 24.
See: www.csa-international.org

Unit has been reviewed and approved by ODVA for compliance with
DeviceNet communications protocol. See: www.odva.org

Unit has been reviewed and approved by ODVA for compliance with
Ethernet/IP communications protocol. See: www.odva.org

Warranty
The EZ-ZONE® PM is manufactured by ISO 9001-registered processes and is backed by a
three-year warranty to the first purchaser for use, providing that the units have not been
misapplied. Since Watlow has no control over their use, and sometimes misuse, we cannot
guarantee against failure. Watlows' obligations hereunder, at Watlows' option, are limited to
replacement, repair or refund of purchase price, and parts which upon examination prove to
be defective within the warranty period specified. This warranty does not apply to damage
resulting from transportation, alteration, misuse or abuse. The purchaser must use Watlow
parts to maintain all listed ratings.

Technical Assistance
If you encounter a problem with your Watlow controller, review your configuration infor-
mation to verify that your selections are consistent with your application: inputs, outputs,
alarms, limits, etc. If the problem persists, you can get technical assistance from your local
Watlow representative (see back cover), by e-mailing your questions to wintechsupport@wat-
low.com or by dialing +1 (507) 494-5656 between 7 a.m. and 5 p.m., Central Standard Time
(CST). Ask for for an Applications Engineer. Please have the following information available
when calling:
• Complete model number
• All configuration information
• User’s Guide
• Factory Page

Return Material Authorization (RMA)

1. Call Watlow Customer Service, (507) 454-5300, for a Return Material Authorization (RMA)
number before returning any item for repair. If you do not know why the product failed,
contact an Application Engineer or Product Manager. All RMA’s require:
• Ship-to address
• Bill-to address
• Contact name
 • Phone number
• Method of return shipment
• Your P.O. number
• Detailed description of the problem
• Any special instructions
• Name and phone number of person returning the product.
2. Prior approval and an Return Merchandise Authorization number from the Customer
Service Department is required when returning any product for credit, repair or evalua-
tion. Make sure the Return Merchandise Authorization number is on the outside of the car-
ton and on all paperwork returned. Ship on a Freight Prepaid basis.
3. After we receive your return, we will examine it and try to verify the reason for returning
it.
4. In cases of manufacturing defect, we will enter a repair order, replacement order or issue
credit for material returned. In cases of customer misuse, we will provide repair costs and
request a purchase order to proceed with the repair work.
5. To return products that are not defective, goods must be in new condition, in the origi-
nal boxes and they must be returned within 120 days of receipt. A 20 percent restocking
charge is applied for all returned stock controls and accessories.
6. If the unit cannot be repaired, you will receive a letter of explanation and be given the
option to have the unit returned to you at your expense or to have us scrap the unit.
7. Watlow reserves the right to charge for no trouble found (NTF) returns.

This EZ-ZONE® PM User’s Guide is copyrighted by Watlow Electric, Inc., © January 2015 with
all rights reserved.
EZ-ZONE PM is covered by U.S. Patent Numbers: 6005577; D553095; D553096; D553097;
D560175; D55766; and OTHER PATENTS PENDING
 TC Table of Contents
Chapter 1: Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Available EZ-ZONE PM Literature and Resources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Getting Started Quickly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
A Conceptual View of the PM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Inputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Internal Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Output Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Input Events and Output Events. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
What is a Profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Chapter 2: Install and Wire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
PM Integrated Isolation Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Chapter 3: Keys and Displays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Navigating the EZ-ZONE PM Integrated Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Default Home Page Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Chapter 4: Home Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Chapter 5: Operations Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Analog Input Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Linearization Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Process Value Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Digital Input/Output Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Limit Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Monitor Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Control Loop Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Alarm Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Current Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Timer Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Math Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Special Output Function Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Profile Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Chapter 6: Setup Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Analog Input Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Linearization Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Process Value Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® P MI C ontrol l er • 1 • Ta ble of C o n te n ts
 TC Table of Contents (cont.)
Digital Input/Output Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Limit Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Control Loop Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Output Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Alarm Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Current Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Timer Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Math Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Special Output Function Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Function Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Global Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Communications Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Standard Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Modbus RTU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
DeviceNet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Profibus DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Modbus TCP or EtherNet/IP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Real Time Clock Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Chapter 7: Profiling Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Profile Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Starting a Profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Profiling Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Chapter 8: Factory Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Custom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Lock Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Unlock Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Diagnostics Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Calibration Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Chapter 9: Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Changing PM Integrated Model Number to PM Express. . . . . . . . . . . 169
Saving and Restoring Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Tuning the PID Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Autotune. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Manual Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Autotuning with TRU‑TUNE+®. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Inputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Calibration Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Filter Time Constant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® P MI C ontrol l er • 2 • Ta ble of C o n te n ts
 TC Table of Contents (cont.)
Sensor Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Sensor Backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Set Point Minimum and Maximum. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Scale High and Scale Low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Range High and Range Low. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Receiving a Remote Set Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Ten Point Linearization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Duplex. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
NO-ARC Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Retransmitting a Process Value or Set Point. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Cool Output Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Resetting a Tripped Limit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Control Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Output Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Auto (closed loop) and Manual (open loop) Control. . . . . . . . . . . . 181
On-Off Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Proportional and (P) Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Proportional and Integral (PI) Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Proportional, Integral and Derivative (PID) Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Dead Band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Variable Time Base. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Single Set Point Ramping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Cascade Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Compressor Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Differential Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Ratio Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Duplex Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Motorized Valve Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Timer Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Setting up the timer function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Process and Deviation Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Set Points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Hysteresis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Latching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Silencing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® P MI C ontrol l er • 3 • Ta ble of C o n te n ts
 TC Table of Contents (cont.)
Blocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Current Sensing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Open and Shorted Load Circuit Detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Open Loop Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Programming the EZ Key/s. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Using Lockout and Password Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Using Lockout Method 1 (Read and Set Lock). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Using Lockout Method 2 (Password Enable). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Modbus - Using Programmable Memory Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
CIP - Communications Capabilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
CIP Implicit Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Profibus DP - (Decentralized Peripherals) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Software Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Using EZ-ZONE Configurator Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Chapter 10: Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Example 1: Single Loop Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Example 2: Sensor Backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Example 3: Square Root. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Example 4: Ratio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Example 5: Differential. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Example 6: Cascade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Example 7: Wet Bulb / Dry Bulb. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Example 8: Vaisala . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Example 9: Motorized Valve Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Chapter 11: Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Troubleshooting Alarms, Errors and Control Issues. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Modbus - Programmable Memory Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
CIP Implicit Assembly Structures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Compact Class Assembly Structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
PM Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Ordering Information for PM Integrated Controller Models. . . . . . . . . . 237
How to Reach Us . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® P MI C ontrol l er • 4 • Ta ble of C o n te n ts
 1 Chapter 1: Overview
Available EZ-ZONE PM Literature and Resources
Document Title and Part Number Description
Describes how to connect and use an advanced PID
loop controller. This particular model is limited to one
EZ-ZONE PM PID Controller Us-
control loop and 2 outputs. Like all PM controllers, it
er's Guide, part number: 0600-
comes with Standard Bus communications. As an addi-
0058-0000
tional option, it can also be ordered with Modbus® RTU
communications.
This document describes how to protect against un-
wanted thermal runaway and over temperature condi-
EZ-ZONE PM Limit (PML) User's
tions through proper configuration, programming. Like
Guide, part number: 0600-
all PM controllers, it comes with Standard Bus communi-
0057-0000
cations. As an additional option, it can also be ordered
with various fieldbus communications protocols.
The RUI provides a visual LED display to the RM configu-
EZ-ZONE Remote User Interface
ration and setup menus. This document illustrates and
(RUI) User's Guide, part num-
describes connections and also describes the Home Page
ber: 0600-0060-0000
for each RM module as viewed from the RUI.
EZ-ZONE PM Specification
Describes the PM family hardware options, features,
Sheet, part number: WIN-EZ-
benefits and technical specifications.
PM-1014
Watlow Support Tools DVD, Contains all related user documents, tutorial videos, ap-
part number: 0601-0001-0000 plication notes, utility tools, etc...

The DVD described above ships with the product and as stated contains all of the literature
above as well as much more. If the DVD is not available one can be acquired by contacting
Watlow Customer Service at 1-507-454-5300.
As an alternative to the DVD, all of the user documentation described above can also be
found on the Watlow website. Click on the following link to find your document of choice:
http://www.watlow.com/literature/index.cfm. Once there, simply type in the desired part
number (or name) into the search box and download free copies. Printed versions of all user
documents can also be purchased here as well.

Your Comments are Appreciated

In an effort to continually improve our technical literature and ensure that we are providing
information that is useful to you, we would very much appreciate your comments and sugges-
tions. Please send any comments you may have to the following e-mail address:
[email protected]

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® P MI C ontrol l er • 5 • Cha pte r 1 O v e r v i e w

 Introduction
The EZ-ZONE® PM takes the pain out of solving your thermal loop requirements. Watlow’s
EZ-ZONE PM controllers offer options to reduce system complexity and the cost of control loop
ownership. You can order the EZ-ZONE PM as a PID controller or an over-under limit controller,
or you can combine both functions in the PM Integrated Limit Controller. You now have the
option to integrate a high-amperage power controller output, an over-under limit controller
and a high-performance PID controller all in space saving, panel-mount packages. You can also
select from a number of serial communications options to help you manage system perfor-
mance.

Standard Features and Benefits

Advanced PID Control Algorithm
• TRU-TUNE+® Adaptive tune provides tighter control for demanding applications.
• Auto Tune for fast, efficient start ups
EZ-ZONE configuration communications and software
• Saves time and improves the reliability of controller set up
FM Approved Over-under Limit with Auxiliary Outputs
• Increases user and equipment safety for over-under temperature conditions
• To meet agency requirements, output 4 is the fixed limit output. Other outputs can be
configured to mirror the limit output (4).
Parameter Save & Restore Memory
• Reduces service calls and down time
Agency approvals: UL® Listed, CSA, CE, RoHS, W.E.E.E. FM, SEMI F47-0200, Class 1, Div 2
rating on selected models
• Assures prompt product acceptance
• Reduces end product documentation costs
EZ-Key/s
• Programmable EZ-Key enables simple one-touch operation of repetitive user activities
Programmable Menu System
• Reduces set up time and increases operator efficiency
Three-year warranty
• Demonstrates Watlows' reliability and product support
Touch-safe Package
• IP2X increased safety for installers and operators
P3T Armor Sealing System
• NEMA 4X and IP65 offers water and dust resistance, can be cleaned and washed down (in-
door use only)
• Backed up by UL 50 independent certification to NEMA 4X specification

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® P MI C ontrol l er • 6 • Cha pte r 1 Ove r v i e w

 Removable cage clamp wiring connectors
• Reliable wiring, reduced service calls
• Simplified installation
Heat-Cool Operation
• Provides application flexibility with accurate temperature and process control

Optional Features and Benefits

High-amperage Power Control Output
• Drives 15 amp resistive loads directly
• Reduces component count
• Saves panel space and simplifies wiring
• Reduces the cost of ownership
Integrated PID and Limit Controller
• Reduces wiring time and termination complexity compared to connecting discrete products
• Decreases required panel space
• Lowers installation costs
• Increases user ad equipment safety for over/under temperature conditions
Current Monitoring
• Detects heater current flow and provides alarm indication of a failed output device or
heater load
Serial Communications Capabilities
• Provides a wide range of protocol choices including Modbus® RTU, EtherNet/IPTM, PCCC
(Programmable Controller Communications Commands), DeviceNetTM, Modbus® TCP, and
Profibus DP
• Supports network connectivity to a PC or PLC
Dual Channel Controller
• For selected models provides two PID controllers in one space saving package
Enhanced Control Capabilities
• Easily handle complex process problems such as cascade, ratio, differential, square-root,
motorized valve control without slidewire feedback, wet-bulb/dry-bulb and compressor
control
Full-featured Alarms
• Improves operator recognition of system faults
• Control of auxiliary devices
Ten Point Linearization Curve
• Improves sensor accuracy
Remote Set Point Operation
• Supports efficient set point manipulation via a master control or PLC

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® P MI C ontrol l er • 7 • Cha pte r 1 O v e r v i e w

 Retransmit Output
• Supports industry needs for product process recording
Profile Capability
• Pre-programmed process control
• Ramp and soak programming with four files and 40 total steps

Getting Started Quickly

The PM control has a page and menu structure that is listed below along with a brief descrip-
tion of its purpose.
Setup Page Once received, a user would want to setup
Push and hold the up and down keys their control prior to operation. As an example,
(¿ ¯) for 6 seconds to enter. (See the define the input type and set the output cycle
Setup Page for further information) time.
Operations Page After setting up the control to reflect your
Press and hold the up and down keys (¿ equipment, the Operations Page would be used
¯) for 3 seconds to enter. (See the Op- to monitor or change runtime settings. As an
erations Page for further information) example, the user may want to see how much
time is left in a profile step or perhaps change
the high set point of the limit.
Factory Page For the most part the Factory Page has no
Press and hold the Infinity and the green bearing on the control when running. A user
Advance Keys (ˆ ‰) for 6 seconds to may want to enable password protection, view
enter. (See the Factory Page for further the control part number or perhaps create a
information) custom Home Page.
Home Page Pushing the green Advance Key ‰ will allow
The control is at the Home Page when the user to see and change such parameters as
initially powered up. the control mode, enable autotune and idle set
point to name a few.
Profile Page If equipped with this feature a user would want
Press and hold the the green Advance to go here to configure a profile.
Key ‰ for 6 seconds to enter. (See the
Profile Page for further information)
The default PM loop configuration out of the box is shown below:
• Analog Input functions set to thermocouple, type J
• Heat algorithm set for PID, Cool set to off
• Output 1 set to Heat
• Control mode set to Auto
• Set point set to 75 °F
If you are using the input type shown above, simply connect your input and output devices
to the control. Power up the control and push the up arrow ¿ on the face of the control to
change the set point from the default value of 75°F to the desired value. As the Set Point
increases above the Process Value, output 1 will come on and it will now begin driving your
output device. The PV function as shown in the graphic below is only available with PM4/8/9
models.

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® P MI C ontrol l er • 8 • Cha pte r 1 Ove r v i e w

 Note:
The output cycle time will have a bearing on the life of mechanical relay outputs and can
be different based on the type of output ordered. The output cycle time can be changed
in the Setup Page under the Output Menu.

EZ-ZONE PM Default Configuration

Input Process Output
Function Value PID
Function
Controller
Analog Input 1 Heat
Input Sensor (PV) Output 1 Heat
Thermocouple Type J
Function
Loop 1
Off

A Conceptual View of the PM

The flexibility of the PM software and hardware allows a large range of configurations. Acquir-
ing a better understanding of the controller’s overall functionality and capabilities while at the
same time planning out how the controller can be used will deliver maximum effectiveness in
your application.
It is useful to think of the controller in terms of functions; there are internal and external
functions. An input and an output would be considered external functions where the PID cal-
culation or a logic function would be an internal function. Information flows from an input
function to an internal function to an output function when the controller is properly config-
ured. A single PM controller can carry out several functions at the same time, for instance,
closed-loop control, monitoring for several different alarm situations, performing logical opera-
tions and operating switched devices, such as lights and motors. To ensure that the applica-
tion requirements are being met, it is important to first give thought to each external process
and then configuring the controller’s internal functions to properly accommodate the applica-
tion requirements.
Inputs
The inputs provide the information that any given programmed procedure can act upon. In
a simple form, this information may come from an operator pushing a button or as part of a
more complex procedure it may represent a remote set point being received from another
controller.
Each analog input typically uses a thermocouple, thermistor or RTD to read the temperature
of something. It can also read volts, current or resistance, allowing it to use various devices
to read humidity, air pressure, operator inputs and others values. The settings in the Analog
Input Menu (Setup Page) for each analog input must be configured to match the device con-
nected to that input.
Each digital input reads whether a device is active or inactive. A PM with digital input-output
(DIO) hardware can include up to eight DIO each of which can be used as either an input or an
output. Each DIO must be configured to function as either an input or output with the Direc-
tion parameter in the Digital Input/Output Menu (Setup Page).
The Function or EZ Key on the front panel of the PM also operates as a digital input by tog-
gling the function assigned to it in the Digital Input Function parameter in the Function Key
Menu (Setup Page).
Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® P MI C ontrol l er • 9 • Cha pte r 1 O v e r v i e w
 Internal Functions
The controller will use input signals to calculate a value and then perform an operation . A
function may be as simple as reading a digital input to set a state to true or false, or reading
a temperature to set an alarm state to on or off. Or, it could compare the temperature of a
process to the set point and calculate the optimal power for a heater.
To set up an internal function, it’s important to tell it what source, or instance, to use. For
example, an alarm may be set to respond to either analog input 1 or 2 (instance 1 or 2, re-
spectively).

Output Functions
Outputs can perform various functions or actions in response to information provided by a
function, such as operating a heater, driving a compressor, turning a light on or off, unlocking
a door etc...
Assign an output to a Function in the Output Menu or Digital Input/Output Menu. Then select
which instance of that function will drive the selected output. For example, you might assign
an output to respond to alarm 4 (instance 4) or to retransmit the value of analog input 2 (in-
stance 2).
You can assign more than one output to respond to a single instance of a function. For exam-
ple, alarm 2 could be used to trigger a light connected to output 1 and a siren connected to
digital output 5.

Input Events and Output Events

Input and output events are internal states that are used exclusively by profiles. The source of
an event input can come from a real-world digital input or an output from another function.
Likewise, event outputs may control a physical output such as an output function block or be
used as an input to another function.

What is a Profile
A profile is a set of instructions consisting of a sequence of steps. When a profile runs, the
controller automatically executes its steps in sequence. The step type determines what ac-
tion the controller performs. Steps can change temperatures and other process values gradu-
ally over time, maintain the temperatures and process values for specific periods, or repeat a
sequence of steps numerous times. At each step the profile can activate or deactivate outputs
that control other equipment. Also a step can have the controller wait for specific conditions
before proceeding such as, waiting for a switch closure and/or a specific process value to be
detected by a sensor.

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® P MI C ontrol l er • 10 • Cha pte r 1 Ove r v i e w

 EZ-ZONE® PM Integrated Model 1/16 DIN System Diagram
With a Current Transformer, Without Communications Card (Slot B)
Input Output
Functions PID
Output 1
Functions
Controller
none, switched dc/open collector, 5A off, heat, cool
alarm, retransmit,
mechanical relay (form C), process duplex, event
Analog Input 1
(Optional - (V, mA), or 0.5A SSR (form A)
none, Thermocouple, RTD (100Ω,
1kΩ), Thermistor 5kΩ, 10kΩ, 20kΩ, Ramp/Soak max 4
Input Sensor files, 40 steps)
40kΩ) Process (V, mV, mA) or 1k
Potentiometer
Output 2
none, 15A NO-ARC, switched dc, off, heat, cool
5A mechanical relay (form A), or alarm, event
- None Slot A
- Idle set point (Optional) 0.5A SSR (form A)
- Tune
- Alarm clear, request
- Force alarm
- Silence alarm
- Manual/auto mode
- Control outputs off Modbus
- Remote set point Address
enable Digital Input (or Output) 5 & 6 1 - 247
- Lock keypad (optional) none, switch, volts dc off, heat, cool
- TRU-TUNE+® disable Digital Output (or Input) 5 & 6
alarm, event
- Loop & alarms off Standard Bus (optional) none, switched dc
- Profile disable Zone Address
- Profile hold/resume EZ Key 1 - 16
- Profile start Programmable Event
- Profile start/stop
- Restore user settings Supervisory &
- Event inputs Power Board

RUI, EZ-ZONE EIA-485 Communication Slot C

Controllers, PLC, PC Standard Bus
or HMI (optional Modbus RTU)

Current Output 3
Transformer none, switched dc/open collector, 5A off, heat, cool
Board alarm, retransmit,
mechanical relay (form C), process duplex, event
(optional) (V, mA), or 0.5A SSR (form A)

Current Analog Input 2

Transformer Output 4
Current Transformer off, heat, cool
none, 15A NO-ARC, switched dc,
alarm, event
5A mechanical relay (form A), or
Slot B 0.5A SSR (form A)

Zone
Output Status Address

1 2 Indicates Zone
Address
3 4
Indicates I/O
5 6 Status

Note:
Number of inputs and outputs and various combinations of the same will vary
depending upon part number; see ordering matrix for more detail.

Current Monitoring
• Detects heater current flow
• Provides an alarm indication of a failed-load issue.

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® P MI C ontrol l er • 11 • Cha pte r 1 O v e r v i e w

 EZ-ZONE® PM Integrated Model 1/16 DIN System Diagram
With Auxillary Input, Without Communications Card (Slot B)
Input Output
Functions PID Output 1
Functions
Controller off, heat, cool
none, switched dc/open collector, 5A
alarm, retransmit,
mechanical relay (form C), process duplex, event
Analog Input 1
(V, mA), or 0.5A SSR (form A)
none, Thermocouple, RTD (100Ω, (Optional -
1kΩ), Thermistor 5kΩ, 10kΩ, 20kΩ, Ramp/Soak max 4
Input Sensor files, 40 steps)
40kΩ) Process (V, mV, mA) or 1k
Potentiometer
Output 2
none, 15A NO-ARC, switched dc, off, heat, cool
5A mechanical relay (form A), or alarm, event
- None Slots A
- Idle set point (Optional) 0.5A SSR (form A)
- Tune
- Alarm clear, request
- Force alarm
- Silence alarm
- Manual/auto mode
- Control outputs off Modbus
- Remote set point Address 1 - 247
enable Digital Input (or Output) 5 & 6
- Lock keypad (optional) none, switch, volts dc off, heat, cool
- TRU-TUNE+® disable Digital Output (or Input) 5 & 6
Standard Bus alarm, event
- Loop & alarms off Zone Address (optional) none, switched dc
- Profile disable 1 - 16
- Profile hold/resume EZ Key
- Profile start Programmable Event
- Profile start/stop
- Restore user settings Supervisory &
- Event inputs Power Board

RUI, EZ-ZONE EIA-485 Communication Slot C

Controllers, PLC, PC Standard Bus
or HMI (optional Modbus RTU)

Auxillary
Output 3
Input off, heat, cool
(optional)
none, switched dc/open collector, 5A
alarm, retransmit,
mechanical relay (form C), process duplex, event
Analog Input 2 (V, mA), or 0.5A SSR (form A)
none, CT, Thermocouple, RTD (100
Input Sensor Ω, 1kΩ), Thermistor 5kΩ, 10kΩ,
20kΩ, 40kΩ) Process (V, mV, mA)
or 1k Potentiometer
Output 4
none, 15A NO-ARC, switched dc, off, heat, cool
alarm, event
5A mechanical relay (form A), or
Slot B 0.5A SSR (form A)

Zone
Output Status Address

1 2 Indicates Zone
Address
3 4
Indicates I/O
5 6 Status
Note:
Number of inputs and outputs and various combinations of the same will vary
depending upon part number; see ordering matrix for more detail.

Remote Set Point Operation

• Supports efficient set point manipulation from a remote device, such as a master control
or PLC.

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® P MI C ontrol l er • 12 • Cha pte r 1 Ove r v i e w

 EZ-ZONE® PM Integrated Model 1/16 DIN With Limit, System Diagram
Without Communications Card (Slot B)
Input Output
Functions PID Output 1
Functions
Controller off, heat, cool
none, switched dc/open collector, 5A
alarm, retransmit,
mechanical relay (form C), process duplex, event
Analog Input 1
(V, mA), or 0.5A SSR (form A)
none, Thermocouple, RTD (100Ω, (Optional -
1kΩ), Thermistor 5kΩ, 10kΩ, 20kΩ, Ramp/Soak max 4
Input Sensor files, 40 steps)
40kΩ) Process (V, mV, mA) or 1k
Potentiometer
Output 2
none, 15A NO-ARC, switched dc, off, heat, cool
- None 5A mechanical relay (form A), or alarm, event
- Limit reset Slots A
- Idle set point (Optional) 0.5A SSR (form A)
- Tune
- Alarm clear, request
- Force alarm
- Silence alarm
- Manual/auto mode
- Control outputs off Modbus
- Remote set point Address 1 - 247
enable Digital Input (or Output) 5 & 6
- Lock keypad (optional) none, switch, volts dc off, heat, cool
- TRU-TUNE+® disable Standard Bus Digital Output (or Input) 5 & 6
alarm, event
- Loop & alarms off Zone Address (optional) none, switched dc
- Profile disable 1 - 16
- Profile hold/resume EZ Key
- Profile start Programmable Event
- Profile start/stop Supervisory &
- Restore user settings Power Board
- Event inputs

RUI, EZ-ZONE EIA-485 Communication

Controllers, PLC, PC Standard Bus Slot C
or HMI (optional Modbus RTU)

Limit Controller Output 3

off, heat, cool
Board none, switched dc/open collector, 5A alarm, retransmit,
(optional) mechanical relay (form C), process duplex or event
Analog Input 2 (V, mA), or 0.5A SSR (form A)
none, CT, Thermocouple, RTD (100
Input Sensor Ω, 1kΩ), Thermistor 5kΩ, 10kΩ,
20kΩ, 40kΩ) Process (V, mV, mA)
or 1k Potentiometer

Output 4
Limit
5A mechanical relay (form A)
Slot B

If Limit, this output must

be Limit
Zone
Output Status Address

1 2 Indicates Zone
Address
3 4
Indicates I/O
5 6 Status
Note:
Number of inputs and outputs and various combinations of the same will vary
depending upon part number; see ordering matrix for more detail.

Integrated PID and Limit Controller

• Reduces wiring time and termination complexity compared to connecting separate prod-
ucts
• Reduces panel space
• Reduces installation costs
• Increases dependability with backup control sensor operation
• Increases user and equipment safety for over-under temperature conditions

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® P MI C ontrol l er • 13 • Cha pte r 1 O v e r v i e w

 EZ-ZONE® PM Integrated Model 1/16 DIN System Diagram
with Expanded Communications (Slot B)
Input Output
Functions PID
Output 1
Functions
Controller
none, switched dc/open collector, 5A off, heat, cool
alarm, retransmit,
mechanical relay (form C), process duplex, event
Analog Input 1
(Optional - (V, mA), or 0.5A SSR (form A)
none, CT, Thermocouple, RTD (100
Ω, 1kΩ), Thermistor 5kΩ, 10kΩ, Ramp/Soak max 4
Input Sensor files, 40 steps)
20kΩ, 40kΩ) Process (V, mV, mA)
or 1k Potentiometer
Output 2
none, 15A NO-ARC, switched dc, off, heat, cool
5A mechanical relay (form A), or alarm, event
- None Slot A
- Idle set point (Optional) 0.5A SSR (form A)
- Tune
- Alarm clear, request
- Force alarm
- Silence alarm
- Manual/auto mode
- Control outputs off
- Remote set point
Digital Input (or Output) 5 & 6 Modbus Address
enable
- Lock keypad 1 - 247
(optional) none, switch, volts dc off, heat, cool
- TRU-TUNE+® disable Digital Output (or Input) 5 & 6
Standard Bus alarm, event
- Loop & alarms off (optional) none, switched dc
- Profile disable Zone Address
- Profile hold/resume EZ Key 1 - 16
- Profile start Programmable Event
- Profile start/stop Supervisory &
- Restore user settings Power Board
- Event inputs

EIA-485 Communication Slot C

Standard Bus
(optional Modbus RTU)

RUI, EZ-ZONE
Controllers, PLC, PC
or HMI
Communications
Board

Communications
EIA 232/485 Modbus RTU/TCP,
EtherNet/IP, DeviceNet, Profibus

Slot B

Zone
Output Status Address

1 2 Indicates Zone
Address
3 4
Indicates I/O
5 6 Status

Note:
Number of inputs and outputs and various combinations of the same will vary
depending upon part number; see ordering matrix for more detail.

Serial Communication Capabilities

• Supports network connectivity to a PC or PLC
• Available in a wide range of protocol choices, including Modbus RTU, EtherNet/IP™, Modbus
TCP

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® P MI C ontrol l er • 14 • Cha pte r 1 Ove r v i e w

 EZ-ZONE® PM Integrated Model 1/8 and 1/4 DIN System Diagram
Without 6EZ-ZONE
Digital I/O
PM(slot D), Without
Integrated 8th DINCommunications
System Diagram (slot E)
Without 6-digital I/O (slot D), Without Comms Card (slot E)
Input Output
Function Function
PID Output 1
none, switched dc/open collector, off, heat, cool,
Controller retransmit, alarm,
Analog Input 1 5A mechanical relay (form C), duplex or event
none, Thermocouple, RTD (100Ω, process, or 0.5A SSR (form A)
Input Sensor 1kΩ), Thermistor 5kΩ, 10kΩ, 20kΩ,
40kΩ) Process (V, mV, mA) or 1k (Optional -
Potentiometer Ramp/Soak max 4
files, 40 steps)
Output 2
none, 15A NO-ARC, switched dc, off, heat, cool,
5A mechanical relay (form A), or alarm or event

Slots A 0.5A SSR (form A)

(Optional)

Output 3
PID Controller, off, heat, cool,
none, switched dc/open collector, retransmit, alarm,
Limit, or Current
5A mechanical relay (form C), duplex or event
Transformer Sense
process, or 0.5A SSR (form A)
Analog Input 2 (CT)
none, CT, Thermocouple, RTD (100
Input Sensor Ω, 1kΩ), Thermistor 5kΩ, 10kΩ,
20kΩ, 40kΩ) Process (V, mV, mA)
or 1k Potentiometer Output 4
none, 15A NO-ARC, switched dc, off, heat, cool,
Slots B 5A mechanical relay (form A), or alarm, event or
- None (Optional) limit
- Limit reset 0.5A SSR (form A)
- Idle set point If limit, this output
- Tune
- Alarm clear, request must be limit
- Silence alarm
- Manual/auto mode
- Control mode
- Remote set point
EZ Key 1 & 2
enable
- Lock keypad Programmable Functions Modbus
- Force alarm Address 1 - 247
Digital Output (or Input) 5 & 6 off, heat, cool,
- TRU-TUNE+® disable alarm, or event
- Loop & alarms off Digital Input (or Output) 5 & 6 (optional) (optional) none, switched dc
- Profile disable Programmable Functions
- Profile hold/resume Standard Bus
- Profile start Zone Address
- Profile start/stop 1 - 16
- Restore user settings LEDs
- Event inputs Output Status Zone
Channel
Address
- Math LEDs

Supervisory & 1 2 Indicates Zone

Power Board Address & Channel
3 4
RUI, EZ-ZONE EIA-485 Communication
Controllers, PLC, PC Indicates I/O
Standard Bus 5 6 Status
or HMI (optional Modbus RTU)
7 8

Power Supply 100 to 240Vac

20 to 28 Vac or 12 to 40Vdc Slot C

Note:
Number of inputs and outputs and various combinations of the same will vary
depending upon part number; see ordering matrix for more detail.

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® P MI C ontrol l er • 15 • Cha pte r 1 O v e r v i e w

 EZ-ZONE® PM Integrated Model 1/8 and 1/4 DIN System Diagram
With 6 Digital
EZ-ZONEI/O PM
(slotIntegrated
D), Without Communications
8th DIN (slot E)
System Diagram
With 6-digital I/O (slot D), Without Comms Card (slot E)
Input Output
Function Function
PID Output 1
Controller none, switched dc/open collector, 5A off, heat, cool
Analog Input 1 alarm, retransmit,
mechanical relay (form C), process duplex or event
none, Thermocouple, RTD (100Ω,
Input Sensor (Optional - (V, mA), or 0.5A SSR (form A)
1kΩ), Thermistor 5kΩ, 10kΩ, 20kΩ,
Ramp/Soak max
40kΩ) Process (V, mV, mA) or 1k
4 files, 40 steps)
Potentiometer

Output 2
none, 15A NO-ARC, switched dc, off, heat, cool
alarm or event
Slots A 5A mechanical relay (form A), or
(Optional) 0.5A SSR (form A)

Output 3
PID Controller, none, switched dc/open collector, 5A off, heat, cool
Limit, or mechanical relay (form C), process
alarm, retransmit,
Current Trans- (V, mA), or 0.5A SSR (form A) duplex or event
Analog Input 2 former Sense
none, CT, Thermocouple, RTD (100 (CT)
Input Sensor Ω, 1kΩ), Thermistor 5kΩ, 10kΩ,
20kΩ, 40kΩ) Process (V, mV, mA)
or 1k Potentiometer Output 4
none, 15A NO-ARC, switched dc, off, heat, cool
Slots B 5A mechanical relay (form A), or alarm, event or limit
(Optional) 0.5A SSR (form A)
If limit, this output
must be limit

- None 6 - Digital
- Limit reset
- Idle set point Inputs / Outputs
Digital Output (or Input) 7-12 off, heat, cool
- Tune Digital Input (or Output) 7-12 (optional) alarm or event
- Alarm clear, request Programmable Functions (optional) none, switched dc
- Silence alarm
- Manual/auto mode Slot D
- Control mode
- Remote set point (Optional)
enable
- Lock keypad
- Force alarm
- TRU-TUNE+® disable
- Loop & alarms off
- Profile disable Modbus
- Profile hold/resume Digital Input (or Output) 5 & 6 (optional) Digital Output (or Input) 5 & 6 off, heat, cool
Address 1 - 247 alarm or event
- Profile start Programmable Functions (optional) none, switched dc
- Profile start/stop
- Restore user settings
- Event inputs
- Math EZ Key 1 & 2 Standard Bus
Zone Address
Programmable Functions 1 - 16 LEDs
Output Status Zone
Address Channel
LEDs

RUI, EZ-ZONE 1 2 Indicates Zone

EIA-485 Communication Address & Channel
Controllers, PLC, PC Standard Bus Supervisory &
or HMI (optional Modbus RTU) Power Board 3 4
Indicates I/O
5 6 Status

Power Supply 100 to 240Vac 7 8

20 to 28 Vac or 12 to 40Vdc Slot C

Note:
Number of inputs and outputs and various combinations of the same will vary
depending upon part number; see ordering matrix for more detail.

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® P MI C ontrol l er • 16 • Cha pte r 1 Ove r v i e w

 EZ-ZONE® PM Integrated Model 1/8 and 1/4 DIN with CT System Diagram
Without 6 Digital
EZ-ZONE PMI/O (slot D),
Integrated 8thWithout
DIN withCommunications (slot E)
CT System Diagram
Without 6-digital I/O (slot D), Without Comms Card (slot E)
Input Output
Function Function
PID Output 1
none, switched dc/open collector, off, heat, cool,
Controller retransmit, alarm,
Analog Input 1 5A mechanical relay (form C), duplex or event
none, Thermocouple, RTD (100Ω, process, or 0.5A SSR (form A)
Input Sensor 1kΩ), Thermistor 5kΩ, 10kΩ, 20kΩ,
40kΩ) Process (V, mV, mA) or 1k (Optional -
Potentiometer Ramp/Soak max 4
files, 40 steps)
Output 2
none, 15A NO-ARC, switched dc, off, heat, cool,
5A mechanical relay (form A), or alarm or event

Slots A 0.5A SSR (form A)

(Optional)

Output 3
Current Transformer off, heat, cool,
none, switched dc/open collector, retransmit, alarm,
Sense (CT)
5A mechanical relay (form C), duplex or event
process, or 0.5A SSR (form A)

Analog Input 2
Current Current Transformer
Transformer
Slots B Output 4
(Optional) none, 15A NO-ARC, switched dc, off, heat, cool,
5A mechanical relay (form A), or alarm, event or
- None limit
- Idle set point 0.5A SSR (form A)
- Tune If limit, this output
- Alarm clear, request
- Silence alarm must be limit
- Manual/auto mode
- Control mode
- Remote set point
enable
EZ Key 1 & 2
- Lock keypad
- Force alarm Programmable Functions Modbus
- TRU-TUNE+® disable Address 1 - 247
Digital Output (or Input) 5 & 6 off, heat, cool,
- Loop & alarms off alarm, or event
- Profile disable Digital Input (or Output) 5 & 6 (optional) (optional) none, switched dc
- Profile hold/resume Programmable Functions
- Profile start Standard Bus
- Profile start/stop Zone Address
- Restore user settings 1 - 16
- Event inputs LEDs
- Math Output Status Zone
Channel
LEDs Address

Supervisory & 1 2 Indicates Zone

Power Board Address & Channel
3 4
RUI, EZ-ZONE EIA-485 Communication
Controllers, PLC, PC Indicates I/O
Standard Bus 5 6 Status
or HMI (optional Modbus RTU)
7 8

Power Supply 100 to 240Vac

20 to 28 Vac or 12 to 40Vdc Slot C

Note:
Number of inputs and outputs and various combinations of the same will vary
depending upon part number; see ordering matrix for more detail.

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® P MI C ontrol l er • 17 • Cha pte r 1 O v e r v i e w

 EZ-ZONE® PM Integrated Model 1/8 and 1/4 DIN System Diagram
WithoutEZ-ZONE
6 Digital PM
I/O Integrated
(slot D), With Communications
8th DIN System Diagram(slot E)
Without 6-digital I/O (slot D), With Comms Card (slot E)
Input Output
Function Function
Output 1
PID off, heat, cool,
none, switched dc/open collector, retransmit, alarm,
Controller
5A mechanical relay (form C), duplex or event
Analog Input 1
process, or 0.5A SSR (form A)
none, Thermocouple, RTD (100Ω,
Input Sensor 1kΩ), Thermistor 5kΩ, 10kΩ, 20kΩ,
40kΩ) Process (V, mV, mA) or 1k (Optional -
Potentiometer Ramp/Soak max 4
files, 40 steps) Output 2
none, 15A NO-ARC, switched dc, off, heat, cool,
5A mechanical relay (form A), or alarm or event
0.5A SSR (form A)
Slots A
(Optional)

Output 3
PID Controller, none, switched dc/open collector, off, heat, cool,
retransmit, alarm,
Limit, or Current 5A mechanical relay (form C), duplex or event
Transformer Sense process, or 0.5A SSR (form A)
Analog Input 2 (CT)
none, CT, Thermocouple, RTD (100
Input Sensor Ω, 1kΩ), Thermistor 5kΩ, 10kΩ,
20kΩ, 40kΩ) Process (V, mV, mA)
or 1k Potentiometer Output 4
none, 15A NO-ARC, switched dc, off, heat, cool,
5A mechanical relay (form A), or alarm, event or
Slots B limit
(Optional) 0.5A SSR (form A)
If limit, this output
must be limit

Communications
Board
Communications
Modbus RTU/TCP, DeviceNet,
EtherNet/IP, Profibus Slots E
RUI, EZ-ZONE (Optional)
Controllers, PLC, PC
or HMI

EIA-485 Communication
Standard Bus
(optional Modbus RTU) Modbus
Address 1 - 247

Digital Output (or Input) 5 & 6 off, heat, cool,

100 to 240Vac (optional) none, switched dc alarm, or event
Power Supply
20 to 28 Vac or 12 to 40Vdc
Standard Bus
- None Zone Address
- Limit reset 1 - 16
- Idle set point LEDs
- Tune, TRU-TUNE+® Output Status Zone
Channel
- Alarm clear, request LEDs Address
- Silence alarm
- Manual/auto mode Supervisory & 1 2 Indicates Zone
Address & Channel
- Control mode Power Board
- Remote set point 3 4
EZ Key 1 & 2 Indicates I/O
enable
- Lock keypad Programmable Functions 5 6 Status
- Force alarm
- Loop & alarms off 7 8
- Profile disable Digital Input (or Output) 5 & 6 (optional) Slot C
- Profile hold/resume Programmable Functions
- Profile start
- Profile start/stop
- Restore user settings Note:
- Event inputs Number of inputs and outputs and various combinations of the same will vary
- Math depending upon part number; see ordering matrix for more detail.

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® P MI C ontrol l er • 18 • Cha pte r 1 Ove r v i e w

 2 Chapter 2: Install and Wire
Dimensions
1/16 DIN (PM6)
15.8 mm
(0.62 in)
101.6 mm
(4.00 in) 53.3 mm
(2.10 in)

53.3 mm
(2.10 in)

Side Front

L1 L3 98

K1 K3 99

J1 J3 CF
51.2 mm L2 L4 CD

(2.02 in) K2 K4 CE

T1 T2 B5

S1 S2 D6

R1 R2 D5

Top Back

1/16 DIN (PM6) Recommended Panel Spacing

44.96 to 45.47 mm
(1.77 to 1.79 inches)
Recommended panel spacing

44.96 to 45.47 mm
(1.77 to 1.79 inches)

21.6 mm
panel thickness 1.53 to 9.52 mm
(0.85 in)
(0.060 to 0.375) minimum

21.6 mm
(0.85 in)
minimum
Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® P MI C ontrol l er • 19 • Cha pte r 2 Ins ta ll a n d W i r e
 1/8 DIN (PM8) Vertical Dimensions
15.75 mm
(0.62 in)
1.52 mm
53.34 mm (0.06 in)
(2.10 in)

100.33 mm
(3.95 in)

54.8 mm
(2.16 in) 10.16 mm
(0.40 in)
30.73 mm
(1.21 in)
101.60 mm
(4.00 in)

1/8 DIN (PM8) Vertical Recommended Panel Spacing

44.96 to 45.60 mm
(1.77 to 1.79 inches)

92.00 to 92.80 mm
(3.62 to 3.65 inches)

21.6 mm
Panel thickness (0.060 in) 1.53 mm (0.85 in)
to (0.375 in) 9.52 mm Minimum

21.6 mm
(0.85 in)
Minimum

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® P MI C ontrol l er • 20 • Cha pte r 2 Ins ta ll a nd W i r e

 1/8 DIN (PM9) Horizontal Dimensions
15.75 mm
(0.62 in)

1.52 mm
100.33 mm (0.06 in)
(3.95 in)

53.8 mm
53.34 mm (2.16 in)
(2.10 in)

10.16 mm
(0.40 in)

30.73 mm
(1.21 in)
101.60 mm
(4.00 in)

1/8 DIN (PM9) Horizontal Recommended Panel Spacing

92.00 to 92.80 mm
(3.62 to 3.65 inches)

44.96 to 45.60 mm
(1.77 to 1.79 inches)

21.6 mm
Panel thickness (0.060 in) 1.53 mm (0.85 in)
to (0.375 in) 9.52 mm Minimum

21.6 mm
(0.85 in)
Minimum

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® P MI C ontrol l er • 21 • Cha pte r 2 Ins ta ll a n d W i r e

 1/4 DIN (PM4) Dimensions
15.75 mm
(0.62 in)

100.33 mm 1.52 mm
(3.95 in) (0.06 in)

100.33 mm
(3.95 in)

12.70 mm
(0.50 in)
30.73 mm
(1.21 in)
100.84 mm
(3.97 in)

1/4 DIN (PM4) Recommended Panel Spacing

92.0 to 93.0 mm
(3.62 to 3.65 inches)

92.0 to 93.0 mm
(3.62 to 3.65 inches)

21.6 mm Panel thickness 1.53 to 9.52 mm

(0.85 inches) (0.060 to 0.375 inches)
Minimum

21.6 mm
(0.85 inches)

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® P MI C ontrol l er • 22 • Cha pte r 2 Ins ta ll a nd W i r e

 Installation
1. Make the panel cutout using the mounting template dimensions in this chapter. Insert the
case assembly into the panel cutout.
2. While pressing the case assembly firmly against the
panel, slide the mounting collar over the back of
the controller. If the installation does not require a
NEMA 4X seal, simply slide together until the gasket
is compressed.
3. For a NEMA 4X (UL50, IP65) seal, alternately place
and push the blade of a screwdriver against each
of the the four corners of the mounting collar as-
sembly. Apply pressure to the face of the controller
while pushing with the screwdriver. Don't be afraid
to apply enough pressure to properly install the
controller. The seal system is compressed more by
mating the mounting collar tighter to the front pan-
el (see pictures above). If you can move the case assembly back and forth in the cutout,
you do not have a proper seal. The tabs on each side of the mounting collar have teeth
that latch into the ridges on the sides of the controller. Each tooth is staggered at a dif-
ferent depth from the front so that only one of the tabs, on each side, is locked onto the
ridges at a time.

Slide the mounting collar over Place the blade of a screwdriver in

the back of the controller. any of the corner of the mounting
collar assembly.
Note:
There is a graduated measurement difference between the upper and lower half of the
display to the panel. In order to meet the seal requirements mentioned above, ensure
that the distance from the front of the top half of the display to the panel is 16 mm
(0.630 in.) or less, and the distance from the front of the bottom half and the panel is
13.3 mm (0.525 in.) or less.

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® P MI C ontrol l er • 23 • Cha pte r 2 Ins ta ll a n d W i r e

 Removing the Mounted Controller from Its Case
1. From the controller's face, pull out the tabs on each side until you hear it click.

Pull out the tab on each side until Grab the unit above and below the
you hear it click. face and pull forward.

2. Grab the unit above and below the face with two hands and pull the unit out. On the
PM4/8/9 controls slide a screwdriver under the pry tabs and turn.

WARNING! ç
• This equipment is suitable for use in class 1, div. 2, Groups A, B, C and D or Non-Hazardous
locations only. Temperature Code T4A.
• WARNING – EXPLOSION HAZARD. Substitution of component may impair suitability for class 1,
div. 2.
• WARNING – EXPLOSION HAZARD. Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been
switched off or the area is known to be nonhazardous.
Returning the Controller to its Case
1. Ensure that the orientation of the controller is correct and slide it back into the housing.
Note:
The controller is keyed so if it feels that it will not slide back in do not force it. Check
the orientation again and reinsert after correcting.
2. Using your thumbs push on either side of the controller until both latches click.
Chemical Compatibility
This product is compatible with acids, weak alkalis, alcohols, gamma radiation and ultraviolet
radiation. This product is not compatible with strong alkalis, organic solvents, fuels, aromatic
hydrocarbons, chlorinated hydrocarbons, esters and keytones.

WARNING! ç
All electrical power to the controller and controlled circuits must be disconnected before
removing the controller from the front panel or disconnecting other wiring. Failure to fol-
low these instructions may cause an electrical shock and/or sparks that could cause an ex-
plosion in class 1, div. 2 hazardous locations.

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® P MI C ontrol l er • 24 • Cha pte r 2 Ins ta ll a nd W i r e

 Wiring
Slot A Slot B Slot D Slot E Terminal Function Configuration
Inputs Universal, RTD and Thermistor Inputs
1 2 7 - 12
T1 T2 T_ (RTD) or current + Input 1: all configurations
Input 2: PM _ _ _ _ _ - _ [R,L] _ _ _ _ _
S1 S2 +S_ (RTD), thermocouple -,
current -, potentiometer,
thermistor or volts -

R1 R2 R_ (RTD), thermocouple +,
volts +, potentiometer wiper
or thermistor
Current Transformer Input 2
T2 mA ac Input 2: PM _ _ _ _ _ - _ [T] _ _ _ _ _
S2 mA ac
Digital Inputs 7 - 12
B7 Common Inputs 7 to 12: PM[4,8,9] _ _ _ _ - [C,D]
D7 dc +input ______
D8 dc +input
D9 dc +input
D10 dc +input
D11 dc +input
D12 dc +input
Z7 Internal Supply
Outputs Switched dc/open collector
1 2 3 4 7 - 12
X1 X3 common (Any switched dc Output 1: PM _ _ _ [C] _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _
output can use this com- Output 3: PM _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ [C] _ _ _ _
mon.)
W1 W3 dc- (open collector)
Y1 Y3 dc+
Switched dc
W2 W4 dc- Output 2: PM _ _ _ _ [C] - _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Y2 Y4 dc+ Output 4: PM _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ [C] _ _ _
Universal Process
F1 F3 voltage or current - Output 1: PM _ _ _ [F] _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _
G1 G3 voltage + Output 3: PM _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ [F] _ _ _ _
H1 H3 current +
Mechanical Relay 5 A, Form C
L1 L3 normally open Output 1: PM _ _ _ [E] _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _
K1 K3 common Output 3: PM _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ [E] _ _ _ _
J1 J3 normally closed
NO-ARC 15 A, Form A
L2 L4 normally open Output 2: PM _ _ _ _ [H] - _ _ _ [H*] _ _
K2 K4 common _
* Output 4, PM4, PM8 and PM9 only
Mechanical Relay 5 A, Form A
L2 L4 normally open Output 2: PM _ _ _ _ [J] - _ _ _ _ _ _ _
K2 K4 common Output 4: PM _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ [J] _ _ _

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® P MI C ontrol l er • 25 • Cha pte r 2 Ins ta ll a n d W i r e

Wiring (cont.)
Slot A Slot B Slot D Slot E Terminal Function Configuration
Outputs (cont.) Solid-State Relay 0.5 A, Form A
1 2 3 4 7 - 12
L1 L2 L3 L4 normally open Output 1: PM _ _ _ [K] _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _
K1 K2 K3 K4 common Output 2: PM _ _ _ _ [K] - _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Output 3: PM _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ [K] _ _ _ _
Output 4: PM _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ [K] _ _ _
Digital Outputs
B7 Common PM[4,8,9] _ _ _ _ - [C, D] _ _ _ _ _ _
D7 switched dc/open collector
D8 switched dc/open collector
D9 switched dc/open collector
D10 switched dc/open collector
D11 switched dc/open collector
D12 switched dc/open collector
Z7 Internal Supply
Communications Modbus RTU 232/485 Communications
CB CB Modbus RTU EIA-485 T+/R+ Slot B: PM6 _ _ _ _ - [2] A A A _ _ _
CA CA Modbus RTU EIA-485 T-/R- Slot E: PM[4,8,9] _ _ _ _ - [2] _ _ _ _ _ _
CC CC Modbus RTU EIA-485 com-
mon
CB CB Modbus RTU EIA-485 T+/R+
CA CA Modbus RTU EIA-485 T-/R-
C5 C5 Modbus RTU EIA-232 com-
mon
C3 C3 Modbus RTU EIA-232 to DB9
pin 2
C2 C2 Modbus RTU EIA-232 to DB9
pin 3
DeviceNet™ Communications
V+ V+ DeviceNet power Slot B: PM6 _ _ _ _ - [5] A A A _ _ _
CH CH Positive side of DeviceNet Slot E: PM[4,8,9] _ _ _ _ - [5] _ _ _ _ _ _
bus
SH SH Shield interconnect
CL CL Negative side of DeviceNet
bus
V- V- DeviceNet power return
EtherNet/IP™ and Modbus® TCP
E8 E8 unused Slot B: PM6 _ _ _ _ - [3] A A A _ _ _
E7 E7 unused Slot E: PM[4,8,9] _ _ _ _ - [3] _ _ _ _ _
E6 E6 EtherNet/IP and Modbus TCP _
receive -
E5 E5 unused
E4 E4 unused
E3 E3 EtherNet/IP and Modbus TCP
receive +
E2 E2 EtherNet/IP and Modbus TCP
transmit -
E1 E1 EtherNet/IP and Modbus TCP
transmit +

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® P MI C ontrol l er • 26 • Cha pte r 2 Ins ta ll a nd W i r e

Wiring (cont.)
Slot A Slot B Slot D Slot E Terminal Function Configuration
Communications (cont.) Profibus DP Communications
VP VP Voltage Potential Slot B: PM6 _ _ _ _ - [6] AAA _ _ _
B B EIA-485 T+/R+ Slot E: PM [4, 8, 9] _ _ _ _- [6] AAAAAA
A A EIA-485 T-/R-
DG DG Digital ground (common)
trB trB Termination resistor B
B B EIA-485 T+/R+
A A EIA-485 T-/R-
trA trA Termination resistor A

Terminal Definitions for Slot C.

Slot C Terminal Function Configuration
Power
98 Power input: ac or dc+ all
99 Power input: ac or dc-
Standard Bus or Modbus EIA-485
CC Standard Bus or Modbus RTU EIA-485 common PM _ _ _ _ _ - [1] _ _ _ _ _ _
CA Standard Bus or Modbus RTU EIA-485 T-/R-
CB Standard Bus or Modbus RTU EIA-485 T+/R+
Standard Bus or Modbus EIA-232/485
CF Standard Bus EIA-485 common PM _ _ _ _ _ - [A,D,2,3,5] _ _ _
CD Standard Bus EIA-485 T-/R- ___
CE Standard Bus EIA-485 T+/R+
2 - Digital I/O Points
B5 Digital input-output common PM _ _ [2] _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _
D6 Digital input or output 6 PM _ _ [4] _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _
D5 Digital input or output 5

Back View Back View

Slot Orientation Slot Orientation
1/8 DIN Vertical PM8 1/8 DIN Horizontal PM9

Power
Power
Output 1

Output 1

Output 3
Communications Card or DIO

Communications Card

Dig I/O 5 & 6 485 Comms

Digital I/O 7 - 12
Dig I/O 5 & 6 485 Comms

Output 4
Output 2
Output 2

Input 2
Input 1
Input 1

A B D E C
A E C
Output 3

Digital I/O 7 - 12
Output 4
Input 2

B D

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® P MI C ontrol l er • 27 • Cha pte r 2 Ins ta ll a n d W i r e

 Back View Back View
Slot Orientation Slot Orientation
1/4 DIN PM4 1/16 DIN PM6

Power
Output 1

Power
Output 1

Output 3
Communications Card
Digital I/O 7 - 12

Dig I/O 5 & 6 485 Comms

Output 2

Dig I/O 5 & 6 485 Comms

Output 2

Output 4
Input 1

A D E C

Input 2
Input 1
Output 3

A B C
Output 4

Note:
Slot B above can also be config-
Input 2

ured with a communications card.

B

PM Integrated Isolation Block

Digital Inputs & Outputs

No Isolation
5-12
Controller Power Supply
12 to 40VÎ (dc)
Safety Isolation
20 to 28VÅ (ac)
100 to 240VÅ (ac)
Switched DC, Open Collector,
No Isolation
Process outputs
Safety Isolation

Controller
No Isolation Analog Input 1
Low Voltage Power Bus
Note:
Analog Input 1 can be optionally ordered as
an isolated input (see ordering information
in the back of this User’s Guide).

Mechanical Relay, Low-voltage

Solid-State Relay, Analog Input 2
Safety Isolation Isolation
NO-ARC Relay
Outputs

Low-voltage
Communications Ports
Isolation

Low-voltage Isolation: 42V peak

Safety Isolation: 2300VÅ (ac)

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® P MI C ontrol l er • 28 • Cha pte r 2 Ins ta ll a nd W i r e

Warning: ç Low Power PM_ _ [3,4] _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Use National Electric (NEC) or Slot C • Minimum/Maximum Ratings
other country-specific standard 98
power

wiring and safety practices when power

fuse
• 12 to 40VÎ (dc)
99
wiring and connecting this con- • 20 to 28VÅ (ac) Semi Sig F47
troller to a power source and to CF
electrical sensors or peripheral CD • 47 to 63 Hz
devices. Failure to do so may CE • 14VA maximum power consumption (PM4, 8
result in damage to equipment B5 and 9)
and property, and/or injury or D6
loss of life. • 10VA maximum power consumption (PM6)
D5
Note:
Power
Maximum wire size termination
and torque rating: High Power PM_ _ [1,2] _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _
• 0.0507 to 3.30 mm2 (30 to 12
AWG) single-wire termination Slot C
power
• Minimum/Maximum Ratings
or two 1.31 mm2 (16 AWG) 98
power
fuse
• 85 to 264VÅ (ac)
• 0.56 Nm (5.0 in-lb.) torque 99
CF
• 100 to 240VÅ (ac) Semi Sig F47
Note:
Adjacent terminals may be la- CD • 47 to 63 Hz
beled differently, depending on CE • 14VA maximum power consumption (PM4, 8
the model number. B5 and 9)
Note: D6
• 10VA maximum power consumption (PM6)
To prevent damage to the con- D5
troller, do not connect wires to Power
unused terminals.
Note: Digital Input 5 - 6 PM _ _ [2,4] _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Maintain electrical isolation
between analog input 1, digital
Slot C Digital Input Voltage Input
98
input-outputs, switched dc/open • Update rate 10 Hz
99
collector outputs and process • Dry contact or dc B_
common
outputs to prevent ground loops. CF
CD voltage
Note:
This equipment is suitable for CE DC Voltage Vdc
common
use in CLASS I, DIVISION 2,
DC Input
B5 • Input not to exceed
Groups A, B, C and D or Non- D6
36VÎ (dc) at 3mA
Hazardous locations only. Tem-
DC Input
D5 D_
perature Code T4A • Input active when >
3VÎ (dc) @ 0.25 mA
Warning: ç Dry Contact
Explosion Hazard - Dry contact • Input inactive when
closure Digital Inputs shall not be < 2V
used in Class I Division 2 Hazard- common
Dry Contact B_
ous Locations unless switch used
is approved for this application. • Input inactive when
> 500Ω
Warning: ç
Explosion Hazard – Substitution • Input active when <
of component may impair suit- 100Ω
D_
ability for CLASS I, DIVISION 2. • Maximum short cir-
cuit 13mA
Warning: ç 24 Vdc
Explosion Hazard - Do not dis-
connect while the circuit is live
or unless the area is known to be
free of ignitable concentrations
of flammable substances.

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® P MI C ontrol l er • 29 • Cha pte r 2 Ins ta ll a n d W i r e

Warning: ç Digital Input 7 - 12 PM [4,8,9] _ _ _ _- [C,D] _ _ _ _ _ _
Use National Electric (NEC) or Slot E Digital Input Event Con- Voltage Input
other country-specific standard Common
B7
wiring and safety practices when DC Input ditions
D7
common
wiring and connecting this con- DC Input
D8 • Dry Contact B_
troller to a power source and to DC Input
electrical sensors or peripheral
D9 -- Input inactive when
DC Input
devices. Failure to do so may DC Input
D10 > 100KΩ Vdc
result in damage to equipment D11
DC Input -- Input active when
and property, and/or injury or D12
loss of life.
Internal Supply < 50Ω
D_
Z7
Note: • Voltage
Maximum wire size termination -- Input inactive when
and torque rating: < 2V
• 0.0507 to 3.30 mm2 (30 to 12
Dry Contact
AWG) single-wire termination -- Input active when
or two 1.31 mm2 (16 AWG) > 3V
• 0.56 Nm (5.0 in-lb.) torque • Six user configurable
Note: digital inputs/out-
D_
Adjacent terminals may be la- puts per slot
beled differently, depending on 24 Vdc
the model number. -- Slot E DIO 7-12
Note:
Z_
To prevent damage to the con-
troller, do not connect wires to
unused terminals.
Connecting a Digital Output from Zone 2 to a Digital Input of Zone 1
Note:
Maintain electrical isolation PM8 - Zone 1 PM8 - Zone 2
between analog input 1, digital
input-outputs, switched dc/open Digital Input
B7
Digital Output
Power

collector outputs and process B7

Output 1

Power
D7
outputs to prevent ground loops. D8
D7
Dig I/O 5 & 6 485 Comms

D8

Dig I/O 5 & 6 485 Comms

Note:
Output 2

D9
D9

This equipment is suitable for D10

D10

use in CLASS I, DIVISION 2, D11

D11
Input 1

D12
Groups A, B, C and D or Non- Z7
D12
Pull-up resistor
Hazardous locations only. Tem- A E C
Z7
required 1K A E C
perature Code T4A to 10K Ohms

Warning: ç
Output 3

Explosion Hazard - Dry contact

Digital I/O 7 - 12

Digital I/O 7 - 12
Output 4

closure Digital Inputs shall not be

used in Class I Division 2 Hazard-
ous Locations unless switch used
Input 2

is approved for this application.

Warning: ç
B D
B D

Explosion Hazard – Substitution In the example above, digital output D8 from Zone 2 is connected
of component may impair suit- to digital input D8 of Zone 1.
ability for CLASS I, DIVISION 2.
Note:
Warning: ç As shown in the graphic above, for this configuration, a pull-up
Explosion Hazard - Do not dis- resistor is required.
connect while the circuit is live
or unless the area is known to be
free of ignitable concentrations
of flammable substances.

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® P MI C ontrol l er • 30 • Cha pte r 2 Ins ta ll a nd W i r e

Warning: ç Input 1, 2 Thermocouple
Use National Electric (NEC) or Slot A,B • 2K Ω maximum source resistance
other country-specific standard
wiring and safety practices when • >20 MΩ input impedance
wiring and connecting this con- • 3 microampere open-sensor detection
troller to a power source and to
electrical sensors or peripheral • Thermocouples are polarity sensitive. The nega-
devices. Failure to do so may tive lead (usually red) must be connected to S1
result in damage to equipment and/or S2.
and property, and/or injury or -
loss of life.
S_ • To reduce errors, the extension wire for ther-
+
Note:
R_ mocouples must be of the same alloy as the
Maximum wire size termination thermocouple.
and torque rating: Input 1: PM _ [C,R,B*] _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ (S1/
• 0.0507 to 3.30 mm2 (30 to 12 R1)
AWG) single-wire termination
or two 1.31 mm2 (16 AWG) Input 2: PM _ _ _ _ _ - _ [C,R,L] _ _ _ _ _ (S2/R2)
• 0.56 Nm (5.0 in-lb.) torque
*PM(4, 8 and 9) only
Note:
Adjacent terminals may be la- Input 1, 2 RTD
beled differently, depending on
the model number. Slot A,B Slot A, B • Platinum, 100 and 1,000 Ω @ 0°C
Note: • Calibration to DIN curve (0.00385
To prevent damage to the con- Ω/Ω/°C)
troller, do not connect wires to
unused terminals. • 20 Ω total lead resistance
Note: • RTD excitation current of 0.09 mA
Maintain electrical isolation typical. Each ohm of lead resis-
S2
between analog input 1, digital T_
tance may affect the reading by
input-outputs, switched dc/open S3
S_ S_
collector outputs and process S1
S3
0.03°C.
R_ S1 R_
outputs to prevent ground loops. • For 3-wire RTDs, the S1 lead (usu-
Note: ally white) must be connected to
This equipment is suitable for R1 and/or R2
use in CLASS I, DIVISION 2,
Groups A, B, C and D or Non- • For best accuracy use a 3-wire
Hazardous locations only. Tem- RTD to compensate for lead-length
perature Code T4A resistance. All three lead wires
Warning: ç must have the same resistance
Explosion Hazard - Dry contact Input 1: PM _ [C,R,B*] _ _ _ - _ _ _
closure Digital Inputs shall not be _ _ _ _ (S1/R1),(T1/S1/R1)
used in Class I Division 2 Hazard-
ous Locations unless switch used Input 2: PM _ _ _ _ _ - _ [C,R,L] _ _
is approved for this application. _ _ _ (S2/R2), (T2/S2/R2)
Warning: ç *PM(4, 8 and 9) only
Explosion Hazard – Substitution
of component may impair suit-
ability for CLASS I, DIVISION 2.

Warning: ç
Explosion Hazard - Do not dis-
connect while the circuit is live
or unless the area is known to be
free of ignitable concentrations
of flammable substances.

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® P MI C ontrol l er • 31 • Cha pte r 2 Ins ta ll a n d W i r e

Warning: ç Input 1, 2 Process
Use National Electric (NEC) or
other country-specific standard
Slot A, B Slot A, B • 0 to 20 mA @ 100 Ω input impedance
wiring and safety practices when • 0 to 10VÎ (dc) @ 20 kΩ input imped-
wiring and connecting this con- ance
troller to a power source and to
electrical sensors or peripheral • 0 to 50 mVÎ (dc) @ 20 kΩ input im-
devices. Failure to do so may pedance
result in damage to equipment • Scalable
and property, and/or injury or + T_
loss of life. - S_ -
S_
Input 1: PM _ [C,R,B*] _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _
Note: + R_ _ _ (-S1/+R1),(+T1/-S1)
Maximum wire size termination volts
amperes Input 2: PM _ _ _ _ _ - _ [C,R,L] _ _ _
and torque rating: _ _ (-S2/+R2),(+T2/-S2)
• 0.0507 to 3.30 mm2 (30 to 12
AWG) single-wire termination *PM(4, 8 and 9) only
or two 1.31 mm2 (16 AWG)
• 0.56 Nm (5.0 in-lb.) torque
Input 1,2 Potentiometer
Note:
Adjacent terminals may be la- Slot A, B • Use a 1 kΩ potentiometer.
beled differently, depending on Input 1: PM _ [C,R,B*] _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ (S1/
the model number.
R1)
Note:
To prevent damage to the con- Input 2: PM _ _ _ _ _ - _ [C,R,L] _ _ _ _ _ (S2/
troller, do not connect wires to R2)
unused terminals.
Note:
* PM(4, 8 and 9) only
CW
Maintain electrical isolation S_
between analog input 1, digital CCW
R_
input-outputs, switched dc/open
collector outputs and process
outputs to prevent ground loops. Input 1, 2 Thermistor
Note: Slot A, B • >20 MΩ input impedance
This equipment is suitable for
use in CLASS I, DIVISION 2,
• 3 microampere open-sensor detection
Groups A, B, C and D or Non- Input 1: PM _ [J,N,E*] _ _ _ _-_ _ _ _ _ _ _ (S1/
Hazardous locations only. Tem- R1)
perature Code T4A
Input 2: PM _ _ _ _ _ - _ [J,P,M] _ _ _ _ _ (S2/
Warning: ç R2)
Explosion Hazard - Dry contact S_
closure Digital Inputs shall not be * For input 1, option E is available with PM4, 8
R_
used in Class I Division 2 Hazard- and 9 models only.
ous Locations unless switch used
is approved for this application. Input 2 Current Transformer PM _ _ _ _ _ - _ [T] _ _ _ _ _
Warning: ç Slot B • Input range is 0 to 50 mA
Explosion Hazard – Substitution • Current transformer part number: 16-0246
of component may impair suit-
ability for CLASS I, DIVISION 2. • 100 Ω input impedance
• Response time: 1 second maximum
Warning: ç
Explosion Hazard - Do not dis-
• Accuracy +/-1 mA typical
connect while the circuit is live
T2
or unless the area is known to be
free of ignitable concentrations S2
of flammable substances.

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® P MI C ontrol l er • 32 • Cha pte r 2 Ins ta ll a nd W i r e

Warning: ç
Example: Using a Current Transformer
Is = IpT/R = 50mA
Use National Electric (NEC) or CSC = Ip(full scale) = 50mA(R)/T
other country-specific standard CSI = Output N
wiring and safety practices when L2 L1 Is = Current in secondary of current transformer
wiring and connecting this con- Ip = Current in primary of current transformer
T = Number of turns through the primary of the transformer
troller to a power source and to Fuse
R = Number of turns in the secondary of the current
electrical sensors or peripheral transformer (Turns ratio, assuming one primary turn)
SSR
devices. Failure to do so may CSC = Current Scaling (parameter found in Current Menu
3A x 4 of Setup Page)
result in damage to equipment CSI = Current Source Instance (parameter found in Current
and property, and/or injury or Menu of Setup Page)
loss of life. Turns around CT Output N

Note: 12A Controller

Maximum wire size termination CT Input
and torque rating:
CT Ratio R = 1000:1
• 0.0507 to 3.30 mm2 (30 to 12
AWG) single-wire termination
or two 1.31 mm2 (16 AWG) 12A x 4 = 48A : 48mA 48mA

• 0.56 Nm (5.0 in-lb.) torque

Note: CT Secondary Current

Adjacent terminals may be la- CT Primary Current

beled differently, depending on Turns around CT

the model number. Total current

Note:
To prevent damage to the con-
troller, do not connect wires to
unused terminals. Digital Output 5 - 6 PM _ _ _ _ _ - _ [T] _ _ _ _ _
Note: Slot C Digital Output switched dc outputs

Maintain electrical isolation 98 • SSR drive signal

between digital input-outputs, 99
switched dc/open collector • Update rate 10 Hz 24VDC D5
CF
outputs and process outputs to • Maximum open cir-
CD D6
prevent ground loops. cuit voltage is 22 to
CE
Note: common 25VÎ (dc) B5
B5 Internal Circuitry
This equipment is suitable for
D6 switched dc • PNP transistor source
use in CLASS I, DIVISION 2, switched dc
Groups A, B, C and D or Non- D5 • Typical drive; 21mA @
Hazardous locations only. Tem- 4.5VÎ (dc) for DO5, Note:
perature Code T4
and 11mA @ 4.5V for See output curves be-
Warning: ç DO6 low.
Explosion Hazard – Substitution
of component may impair suit-
• Current limit 24mA
ability for CLASS I, DIVISION 2. for Output 5 and
12mA Output 6
Warning: ç • Output 5 capable of
Explosion Hazard - Do not dis-
connect while the circuit is live
driving one 3-pole
or unless the area is known to be DIN-A-MITE
free of ignitable concentrations • Output 6 capable of
of flammable substances.
driving one 1-pole
Quencharc Note: DIN-A-MITE
Switching pilot duty inductive
loads (relay coils, solenoids,
etc.) with the mechanical relay,
solid state relay or open collector
output options requires use of an
R.C. suppressor.

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® P MI C ontrol l er • 33 • Cha pte r 2 Ins ta ll a n d W i r e

Warning: ç
Use National Electric (NEC) or
other country-specific standard
wiring and safety practices when
wiring and connecting this con-
troller to a power source and to
electrical sensors or peripheral
devices. Failure to do so may
result in damage to equipment
and property, and/or injury or
loss of life.
Note:
Maximum wire size termination
and torque rating:
• 0.0507 to 3.30 mm2 (30 to 12
AWG) single-wire termination
or two 1.31 mm2 (16 AWG)
• 0.56 Nm (5.0 in-lb.) torque
Note:
Adjacent terminals may be la-
beled differently, depending on
the model number.
Note:
To prevent damage to the con-
troller, do not connect wires to
unused terminals.
Note:
Maintain electrical isolation
between digital input-outputs,
switched dc/open collector
outputs and process outputs to
prevent ground loops.
Note:
This equipment is suitable for
use in CLASS I, DIVISION 2,
Groups A, B, C and D or Non-
Hazardous locations only. Tem-
perature Code T4
Warning: ç
Explosion Hazard – Substitution
of component may impair suit-
ability for CLASS I, DIVISION 2.

Warning: ç
Explosion Hazard - Do not dis-
connect while the circuit is live
or unless the area is known to be
free of ignitable concentrations
of flammable substances.

Quencharc Note:
Switching pilot duty inductive
loads (relay coils, solenoids,
etc.) with the mechanical relay,
solid state relay or open collector
output options requires use of an
R.C. suppressor.

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® P MI C ontrol l er • 34 • Cha pte r 2 Ins ta ll a nd W i r e

Warning: ç
Switched DC Wiring Example Using DO 5-6
Use National Electric (NEC) or switched dc outputs
other country-specific standard
wiring and safety practices when
wiring and connecting this con-
troller to a power source and to D5
Htr 1
+
electrical sensors or peripheral VDC -
Htr 2
+
devices. Failure to do so may -
D6
result in damage to equipment
and property, and/or injury or
loss of life. B5
Internal Circuitry DC80-60C0-0000
Note:
Maximum wire size termination
and torque rating:
• 0.0507 to 3.30 mm2 (30 to 12
AWG) single-wire termination
or two 1.31 mm2 (16 AWG)
• 0.56 Nm (5.0 in-lb.) torque
Note:
Adjacent terminals may be la- Digital Output 7 - 12 PM [4,6,8] _ _ _ _- [C,D] _ _ _ _ _ _
beled differently, depending on
the model number. Slot D • Internal sup- Open Collector Outputs
Common
Note:
B7
Collector out
ply limited to B7 Common
D7
To prevent damage to the con- D8
Collector out 400mA, maxi-
troller, do not connect wires to D9
Collector out
mum open cir- D7

unused terminals. D10

Collector out
cuit voltage of D8

Note: Collector out

D11
25VÎ (dc), typi- D9
Maintain electrical isolation D12
Collector out VDC

between digital input-outputs, Z7

Internal Supply cal 8VÎ (dc) at D10

switched dc/open collector 80mA. D11

outputs and process outputs to • Maximum out- D12

prevent ground loops.
put sink current Z7 Internal Supply

Note:
per output is Internal Circuitry

This equipment is suitable for

use in CLASS I, DIVISION 2, 1.5A (external
Groups A, B, C and D or Non- class 2 or *SELV
Hazardous locations only. Tem- supply required)
perature Code T4
• Total sink cur-
Warning: ç rent for all out-
Explosion Hazard – Substitution puts not to ex-
of component may impair suit-
ability for CLASS I, DIVISION 2.
ceed 8A
• Do not connect
Warning: ç outputs in par-
Explosion Hazard - Do not dis- allel
connect while the circuit is live
or unless the area is known to be * Saftey Extra Low
free of ignitable concentrations Voltage
of flammable substances.

Quencharc Note:
Switching pilot duty inductive
loads (relay coils, solenoids,
etc.) with the mechanical relay,
solid state relay or open collector
output options requires use of an
R.C. suppressor.

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® P MI C ontrol l er • 35 • Cha pte r 2 Ins ta ll a n d W i r e

Warning: ç
Switched DC Wiring Example Using DO 7-12
Use National Electric (NEC) or
other country-specific standard
wiring and safety practices when
wiring and connecting this con-
troller to a power source and to
electrical sensors or peripheral
devices. Failure to do so may
result in damage to equipment
and property, and/or injury or
loss of life.
Note:
Maximum wire size termination
and torque rating:
• 0.0507 to 3.30 mm2 (30 to 12
AWG) single-wire termination
or two 1.31 mm2 (16 AWG)
• 0.56 Nm (5.0 in-lb.) torque
Note: Internal Supply

Adjacent terminals may be la-

beled differently, depending on Note:
the model number. As a switched DC output; this output is a constant current out-
Note: put delivering 750mW, current limited to 400mA. The internal
To prevent damage to the con- supply does have a maximum open circuit voltage of 22VÎ
troller, do not connect wires to
unused terminals.
(dc) and minimum open circuit voltage of 19VÎ (dc). Pin Z7 is
Note:
shared to all digital outputs. This type of output is meant to
Maintain electrical isolation drive solid state relays, not mechanical relays.
between digital input-outputs, As an open collector output, use an external power supply with
switched dc/open collector
outputs and process outputs to
the negative wired to B7, the positive to the coil of a pilot me-
prevent ground loops. chanical relay and the other side of the coil wired to D_. Each
Note: open collector output can sink 1.5A with the total for all open
This equipment is suitable for collector outputs not exceeding 8 amperes. Ensure that a kick-
use in CLASS I, DIVISION 2, back diode is reversed wired across the relay coil to prevent
Groups A, B, C and D or Non- damage to the internal transistor.
Hazardous locations only. Tem-
perature Code T4
Open Collector Wiring Example Using DO 7-12
Warning: ç
Explosion Hazard – Substitution
of component may impair suit-
ability for CLASS I, DIVISION 2.

Warning: ç
Explosion Hazard - Do not dis-
connect while the circuit is live
or unless the area is known to be
free of ignitable concentrations
of flammable substances.

Quencharc Note:
Switching pilot duty inductive
loads (relay coils, solenoids,
etc.) with the mechanical relay,
solid state relay or open collector
output options requires use of an
R.C. suppressor. Internal Supply

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® P MI C ontrol l er • 36 • Cha pte r 2 Ins ta ll a nd W i r e

Warning: ç Output 1, 3 Switched DC/Open Collector
Use National Electric (NEC) or
other country-specific standard common
Slot A, B Switched DC Switched DC
X_
wiring and safety practices when dc - (open collector)
W_ • Maximum open cir-
X_ common
wiring and connecting this con-
dc +
Y_ cuit voltage is 22 to Load
troller to a power source and to 25VÎ (dc) W_
dc -
electrical sensors or peripheral
devices. Failure to do so may • 30mA max. per single 24VDC

dc +
result in damage to equipment output / 40mA max. Y_

and property, and/or injury or total per paired out-

loss of life.
puts (1 & 2, 3 & 4)
Note: Open Collector
Maximum wire size termination
• Typical drive; 4.5VÎ
Power Supply
and torque rating: (dc) @ 30 mA
common
• 0.0507 to 3.30 mm2 (30 to 12 • Short circuit limited X_

AWG) single-wire termination to <50 mA W_

dc -
or two 1.31 mm2 (16 AWG)
• 0.56 Nm (5.0 in-lb.) torque
• NPN transistor sink 24VDC
Load
Y_

Note: • Use dc- and dc+ to

Adjacent terminals may be la- drive external solid-
beled differently, depending on state relay
the model number.
• 1-pole DIN-A-MITE: up
Note:
to 4 in parallel or 4
To prevent damage to the con-
troller, do not connect wires to in series
unused terminals. • 2-pole DIN-A-MITE: up
Note: to 2 in parallel or 2
Maintain electrical isolation in series
between digital input-outputs,
switched dc/open collector • 3-pole DIN-A-MITE: up
outputs and process outputs to to 2 in series
prevent ground loops. Output 1: (X1,-W1,+Y1)
Note: PM _ _ _ [C] _ - _ _ _ _
This equipment is suitable for ___
use in CLASS I, DIVISION 2,
Groups A, B, C and D or Non- Output 3: (X3,-W3,+Y3)
Hazardous locations only. Tem- PM _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ [C] _
perature Code T4 ___
Warning: ç
Explosion Hazard – Substitution
of component may impair suit-
ability for CLASS I, DIVISION 2.

Warning: ç
Explosion Hazard - Do not dis-
connect while the circuit is live
or unless the area is known to be
free of ignitable concentrations
of flammable substances.

Quencharc Note:
Switching pilot duty inductive
loads (relay coils, solenoids,
etc.) with the mechanical relay,
solid state relay or open collector
output options requires use of an
R.C. suppressor.

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® P MI C ontrol l er • 37 • Cha pte r 2 Ins ta ll a n d W i r e

Warning: ç Output 1, 3 Mechanical Relay, Form C
Use National Electric (NEC) or
other country-specific standard normally open
Slot A, B • 5A at 240VÅ (ac) or
L_
wiring and safety practices when common 30VÎ (dc) maximum
K_
wiring and connecting this con- normally closed
J_
resistive load
troller to a power source and to
• 20mA at 24V minimum L_
electrical sensors or peripheral normally open

devices. Failure to do so may load

result in damage to equipment • 125VA pilot duty at K_

and property, and/or injury or 120/240VÅ (ac), 25VA common

loss of life.
at 24VÅ (ac)
Note: J_

Maximum wire size termination • 100,000 cycles at rated normally closed

and torque rating: load

• 0.0507 to 3.30 mm2 (30 to 12 • Output does not supply
AWG) single-wire termination
power.
or two 1.31 mm2 (16 AWG)
• 0.56 Nm (5.0 in-lb.) torque • For use with ac or dc
Note: Output 1: (L1,K1,J1)
Adjacent terminals may be la- PM _ _ _ [E] _ - _ _ _ _
beled differently, depending on ___
the model number.
Output 3: (L3,K3,J3)
Note:
To prevent damage to the con- PM _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ [E] _
troller, do not connect wires to ___
unused terminals.
Note:
Output 1, 3 Universal Process
Maintain electrical isolation Slot A, B • 0 to 20 mA into 800 Ω F_
between digital input-outputs, volts or current -
F_ maximum load negative
switched dc/open collector volts +
G_
outputs and process outputs to current + • 0 to 10VÎ (dc) into 1 0 to 10 V

H_
prevent ground loops. kΩ minimum load 4 to 20 mA G_
Note: • Scalable volts +

This equipment is suitable for

use in CLASS I, DIVISION 2,
• Output supplies power
H_
Groups A, B, C and D or Non- • Cannot use voltage current +

Hazardous locations only. Tem- and current outputs at

perature Code T4
same time
Warning: ç • Output may be used as
Explosion Hazard – Substitution retransmit or control.
of component may impair suit-
ability for CLASS I, DIVISION 2. Output 1: (F1,G1,H1)
PM _ _ _ [F] _ - _ _ _ _
Warning: ç ___
Explosion Hazard - Do not dis-
connect while the circuit is live Output 3: (F3,G3,H3)
or unless the area is known to be PM _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ [F] _
free of ignitable concentrations ___
of flammable substances.

Quencharc Note:
Switching pilot duty inductive
loads (relay coils, solenoids,
etc.) with the mechanical relay,
solid state relay or open collector
output options requires use of an
R.C. suppressor.

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® P MI C ontrol l er • 38 • Cha pte r 2 Ins ta ll a nd W i r e

Warning: ç Output 1, 3 Solid-State Relay, Form A
Use National Electric (NEC) or
other country-specific standard
Slot A, B • 0.5A at 20 to 264VÅ (ac)
volts or current -
wiring and safety practices when volts +
F_ maximum resistive load L_
wiring and connecting this con- G_
current + • 20VA 120/240VÅ (ac) pi-
troller to a power source and to H_
lot duty
electrical sensors or peripheral K_
devices. Failure to do so may • Opto-isolated, without
result in damage to equipment contact suppression
and property, and/or injury or
loss of life. • Maximum off state leak-
Note: age of 105µA
Maximum wire size termination • Output does not supply
and torque rating: power
• 0.0507 to 3.30 mm2 (30 to 12 • Do not use on dc loads.
AWG) single-wire termination
or two 1.31 mm2 (16 AWG) • See Quencharc note
• 0.56 Nm (5.0 in-lb.) torque Output 1: (L1, K1)
Note: PM _ _ _ [K] _ - _ _ _ _ _
Adjacent terminals may be la- __
beled differently, depending on
the model number. Output 3: (L3, K3)
Note: PM _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ [K] _ _
To prevent damage to the con- __
troller, do not connect wires to
unused terminals.
1 Amp SSR Derating Curve
Note:
1.1
Maintain electrical isolation
between digital input-outputs, 1

switched dc/open collector 0.9

outputs and process outputs to
0.8
prevent ground loops.

Safe Operating Area

0.7
Note:
Amps RMS

This equipment is suitable for 0.6

use in CLASS I, DIVISION 2, 0.5

Groups A, B, C and D or Non-
0.4
Hazardous locations only. Tem-
perature Code T4 0.3

Warning: ç
0.2

Explosion Hazard – Substitution 0.1

of component may impair suit- 0

ability for CLASS I, DIVISION 2. -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40
o
50 60 70
Ambient Temperature ( C)

Warning: ç
Explosion Hazard - Do not dis-
connect while the circuit is live
or unless the area is known to be
free of ignitable concentrations
of flammable substances.

Quencharc Note:
Switching pilot duty inductive
loads (relay coils, solenoids,
etc.) with the mechanical relay,
solid state relay or open collector
output options requires use of an
R.C. suppressor.

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® P MI C ontrol l er • 39 • Cha pte r 2 Ins ta ll a n d W i r e

Warning: ç Output 2, 4 Switched DC
Use National Electric (NEC) or
other country-specific standard
Slot A, B • Maximum open circuit
common
wiring and safety practices when voltage is 22 to 25VÎ Load
wiring and connecting this con- (dc) W_
dc -

troller to a power source and to

• 30mA max. per single
24V
dc +
electrical sensors or peripheral dc- Y_

devices. Failure to do so may

W_ output / 40mA max. to-
dc+
result in damage to equipment Y_ tal per paired outputs
and property, and/or injury or (1 & 2, 3 & 4)
loss of life.
• Typical drive; 4.5VÎ
Note:
Maximum wire size termination
(dc) @ 30 mA
and torque rating: • Short circuit limited to
• 0.0507 to 3.30 mm2 (30 to 12 <50 mA
AWG) single-wire termination • NPN transistor sink
or two 1.31 mm2 (16 AWG)
• 0.56 Nm (5.0 in-lb.) torque • Use dc- and dc+ to
Note: drive external solid-
Adjacent terminals may be la- state relay
beled differently, depending on • 1-pole DIN-A-MITE: up
the model number.
to 4 in parallel or 4 in
Note:
series
To prevent damage to the con-
troller, do not connect wires to • 2-pole DIN-A-MITE: up
unused terminals. to 2 in parallel or 2 in
Note: series
Maintain electrical isolation • 3-pole DIN-A-MITE: up
between digital input-outputs,
switched dc/open collector to 2 in series
outputs and process outputs to Output 2: (-W2, +Y2)
prevent ground loops.
PM _ _ _ _ [C] - _ _ _ _ _
Note: __
This equipment is suitable for
use in CLASS I, DIVISION 2, Output 4: (-W4, +Y4)
Groups A, B, C and D or Non- PM _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ [C] _
Hazardous locations only. Tem- __
perature Code T4
Warning: ç
Explosion Hazard – Substitution
of component may impair suit-
ability for CLASS I, DIVISION 2.

Warning: ç
Explosion Hazard - Do not dis-
connect while the circuit is live
or unless the area is known to be
free of ignitable concentrations
of flammable substances.

Quencharc Note:
Switching pilot duty inductive
loads (relay coils, solenoids,
etc.) with the mechanical relay,
solid state relay or open collector
output options requires use of an
R.C. suppressor.

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® P MI C ontrol l er • 40 • Cha pte r 2 Ins ta ll a nd W i r e

Warning: ç Output 2, 4 NO-ARC Relay, Form A
Use National Electric (NEC) or
other country-specific standard
Slot A, B • 15A at 85 to 264VÅ
(ac) resistive load only L_
wiring and safety practices when
wiring and connecting this con- • 2,000,000 cycle rating
troller to a power source and to
for NO-ARC circuit
electrical sensors or peripheral normally open
L_
devices. Failure to do so may common • 100mA minimum load K_
K_
result in damage to equipment • 2mA maximum off
and property, and/or injury or
loss of life. state leakage
Note: • Do not use on dc loads
Maximum wire size termination • Output does not supply
and torque rating: power
• 0.0507 to 3.30 mm2 (30 to 12
AWG) single-wire termination Output 2: (L2, K2)
or two 1.31 mm2 (16 AWG) PM _ _ _ _ [H] - _ _ _ _
• 0.56 Nm (5.0 in-lb.) torque ___
Note: Output 4: (L4, K4)
Adjacent terminals may be la- PM [4, 8, 9] _ _ _ _ - _ _
beled differently, depending on _ [H] _ _ _
the model number.
Note:
To prevent damage to the con- Output 2, 4 Mechanical Relay, Form A
troller, do not connect wires to Slot A, B • 5A at 240VÅ (ac) or
unused terminals. L_
30VÎ (dc) maximum re-
Note:
Maintain electrical isolation
sistive load
between digital input-outputs, normally open • 20mA at 24V minimum K_
switched dc/open collector L_
common
load
outputs and process outputs to K_
prevent ground loops. • 125 VA pilot duty @
Note: 120/240VÅ (ac), 25VA at
This equipment is suitable for 24VÅ (ac)
use in CLASS I, DIVISION 2, • 100,000 cycles at rated
Groups A, B, C and D or Non-
load
Hazardous locations only. Tem-
perature Code T4 • Output does not supply
power
Warning: ç
Explosion Hazard – Substitution • For use with ac or dc
of component may impair suit-
ability for CLASS I, DIVISION 2.
See Quencharc note
Output 2: (L2, K2)
Warning: ç PM _ _ _ _ [K] - _ _ _ _ _
Explosion Hazard - Do not dis- __
connect while the circuit is live
or unless the area is known to be Output 4: (L4, K4)
free of ignitable concentrations PM _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ [K] _
of flammable substances. __
Quencharc Note:
Switching pilot duty inductive
loads (relay coils, solenoids,
etc.) with the mechanical relay,
solid state relay or open collector
output options requires use of an
R.C. suppressor.

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® P MI C ontrol l er • 41 • Cha pte r 2 Ins ta ll a n d W i r e

Warning: ç Output 2, 4 Solid-State Relay, Form A
Use National Electric (NEC) or
other country-specific standard
Slot A, B • 0.5A at 20 to 264VÅ
wiring and safety practices when (ac) maximum resis- L_
wiring and connecting this con- tive load
troller to a power source and to
electrical sensors or peripheral normally open • 20VA 120/240VÅ (ac)
L_ K_
devices. Failure to do so may common
pilot duty
result in damage to equipment K_
• Opto-isolated, with-
and property, and/or injury or
loss of life.
out contact suppres-
Note:
sion
Maximum wire size termination • Maximum off state
and torque rating: leakage of 105µA
• 0.0507 to 3.30 mm2 (30 to 12 • Output does not sup-
AWG) single-wire termination
or two 1.31 mm2 (16 AWG)
ply power
• 0.56 Nm (5.0 in-lb.) torque • Do not use on dc
Note: loads.
Adjacent terminals may be la- See Quencharc note
beled differently, depending on
the model number. Output 2: (L2, K2)
Note: PM _ _ _ _ [K] - _ _ _ _
To prevent damage to the con- ___
troller, do not connect wires to Output 4: (L4, K4)
unused terminals.
PM _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ [K]
Note:
___
Maintain electrical isolation
between digital input-outputs, 1 Amp SSR Derating Curve
1.1
switched dc/open collector
1
outputs and process outputs to
prevent ground loops. 0.9

0.8
Note:
Safe Operating Area

0.7
This equipment is suitable for
Amps RMS

0.6
use in CLASS I, DIVISION 2,
Groups A, B, C and D or Non- 0.5

Hazardous locations only. Tem- 0.4

perature Code T4 0.3

Warning: ç
0.2

0.1
Explosion Hazard – Substitution 0
of component may impair suit- -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40
o
50 60 70
Ambient Temperature ( C)
ability for CLASS I, DIVISION 2.

Warning: ç Quencharc Wiring Example

Explosion Hazard - Do not dis-
In this example the Quencharc User Load
connect while the circuit is live L_
or unless the area is known to be circuit (Watlow part# 0804- N

free of ignitable concentrations 0147-0000) is used to protect Quencharc

of flammable substances. PM internal circuitry from the K_

Quencharc Note: counter electromagnetic force
Switching pilot duty inductive from the inductive user load
loads (relay coils, solenoids, when de-engergized. It is rec-
etc.) with the mechanical relay, ommended that this or an
solid state relay or open collector
output options requires use of an equivalent Quencharc be used
R.C. suppressor. when connecting inductive
loads to PM outputs.
Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® P MI C ontrol l er • 42 • Cha pte r 2 Ins ta ll a nd W i r e
Warning: ç Standard Bus EIA-485 Communications
Use National Electric (NEC) or Slot C • Wire T-/R- to the A terminal of the EIA-485 port.
other country-specific standard
98 • Wire T+/R+ to the B terminal of the EIA-485 port.
wiring and safety practices when
wiring and connecting this con- 99
• Wire common to the common terminal of the EIA-
troller to a power source and to CF common
electrical sensors or peripheral T-/R-
485 port.
CD
devices. Failure to do so may T+/R+ • Do not route network wires with power wires.
result in damage to equipment CE
Connect network wires in daisy-chain fashion
and property, and/or injury or B5
when connecting multiple devices in a network.
loss of life. D6
Note: • Do not connect more than 16 EZ-ZONE PM control-
D5
Maximum wire size termination lers on a network.
and torque rating: • Maximum network length: 1,200 meters (4,000
• 0.0507 to 3.30 mm2 (30 to 12 feet)
AWG) single-wire termination
or two 1.31 mm2 (16 AWG) • 1/8th unit load on EIA-485 bus
• 0.56 Nm (5.0 in-lb.) torque
PM [4,6,8,9] _ _ _ _ - [*] _ _ _ _ _ _
Note:
Adjacent terminals may be la- * All models include Standard Bus communications
beled differently, depending on (instance 1)
the model number.
Note:
Note:
Do not leave a USB to EIA-485 converter connected to Standard
To prevent damage to the con-
troller, do not connect wires to Bus without power (i.e., disconnecting the USB end from the
unused terminals. computer while leaving the converter connected on Standard
Note: Bus). Disturbance on the Standard Bus may occur.
Maintain electrical isolation
between analog input 1, digital Modbus RTU or Standard Bus EIA-485 Communications
input-outputs, switched dc/open
collector outputs and process Slot C • Wire T-/R- to the A terminal of the EIA-485 port.
outputs to prevent ground loops. 98 • Wire T+/R+ to the B terminal of the EIA-485
Note: 99 port.
This equipment is suitable for CC common • Wire common to the common terminal of the
use in CLASS I, DIVISION 2,
Groups A, B, C and D or Non- CA
T-/R-
EIA-485 port.
Hazardous locations only. Tem- CB
T+/R+
• Do not route network wires with power wires.
perature Code T4A Connect network wires in daisy-chain fashion
B5
Warning: ç D6
when connecting multiple devices in a network.
Explosion Hazard - Dry contact
D5
• A termination resistor may be required. Place a
closure Digital Inputs shall not be 120 Ω resistor across T+/R+ and T-/R- of last con-
used in Class I Division 2 Hazard-
ous Locations unless switch used troller on network.
is approved for this application. • Only one protocol per port is available at a
Warning: ç time: either Modbus RTU or Standard Bus.
Explosion Hazard – Substitution • Do not connect more than 16 EZ-ZONE control-
of component may impair suit- lers on a Standard Bus network.
ability for CLASS I, DIVISION 2.
• Maximum number of EZ-ZONE controllers on a
Warning: ç Modbus network is 247.
Explosion Hazard - Do not dis- • Maximum network length: 1,200 meters (4,000
connect while the circuit is live feet)
or unless the area is known to be
free of ignitable concentrations • 1/8th unit load on EIA-485 bus.
of flammable substances. • Communications instance 1
PM [4,6,8,9] _ _ _ _ - [1] _ _ _ _ _ _
Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® P MI C ontrol l er • 43 • Cha pte r 2 Ins ta ll a n d W i r e
Warning: ç
Note:
Use National Electric (NEC) or Do not leave a USB to EIA-485 converter connected to Standard
other country-specific standard Bus without power (i.e., disconnecting the USB end from the
wiring and safety practices when computer while leaving the converter connected on Standard
wiring and connecting this con- Bus). Disturbance on the Standard Bus may occur.
troller to a power source and to
electrical sensors or peripheral
devices. Failure to do so may EIA-232/485 Modbus RTU Communications
result in damage to equipment
and property, and/or injury or 485 T+/R+
Slot B, E • Wire T-/R- to the A terminal of the EIA-485
CB
loss of life. 485 T-/R-
port.
CA
Note: 485 common
CC • Wire T+/R+ to the B terminal of the EIA-485
Maximum wire size termination 485 T+/R+
CB port.
and torque rating: 485 T-/R-
CA • Wire common to the common terminal of
• 0.0507 to 3.30 mm2 (30 to 12 232 common
C5
AWG) single-wire termination 232 (TX) to DB9 pin 2 (RD)
the EIA-485 port.
C3
or two 1.31 mm2 (16 AWG) 232 (RD) to DB9 pin 3 (TX)
C2 • Do not route network wires with power
• 0.56 Nm (5.0 in-lb.) torque wires. Connect network wires in daisy-chain
Note: fashion when connecting multiple devices in
Adjacent terminals may be la- a network.
beled differently, depending on
the model number. • A termination resistor may be required.
Note: Place a 120 Ω resistor across T+/R+ and T-
To prevent damage to the con- /R- of last controller on network.
troller, do not connect wires to • Do not wire to both the EIA-485 and the
unused terminals.
EIA-232 pins at the same time.
Note:
Maintain electrical isolation • Two EIA-485 terminals of T/R are provided
between analog input 1, digital to assist in daisy-chain wiring.
input-outputs, switched dc/open • Do not connect more than one EZ-ZONE PM
collector outputs and process
outputs to prevent ground loops. controller on an EIA-232 network.
Note: • Do not connect more than 16 EZ-ZONE con-
This equipment is suitable for trollers on a Standard Bus EIA-485 network.
use in CLASS I, DIVISION 2, • Maximum number of EZ-ZONE controllers on
Groups A, B, C and D or Non-
Hazardous locations only. Tem- a Modbus network is 247.
perature Code T4A • Maximum EIA-232 network length: 15 me-
Warning: ç ters (50 feet)
Explosion Hazard - Dry contact • Maximum EIA-485 network length: 1,200
closure Digital Inputs shall not be meters (4,000 feet)
used in Class I Division 2 Hazard-
ous Locations unless switch used • 1/8th unit load on EIA-485 bus.
is approved for this application. • Communications instance 2
Warning: ç Slot B
Explosion Hazard – Substitution PM [6] _ _ _ _ - [2] _ _ _ _ _ _
of component may impair suit- Slot E
ability for CLASS I, DIVISION 2.
PM [4,8,9] _ _ _ _ - [2] _ _ _ _ _ _
Warning: ç
Explosion Hazard - Do not dis- Modbus-IDA EIA/TIA-485 Watlow Terminal
Function
connect while the circuit is live Terminal Name Label
or unless the area is known to be
free of ignitable concentrations
DO A CA or CD T-/R-
of flammable substances. D1 B CB or CE T+/R+
common common CC or CF common

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® P MI C ontrol l er • 44 • Cha pte r 2 Ins ta ll a nd W i r e

Warning: ç EtherNet/IP™, PCCC and Modbus® TCP Communications
Use National Electric (NEC) or
other country-specific standard Slot B, E RJ-45 pin T568B wire color Signal Slot B, E
unused
wiring and safety practices when E8 8 brown unused E8
wiring and connecting this con- unused
E7 7 brown & white unused E7
troller to a power source and to receive -
electrical sensors or peripheral E6 6 green receive - E6
unused
devices. Failure to do so may E5 5 white & blue unused E5
result in damage to equipment unused
E4 4 blue unused E4
and property, and/or injury or receive +
E3 3 white & green receive + E3
loss of life.
transmit -
Note: E2 2 orange transmit - E2
transmit +
Maximum wire size termination E1 1 white & orange transmit + E1
and torque rating:
• 0.0507 to 3.30 mm2 (30 to 12
• Do not route network wires with power wires.
AWG) single-wire termination • Connect one Ethernet cable per controller to a
or two 1.31 mm2 (16 AWG) 10/100 Mbps ethernet switch. Both Modbus TCP
• 0.56 Nm (5.0 in-lb.) torque and EtherNet/IP™ are available on the network.
Note: • Communications instance 2
Adjacent terminals may be la-
beled differently, depending on Slot B
the model number. PM [6] _ _ _ _ - [3] _ _ _ _ _ _
Note: Slot E
To prevent damage to the con-
PM[4,8,9] _ _ _ _ - [3] _ _ _ _ _ _
troller, do not connect wires to
unused terminals.
Note: Note:
Maintain electrical isolation When changing the fixed IP address cycle module power for new
between analog input 1, digital address to take effect.
input-outputs, switched dc/open
collector outputs and process Ethernet LED Indicators
outputs to prevent ground loops.
Note: Viewing the control from the front and then looking on top four LEDs
This equipment is suitable for can be seen aligned vertically front to back. The LEDs are identified
use in CLASS I, DIVISION 2, accordingly: closest to the front reflects the Network (Net) Status,
Groups A, B, C and D or Non- Module (Mod) Status is next, Ac-
Hazardous locations only. Tem-
perature Code T4A
tivity status follows and lastly,
the LED closest to the rear of the
Warning: ç control reflects the Link status.
Explosion Hazard - Dry contact
closure Digital Inputs shall not be Note:
used in Class I Division 2 Hazard-
ous Locations unless switch used
When using Modbus TCP, the
is approved for this application. Network Status and Module
Status LEDs are not used.
Warning: ç
Explosion Hazard – Substitution
of component may impair suit-
ability for CLASS I, DIVISION 2. Network Status

Warning: ç
Module Status

Explosion Hazard - Do not dis- Activity Status

connect while the circuit is live Link Status
or unless the area is known to be
free of ignitable concentrations
of flammable substances.

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® P MI C ontrol l er • 45 • Cha pte r 2 Ins ta ll a n d W i r e

Warning: ç
Network Status
Use National Electric (NEC) or Indicator State Summary Requirement
other country-specific standard
If the device does not have an
wiring and safety practices when
wiring and connecting this con- Not powered, IP address (or is powered off),
Steady Off
troller to a power source and to no IP address the network status indicator
electrical sensors or peripheral shall be steady off.
devices. Failure to do so may
result in damage to equipment If the device has no estab-
and property, and/or injury or lished connections, but has
loss of life. No connec-
Flashing Green obtained an IP address, the
Note: tions
network status indicator shall
Maximum wire size termination be flashing green.
and torque rating:
• 0.0507 to 3.30 mm2 (30 to 12 If the device has at least one
AWG) single-wire termination established connection (even
or two 1.31 mm2 (16 AWG) Steady Green Connected to the Message Router), the
• 0.56 Nm (5.0 in-lb.) torque network status indicator shall
Note: be steady green.
Adjacent terminals may be la-
beled differently, depending on If one or more of the connec-
the model number. tions in which this device is
Note: the target has timed out, the
To prevent damage to the con- Connection network status indicator shall
troller, do not connect wires to Flashing Red
timeout be flashing red. This shall be
unused terminals.
left only if all timed out con-
Note:
nections are reestablished or
Maintain electrical isolation
between analog input 1, digital if the device is reset.
input-outputs, switched dc/open If the device has detected
collector outputs and process
outputs to prevent ground loops.
that its IP address is already in
Steady Red Duplicate IP
Note:
use, the network status indi-
This equipment is suitable for cator shall be steady red.
use in CLASS I, DIVISION 2, While the device is performing
Groups A, B, C and D or Non-
Flashing Green its power up testing, the net-
Hazardous locations only. Tem- Self-test
perature Code T4A / Red work status indicator shall be
flashing green / red.
Warning: ç
Explosion Hazard - Dry contact Module Status
closure Digital Inputs shall not be
used in Class I Division 2 Hazard- Indicator State Summary Requirement
ous Locations unless switch used If no power is supplied to the de-
is approved for this application. Steady Off No power vice, the module status indicator
Warning: ç shall be steady off.
Explosion Hazard – Substitution If the device is operating correctly,
of component may impair suit- Device
ability for CLASS I, DIVISION 2.
Steady Green the module status indicator shall
operational
be steady green.
Warning: ç If the device has not been config-
Explosion Hazard - Do not dis- Flashing
Standby ured, the module status indicator
connect while the circuit is live Green
or unless the area is known to be shall be flashing green.
free of ignitable concentrations
of flammable substances.

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® P MI C ontrol l er • 46 • Cha pte r 2 Ins ta ll a nd W i r e

Warning: ç Module Status (cont.)
Use National Electric (NEC) or Indicator State Summary Requirement
other country-specific standard
If the device has detected a recov-
wiring and safety practices when
wiring and connecting this con- erable minor fault, the module sta-
troller to a power source and to tus indicator shall be flashing red.
electrical sensors or peripheral Flashing Red Minor fault
NOTE: An incorrect or inconsistent
devices. Failure to do so may
result in damage to equipment
configuration would be considered
and property, and/or injury or a minor fault.
loss of life. If the device has detected a non-
Note: recoverable major fault, the mod-
Maximum wire size termination Steady Red Major fault
ule status indicator shall be steady
and torque rating:
red.
• 0.0507 to 3.30 mm2 (30 to 12
AWG) single-wire termination While the device is performing
or two 1.31 mm2 (16 AWG) Flashing its power up testing, the module
• 0.56 Nm (5.0 in-lb.) torque Self-test
Green / Red status indicator shall be flashing
Note: green / red.
Adjacent terminals may be la-
beled differently, depending on Activity Status
the model number.
Indicator State Summary Requirement
Note:
To prevent damage to the con- Flashing If the MAC detects activity,
Detects activity
troller, do not connect wires to Green the LED will be flashing green.
unused terminals.
If the MAC detects a collision,
Note: Red ----
the LED will be red.
Maintain electrical isolation
between analog input 1, digital
input-outputs, switched dc/open Link Status
collector outputs and process Indicator State Summary Requirement
outputs to prevent ground loops.
If the device cannot determine
Note: Not powered,
link speed or power is off, the
This equipment is suitable for Steady Off unknown link
use in CLASS I, DIVISION 2, network status indicator shall be
speed
Groups A, B, C and D or Non- steady off.
Hazardous locations only. Tem-
If cable is wired and connected
perature Code T4A Green ----
correctly, the LED will be Green.
Warning: ç
Explosion Hazard - Dry contact DeviceNet™ Communications
closure Digital Inputs shall not be
used in Class I Division 2 Hazard- Slot B, E Terminal Signal Function
V+
ous Locations unless switch used V+ V+ V+ DeviceNet™ power
is approved for this application. CAN_H
CH CH CAN_H positive side of DeviceNet™ bus
Warning: ç
shield
SH SH shield shield interconnect
CAN_L
Explosion Hazard – Substitution CL CL CAN_L negative side of DeviceNet™ bus
of component may impair suit- V-
V- V- V- DeviceNet™ power return
ability for CLASS I, DIVISION 2.
T2
Warning: ç S2
Explosion Hazard - Do not dis- R2
connect while the circuit is live
or unless the area is known to be • Communications instance 2
free of ignitable concentrations
of flammable substances. Slot B (PM [6] _ _ _ _ _ - [5] _ _ _ _ _ _ )
Slot E (PM [4,8,9] _ _ _ _ _ - [5] _ _ _ _ _ _ )

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® P MI C ontrol l er • 47 • Cha pte r 2 Ins ta ll a n d W i r e

Warning: ç
DeviceNet LED Indicators
Use National Electric (NEC) or Viewing the control from the front and then looking on top two LEDs
other country-specific standard can be seen aligned vertically front to back. The LED closest to the
wiring and safety practices when
wiring and connecting this con-
front is identified as the network (Net) LED where the one next to it
troller to a power source and to would be identified as the module (Mod) LED.
electrical sensors or peripheral
devices. Failure to do so may
result in damage to equipment
and property, and/or injury or
loss of life.
Note:
Maximum wire size termination
and torque rating:
• 0.0507 to 3.30 mm2 (30 to 12
AWG) single-wire termination
or two 1.31 mm2 (16 AWG)
• 0.56 Nm (5.0 in-lb.) torque
Network Status
Note:
Adjacent terminals may be la- Module Status
beled differently, depending on
the model number.
Note:
To prevent damage to the con-
troller, do not connect wires to
unused terminals.
Note:
Maintain electrical isolation Network Status
between analog input 1, digital
input-outputs, switched dc/open Indicator LED Description
collector outputs and process
outputs to prevent ground loops.
The device is not online and has not completed
Note:
Off the duplicate MAC ID test yet. The device may not
This equipment is suitable for be powered.
use in CLASS I, DIVISION 2, The device is online and has connections in the
Groups A, B, C and D or Non- Green
established state (allcated to a Master).
Hazardous locations only. Tem-
perature Code T4A Failed communication device. The device has de-
tected an error that has rendered it incapable of
Warning: ç Red
Explosion Hazard - Dry contact
communicating on the network (duplicate MAC ID
closure Digital Inputs shall not be or Bus-off).
used in Class I Division 2 Hazard- Flashing The device is online, but no connection has been
ous Locations unless switch used
is approved for this application.
Green allocated or an explicit connection has timed out.
Flashing Red A poll connection has timed out.
Warning: ç
Explosion Hazard – Substitution
of component may impair suit-
Module Status
ability for CLASS I, DIVISION 2. Indicator LED Description
Warning: ç Off No power is applied to the device.
Explosion Hazard - Do not dis- Flashing Green-Red The device is performing a self-test.
connect while the circuit is live
or unless the area is known to be Flashing Red Major Recoverable Fault.
free of ignitable concentrations Red Major Unrecoverable Fault.
of flammable substances.
Green The device is operating normally.

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® P MI C ontrol l er • 48 • Cha pte r 2 Ins ta ll a nd W i r e

 Profibus DP Communications
Warning: ç
Use National Electric (NEC) or Slot B & E • Wire T-/R- to the A terminal of the EIA-485
other country-specific standard +5Vdc Voltage Potential
VP port.
wiring and safety practices when 485 T+/R+
B
wiring and connecting this con- 485 T-/R-
• Wire T+/R+ to the B terminal of the EIA-485
A
troller to a power source and to
Digital ground
port.
electrical sensors or peripheral DG
devices. Failure to do so may Termination resistor B
• Wire Digital Ground to the common termi-
trB
result in damage to equipment 485 T+/R+ nal of the EIA-485 port.
B
and property, and/or injury or 485 T-/R- • Do not route network wires with power
loss of life. A
Termination resistor A
trA
wires. Connect network wires in daisy-chain
Note:
fashion when connecting multiple devices in
Maximum wire size termination
and torque rating: a network.
• 0.0507 to 3.30 mm2 (30 to 12 • A termination resistor should be used if this
AWG) single-wire termination control is the last one on the network.
or two 1.31 mm2 (16 AWG)
• If using a 150 Ω cable Watlow provides in-
• 0.56 Nm (5.0 in-lb.) torque
ternal termination. Place a jumper across
Note:
pins trB and B and trA and A.
Adjacent terminals may be la-
beled differently, depending on • If external termination is to be used with
the model number. a 150 Ω cable place a 390 Ω resistor across
Note: pins VP and B, a 220 Ω resistor across pins
To prevent damage to the con- B and A, and lastly, place a 390 Ω resistor
troller, do not connect wires to
unused terminals.
across pins DG and A.
Note: • Do not connect more than 32 EZ-ZONE PM
Maintain electrical isolation controllers on any given segment.
between analog input 1, digital • Maximum EIA-485 network length: 1,200
input-outputs, switched dc/open
collector outputs and process
meters (4,000 feet)
outputs to prevent ground loops. • 1/8th unit load on EIA-485 bus
Note: • When termination jumpers are in place,
This equipment is suitable for there is 392 ohm pull up resistor to 5V and
use in CLASS I, DIVISION 2,
Groups A, B, C and D or Non-
392 ohm pull down resistor to DP. There is
Hazardous locations only. Tem- also a 221 ohm resistor between A and B.
perature Code T4A • Communications instance 2
Warning: ç Slot B: PM [6] _ _ _ _-[6] _ _ _ _ _ _
Explosion Hazard - Dry contact Slot E: PM [4, 8, 9] _ _ _ _-[6] _ _ _ _ _ _
closure Digital Inputs shall not be
used in Class I Division 2 Hazard-
ous Locations unless switch used Profibus EIA/TIA-485 Watlow Terminal
Function
is approved for this application. Terminal Name Label
Warning: ç VP (Voltage
---- VP +5Vdc
Explosion Hazard – Substitution Potential)
of component may impair suit-
ability for CLASS I, DIVISION 2.
B-Line B B T+/R+
A-Line A A T-/R-
Warning: ç DP-GND common DG common
Explosion Hazard - Do not dis-
connect while the circuit is live
or unless the area is known to be
free of ignitable concentrations
of flammable substances.

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® P MI C ontrol l er • 49 • Cha pte r 2 Ins ta ll a n d W i r e

Warning: ç
Profibus DP LED Indicators
Use National Electric (NEC) or Viewing the unit from the front and then looking on top of the con-
other country-specific standard troller two bi-color LEDs can be seen where only the front one is
wiring and safety practices when
wiring and connecting this con-
used. Definition follows:
troller to a power source and to
electrical sensors or peripheral Closest to the Front
devices. Failure to do so may
result in damage to equipment Indicator LED Description
and property, and/or injury or
loss of life.
Red Profibus network not detected
Note: Red Indicates that the Profibus card is waiting for
Maximum wire size termination Flashing data exchange.
and torque rating: Green Data exchange mode
• 0.0507 to 3.30 mm2 (30 to 12
AWG) single-wire termination
or two 1.31 mm2 (16 AWG)
• 0.56 Nm (5.0 in-lb.) torque
Note:
Adjacent terminals may be la-
beled differently, depending on
the model number.
Note:
To prevent damage to the con-
troller, do not connect wires to
unused terminals.
Note:
Maintain electrical isolation
between analog input 1, digital
input-outputs, switched dc/open
collector outputs and process
outputs to prevent ground loops.
Note:
This equipment is suitable for
use in CLASS I, DIVISION 2,
Groups A, B, C and D or Non-
Hazardous locations only. Tem-
perature Code T4A
Warning: ç
Explosion Hazard - Dry contact
closure Digital Inputs shall not be
used in Class I Division 2 Hazard-
ous Locations unless switch used
is approved for this application.
Warning: ç
Explosion Hazard – Substitution
of component may impair suit-
ability for CLASS I, DIVISION 2.

Warning: ç
Explosion Hazard - Do not dis-
connect while the circuit is live
or unless the area is known to be
free of ignitable concentrations
of flammable substances.

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® P MI C ontrol l er • 50 • Cha pte r 2 Ins ta ll a nd W i r e

 Wiring a Serial EIA-485 Network
Warning: ç
Use National Electric (NEC) or Do not route network wires with power wires. Connect network
other country-specific standard wires in daisy-chain fashion when connecting multiple devices in a
wiring and safety practices when network. A termination resistor may be required. Place a 120 Ω re-
wiring and connecting this con-
troller to a power source and to sistor across T+/R+ and T-/R- of the last controller on a network.
electrical sensors or peripheral
devices. Failure to do so may
Only one protocol per port is available at a time: either Modbus
result in damage to equipment RTU or Standard Bus.
and property, and/or injury or
loss of life. A Network using Watlow's Standard Bus and an RUI/Gateway.
Note: 24V Power
EZ-ZONE ST
Maximum wire size termination ST_ _ - (B or F) _ M _ -_ _ _ _
Supply
and torque rating:
EZ-ZONE RM
• 0.0507 to 3.30 mm2 (30 to 12 fuse

AWG) single-wire termination

or two 1.31 mm2 (16 AWG)

CD
CE

CF
D5
D6
B5

99
98
• 0.56 Nm (5.0 in-lb.) torque power

+B
-A
power
Note: common

Adjacent terminals may be la-

beled differently, depending on
the model number.
Note: 98
power
99
To prevent damage to the con- CF
com
-A
troller, do not connect wires to EZ-ZONE PM CD
+B
CE
unused terminals. B5
Slot C
D6
Note: D5

Maintain electrical isolation

CD

CX
CZ

CY
CE
98
99
CF
between analog input 1, digital

power
RUI/Gateway
input-outputs, switched dc/open EZKB-_ A _ _- _ _ _ _
collector outputs and process 98
power
outputs to prevent ground loops. 99
CF
common
common
-A
-A
Note: CD
CE
+B
+B

This equipment is suitable for

use in CLASS I, DIVISION 2,
A Network with all Devices Configured using Modbus RTU.
Groups A, B, C and D or Non-
Hazardous locations only. Tem-
perature Code T4A EZ-ZONE ST 24V Power
ST_ _ - (B or F) _ M _ -_ _ _ _ Supply

Warning: ç EZ-ZONE RM
fuse
Explosion Hazard - Dry contact
closure Digital Inputs shall not be
CC
CB
CA
D5
D6
B5

99
98

used in Class I Division 2 Hazard- power

ous Locations unless switch used
+B
-A

power
common
is approved for this application.
Warning: ç
Explosion Hazard – Substitution power
of component may impair suit- 98
99
power

ability for CLASS I, DIVISION 2. CC

com
-A
EZ-ZONE PM CA
+B
CB

Warning: ç
B5
Slot C
D6

Explosion Hazard - Do not dis- D5

connect while the circuit is live

CX
CZ
CC

CY
CB
CA
98
99

or unless the area is known to be

power

free of ignitable concentrations power

of flammable substances. power
common
common
PLC -A
-A +B
+B

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® P MI C ontrol l er • 51 • Cha pte r 2 Ins ta ll a n d W i r e

Warning: ç
Connecting a Computer to PM Controls Using B&B 485 to USB Con-
Use National Electric (NEC) or verter Address 1 Address 2

other country-specific standard

wiring and safety practices when
wiring and connecting this con-
troller to a power source and to
electrical sensors or peripheral USB
Port
devices. Failure to do so may

Slot A

Slot B

Slot C
result in damage to equipment

Slot A

Slot B

Slot C
and property, and/or injury or
loss of life. Data Format
38,400 baud
Note: PC Software Protocol - Standard Bus
8 data bits
no parity
EZ-ZONE Configurator software
Maximum wire size termination 1 start bit
1 stop bit
and torque rating:
• 0.0507 to 3.30 mm2 (30 to 12
AWG) single-wire termination
Use twisted pair wires such as Cat 5 cabling. Do not route with power carrying
or two 1.31 mm2 (16 AWG) 0847-0326-0000
conductors. Daisy chain wire up to 16 EZ-ZONE devices.

• 0.56 Nm (5.0 in-lb.) torque

Note: Note:
Adjacent terminals may be la-
Do not leave a USB to EIA-485 converter connected to Standard
beled differently, depending on
the model number. Bus without power (i.e., disconnecting the USB end from the
Note: computer while leaving the converter connected on Standard
To prevent damage to the con- Bus). Disturbance on the Standard Bus may occur.
troller, do not connect wires to
unused terminals. Note:
Note: When connecting the USB converter to the PC it is suggested
Maintain electrical isolation that the Latency Timer be changed from the default of 16 msec
between analog input 1, digital to 1 msec. Failure to make this change may cause communica-
input-outputs, switched dc/open
collector outputs and process tion loss between the PC running ZE-ZONE Configurator software
outputs to prevent ground loops. and the control.
Note: To modify Latency Timer settings follow the steps below:
This equipment is suitable for 1. Navigate to Device Manager.
use in CLASS I, DIVISION 2,
Groups A, B, C and D or Non-
2. Double click on Ports.
Hazardous locations only. Tem- 3. Right click on the USB serial port in use and select Properties.
perature Code T4A 4. Click the tab labeled Port settings and then click the Advance
button.
Warning: ç
Explosion Hazard - Dry contact
closure Digital Inputs shall not be
used in Class I Division 2 Hazard-
ous Locations unless switch used
is approved for this application.
Warning: ç
Explosion Hazard – Substitution
of component may impair suit-
ability for CLASS I, DIVISION 2.

Warning: ç
Explosion Hazard - Do not dis-
connect while the circuit is live
or unless the area is known to be
free of ignitable concentrations
of flammable substances.

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® P MI C ontrol l er • 52 • Cha pte r 2 Ins ta ll a nd W i r e

 3 Chapter 3: Keys and Displays
Upper Display: 1/8 DIN (PM9) Horizontal Temperature Units:
In the Home Page, displays the ® Indicates whether the tem-
process value, otherwise dis- perature is displayed in Fahr-
plays the value of the param- enheit or Celsius.
eter in the lower display. Percent Units:
Zone Display: Lights when the controller is
Indicates the controller zone. displaying values as a per-
centage or when the open-
1 to 9 = zones 1 to 9
1/16 (PM6) DIN loop set point is displayed.
A = zone 10 E = zone 14 ®

b = zone 11 F = zone 15 Output Activity:

C = zone 12 h = zone 16 Number LEDs indicate activi-
d = zone 13 ty of outputs. A flashing light
indicates output activity.
Lower Display:
Indicates the set point or output Profile Activity:
power value during operation, Lights when a profile is run-
or the parameter whose value ning. Flashes when a profile
1/8 DIN (PM8) Vertical is paused.
appears in the upper display. ®

Communications Activity
EZ Key/s: Flashes when another de-
This key can be programmed to vice is communicating with
do various tasks, such as start- this controller.
ing a profile.
Up and Down Keys ¿ ¯
Channel Display: In the Home Page, adjusts
Indicates the channel for any the set point in the lower
given EZ-ZONE module. display. In other pages,
- Available with the PM4, 8 and changes the upper display to
9 only. a higher or lower value, or
changes a parameter selec-
1/4 DIN (PM4) tion.
®
Infinity Key ˆ

Advance Key ‰ Press to back up one level,

Advances through parameter or press and hold for two
prompts. seconds to return to the
Home Page. From the Home
Page clears alarms and er-
Note: rors if clearable.
Upon power up, the upper
or left display will briefly Note:
indicate the firmware revi- If integrated limit, the
sion and the lower or right Infinity Key is labeled
display will show PM repre- Reset RESET

senting the model.

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® P M Integrated Contr olle r • 53 • Cha pte r 3 Ke y s a nd Di s p l a y s

 Responding to a Displayed Message
Attention Codes
An active message (see Home Page for listing) will cause the display to toggle between the
normal settings and the active message in the upper display and Attention a ttn in the lower
display. Your response will depend on the message and the controller settings. Some messag-
es, such as Ramping and Tuning, indicate that a process is underway. If the message was gen-
erated by a latched alarm or limit condition, the message can be cleared when the condition
no longer exists by simply pushing the Infinity ˆ or the Reset key or alternatively by follow-
RESET

ing the steps below. If an alarm has silencing enabled, it can also be silenced.
Push the Advance Key ‰ to display Ignore ig n r in the upper display and the message source
(such as Limit High Li . hI in the lower display. Use the Up ¿ and Down ¯ keys to scroll
through possible responses, such as Clear CLr or Silence SiL Then push the Advance ‰ or In-
finity ˆ key to execute the action. See the Home Page for further information on the Atten-
tion Codes.

Parameter Name
Display Range Appears If
Description
a ttn Attention AL.L1 AL.L2 AL.L3 AL.L4 an alarm or error
An active message will cause the display Alarm Low 1 to 4 message is active.
to toggle between the normal settings and AL.h1 AL.h2 AL.h3 AL.h4
the active message in the upper display Alarm High 1 to 4
and a ttn in the lower display. Your re- AL.E1 AL.E2 AL.E3 AL.E4
sponse will depend on the message and Alarm Error 1 to 4
the controller settings. Some messages, Er.i1 Er.i2 Error Input 1 or 2
such as Ramping and Tuning, indicate that Li.L1 Limit Low 1
a process is underway. If the message was Li.h1 Limit High 1
generated by a latched alarm or limit con- Li.E1 Limit Error 1
dition, the message can be cleared when tUn1 tUn2 Tuning 1 or 2
the condition no longer exists. If an alarm rp1 rp2 Ramping 1 or 2
has silencing enabled, it can be silenced. Lp.o1 Lp.o2 Loop Open Error
1. Push the Advance Key ‰ to display 1 or 2
ig n r in the upper display and the Lp.r1 Lp.r2 Loop Reversed Er-
message source (such as Li . hI) in the ror 1 or 2
lower display. C.Er1 Current Error
h.Er1 Heater Error
Note: vaL.h Value to high to be dis-
If the limit is tripped and the trip condi- played in 4 digit LED display
tion is no longer present the limit can be >9999
reset by pressing the Reset Key (Infin- vaL.L Value to low to be dis-
RESET

ity Key is labeled Reset). played in 4 digit LED display

2. Use the Up ¿ and Down ¯ keys to <-1999
scroll through possible responses, such
as Clear CLr or Silence SiL.
3. Press the Advance Key ‰ or Infinity ˆ
key to execute the action.

Alternatively, rather than scrolling through

all messages simply push the Infinity ˆ
button to generate a clear.

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® P MI C ontrol l er • 54 • Cha pte r 3 Ke y s a nd Di s p l a y s

 Navigating the EZ-ZONE PM Integrated Controller
® ® Note:
[``Ai] [``70] Keys must be held continuously until
sEt is displayed in green. If keys are
[`Set] [``72]
released when o pEr is displayed,
press the infinity key or reset key
to exit and repeat until sEt is dis-
played.

Home Page from anywhere: Press the Infinity Key ˆ for two seconds to return to the Home Page.
® ®

[``70] [``Ai]
[``72] [oper]

Operations Page from Home Page: Press both the Up ¿ and Down ¯ keys for three seconds.
® ®

[``70] [``Ai]
[``72] [`Set]

Setup Page from Home Page: Press both the Up ¿ and Down ¯ keys for six seconds.
® ®

[``70] [``p1]
[``72] [prof]

Profiling Page from Home Page: Press the Advance Key ‰ for three seconds
® ®

[``70] [Cust]
[``72] [fCty]

Factory Page from Home Page: Press both the Advance ‰ and Infinity ˆ keys for six seconds.
Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® P M Integrated Contr olle r • 55 • Cha pte r 3 Ke y s a nd Di s p l a y s
 4 Chapter 4: Home Page
Default Home Page Parameters
Watlow's patented user-defined menu system improves operational efficiency. The user-de-
fined Home Page provides you with a shortcut to monitor or change the parameter values
that you use most often. The default Home Page is shown on the following page. When a pa-
rameter normally located in the Setup Page or Operations Page is placed in the Home Page,
it is accessible through both. If you change a parameter in the Home Page, it is automatically
changed in its original page. If you change a parameter in its original page it is automatically
changed in the Home Page. Use the Advance Key ‰ to step through the other parameters.
When not in pairs, the parameter prompt will appear in the lower display, and the parameter
value will appear in the upper display. You can use the Up ¿ and Down ¯ keys to change the
value of writable parameters, just as you would in any other menu.
Note:
If a writable value is placed on the upper display and is paired with another read only
parameter on the lower display, the arrow keys affect the setting of the upper display. If
two writable parameters are paired, the arrow keys affect the lower display.
• The Attention a ttn parameter appears only if there is an active message. An example of
an active message could be a Current Error C. Er1, or it could be for information only like
Autotune tUn1 taking place.
• If Control Mode is set to Auto, the Process Value is in the upper display and the Closed
Loop Set Point (read-write) is in the lower display.
• If a profile is running, the process value is in the upper display and the Target Set Point
(read only) is in the lower display. If Control Mode is set to Manual, the Process Value is in
the upper display and the output power level (read-write) is in the lower display.
• If Control Mode is set to Off, the Process Value is in the upper display and o ff (read only)
is in the lower display.
• If a sensor failure has occurred, dashes ---- will be displayed in the upper display and
the output power level (read-write) is in the lower display.
Changing the Set Point
You can change the set point by using the Up ¿ or Down ¯ keys when a profile is not running.
Starting a Profile from the Home Page
1. When at the Home Page, press the Advance Key ‰ to locate Profile Start and select the
file or step number to start. The upper display will show 1 and the lower display will show
p . s t1.
2. Press the Up ¿ or Down ¯ key to choose the file or step number.
3. Press the Advance Key ‰ to select the Profile Action Request. The upper display will show
n o nE and the lower display will show p . aC1.
4. Press the Up ¿ or Down ¯ keys to select the Profile Start. The upper display will show
pro f and the lower display will show p . aC1.
5. Press the Infinity Key to return Home. The Profile will Start

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® P MI C ontrol l er • 56 • Cha pte

Char 2pte
Ins
r 4ta ll
Home
a nd Pa
W i gr e
 Ending a Profile from the Home Page
1. Press the Advance Key ‰ to select the Profile Action Request. The upper display will show
n o nE and the lower display will show p . aC1.
2. Press the Up ¿ or Down ¯ keys to select the End. The upper display will show En d and
the lower display will show p . aC1.
3. Press the Infinity Key to return Home. The Profile will End.
Modifying the Home Page
1. Push and hold the Advance ‰ key and the Infinity ˆ key for approximately six seconds. Up-
on entering the Factory Page the first menu will be the Custom Menu Cust.
2. Push the Advance ‰ key where the lower display will show Cust and the upper display
will show 1.
3. Push the Advance ‰ button where the prompt for the Process Value aC. pu will be dis-
played on top and Parameter pa r in the bottom. There are twenty positions available that
can be customized.
4. Pushing the Up ¿ or Down ¯ arrow keys will allow for a customized selection to be made
(see list of available parameters below).
Custom Menu Parameter Options
Description Prompt *
If 4th or 9th digit of part number is L or M
Limit Set Point Low LL.s1
Limit Set Point High Lh.s1
Limit Hysteresis L.hy1
Limit Status L.st1
All Models
None Blank
Analog Input Value ain1 ain2
Cal In Offset i.Ca1 i.Ca2
Display Units C_f1
Load Parameter Set Usr.1 Usr.2
Alarm Low Set Point a.Lo1 A.Lo2 a.Lo3 A.Lo4
Alarm High Set Point a.hi1 a.hi2 a.hi3 a.hi4
Alarm Hysteresis a.hy1 a.hy2 a.hy3 a.hy4
If 4th digit of part number is B, E, C, R, J, or N
Set Point C.sp1 C.sp2
Active Process Value AC.p1 AC.p2
Active Set Point AC.s1 AC.s2
Manual Power o.sp1 o.sp2
Autotune aut1 aut2
Control Mode C.ЛЏ1 C.ЛЏ2
Heat Power h.pr1 H.pr2
Cool Power C.pr1 C.pr2
Time Integral ti1 ti2

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® P MI C ontrol l er • 57 • Cha pte

Char 2pte
Ins
r 4ta ll
Home
a n d Pa
W i gr e
 Custom Menu Parameter Options
Description Prompt *
Time Derivative td1 td2
Dead Band db1 db2
Heat Prop Band h.pb1 h.pb2
On/Off Heat Hysteresis h.hy1 h.hy2
Cool Prop Band C.pb1 C.pb2
On/Off Cool Hysteresis C.hy1 C.hy2
If 4th digit of part number is B, E, C, R, J, or N
Ramp Rate r.rt1 r.rt2
TRU-TUNE+ Enable t.tu1 t.tu2
Idle Set Point id.s1 id.s2
If 4th digit of part number is B, E, R or N
Profile Start p.st1
Profile Action Request p.aC1
Guaranteed Soak Deviation 1 gsd1
If 9th digit of part number is T
Load Current RMS CU.r1
* The numerical digit shown in the prompts above (last digit), represents the parameter in-
stance and can be greater than one.
Modifying the Display Pairs
The Home Page, being a customized list of as many as 20 parameters can be configured in
pairs of up to 10 via the Display Pairs d.prs prompt found in the Global Menu gLbL (Setup
Page). The listing in the table that follows is what one may typically find in the Home Page as
defaults based on controller part numbers. It is important to note that some of the prompts
shown may not appear simply because the feature is not being used or is turned off. As an ex-
ample, the prompt shown in position 7 (loop 1) and position 12 (loop 2) Cpr will not appear
unless the Cool algorithm C.ag is turned on in the Setup Page under the Loop menu.
If the ninth digit of the part number is C, J, L or M (PM _ _ _ _ _ - _ [C, J, L, M] _ _ _ _ _)
the Display Pairs d.prs prompt will default to 2; otherwise, it will be equal to one.
As stated above, the user can define pairs of prompts to appear on the display every time
the Advance ‰ key is pushed. The first pair will always be as defined in the Custom Menu
and as stated, will default (factory settings) to the Active Process Value loop 1 aC.pu,
and the Active Set Point loop 1 aC.sp. If two channels are present the first 2 pairs will be
the same in that the first pair will represent channel 1 Active Process Value and Active Set
Point and the second being the same for channel 2. If another pair is created where the Dis-
play Pairs d.prs prompt is equal to 3 using the default prompts, when the Advance Key ‰ is
pushed two times from the Home Page the upper display will reflect the current control mode
and the bottom display would show the output power. When configuring the Custom Menu to
your liking it should be noted that if a writable value is placed on the upper display and is
paired with another read only parameter on the lower display, the arrow keys will affect the
setting of the upper display. Also, if 2 changeable (writable) prompts are displayed in a Pair,
i.e., Control Mode on top and Idle Set Point on the bottom, only the lower display (Idle Set
Point) can be changed.
Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® P MI C ontrol l er • 58 • Cha pte
Char 2pte
Ins
r 4ta ll
Home
a nd Pa
W i gr e
 The display can be configured to scroll customized pairs by going to the Setup Page under
the Global Menu and changing the Display Time d.ti prompt to something greater than 0 and
by changing the Display Pairs d.prs to something greater than 1. If the Display Time d.ti is
set to 2, the display will toggle every 2 seconds from the first display pair to the second and
then the third, etc... If the control has more than one channel and one of the configured pairs
is set as instance 2, the channel indicator (LED) will change from 1 to 2 reflecting the channel
of the pair being displayed. The display will continue to toggle through all of the custom pairs
at the specified time interval.
Possible Home
Home Page Defaults Page Parameter Page and Menu
(Dependent on Part Number) Display
All Models
Numerical
1 Active Process Value (1) Operations Page, Monitor Menu
value
Numerical
2 Active Set Point (1) Operations Page, Monitor Menu
value
If 9th digit of part number is equal to: PM _ _ _ _ _ - _ [L, M] _ _ _ _ _
Numerical
3 Process Value (2) Operations Page, Monitor Menu
value
safE
4 Limit Status or Home Page
faiL
Possible Home
Home Page Defaults Page Parameter Page and Menu
(Dependent on Part Number) Display
If 9th digit of part number is equal to: PM _ _ _ _ _ - _ [A, C, J, R, P, T] _ _ _ _ _

3 Active Process Value (2) pu.a2 Operations Page, Monitor Menu

4 Closed Loop Set Point (2) C.sp2 Operations Page, Monitor Menu
5 Control Mode (1) C.ЛЏ1 Operations Page, Monitor Menu
If 9th digit of part number is equal to: PM _ _ _ _ _ - _ [A, C, J, R, P, T] _ _ _ _ _
6 Heat Power (1) h.pr1 Operations Page, Monitor Menu
7 Cool Power (1) C.pr1 Operations Page, Monitor Menu
8 Autotune (1) aut1 Operations Page, Loop Menu
9 Idle Set Point(1) id.s1 Operations Page, Loop Menu
10 Control Mode (2) C.ЛЏ2 Operations Page, Monitor Menu
11 Heat Power (2) h.pr2 Operations Page, Monitor Menu
12 Cool Power (2) C.pr2 Operations Page, Monitor Menu
13 Autotune (2) aut2 Operations Page, Loop Menu
14 Idle Set Point (2) id.s2 Operations Page, Loop Menu
15 Low Set Point LL.s1 Operations Page, Limit Menu
16 High Set Point Lh.s1 Operations Page, Limit Menu
17 Profile Start p.st1
18 Action Request p.aC1
19 None
20 None

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® P MI C ontrol l er • 59 • Cha pte

Char 2pte
Ins
r 4ta ll
Home
a n d Pa
W i gr e
 Note:
The numerical digit shown in the prompts (last digit) and within the parenthesize above,
represents the parameter instance and can be greater than one.
Conventions Used in the Menu Pages
To better understand the menu pages that follow review the naming conventions used. When
encountered throughout this document, the word "default" implies as shipped from the facto-
ry. Each page (Operations, Setup, Profile and Factory) and their associated menus have identi-
cal headers defined below:
Header Name Definition
Display Visually displayed information from the control.
Parameter Name Describes the function of the given parameter.
Defines options available for this prompt, i.e., min/max values (numerical), yes/no,
Range
etc... (further explanation below).
Default Values as delivered from the factory.
Modbus Relative Ad- Identifies unique parameters using either the Modbus RTU or Modbus TCP protocols
dress (further explanation below).
CIP (Common Indus- Identifies unique parameters using either the DeviceNet or EtherNet/IP protocol
trial Protocol) (further explanation below).
Profibus Index Identifies unique parameters using Profibus DP protocol (further explanation below).
Parameter ID Identifies unique parameters used with other software such as, LabVIEW.
uint = Unsigned 16 bit integer
dint = Signed 32-bit, long
string = ASCII (8 bits per character)
float = IEEE 754 32-bit
Data Type R/W
RWES = Readable
Writable
EEPROM (saved)
User Set (saved)

Display
Visual information from the control is displayed to the observer using a fairly standard 7 seg-
ment display. Due to the use of this technology, several characters displayed need some in-
terpretation, see the list below:
1=1 ϯ =7 щ, {= c i= i o= o u= u
2=2 8 =8 ц= d J= J P= P v= v
3=3 q =9 E= E H= K q= q ФІ= W
4=4 0 =0 F= F L= L r= r y= y
5=5 џ = g= g ЛЏ= M S= S Z= Z
6=6 b= b h= h n= n t= t
Range
Within this column notice that on occasion there will be numbers found within parenthesis.
This number represents the enumerated value for that particular selection. Range selections
can be made simply by writing the enumerated value of choice using any of the available
communications protocols. As an example, turn to the Setup Page and look at the Analog In-
put Ai menu and then the Sensor Type sEn prompt. To turn the sensor off using Modbus sim-
ply write the value of 62 (off) to register 368 and send that value to the control.
Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® P MI C ontrol l er • 60 • Cha pte
Cha
r 2pte
Ins
r 4ta ll
Home
a nd Pa
W i gr e
 Communication Protocols
When using a communications protocol in conjunction with the EZ-ZONE PM there are two pos-
sible ports (instances) used. Port 1 or instance 1 is always dedicated to Standard Bus commu-
nications. This same instance can also be used for Modbus RTU if ordered. Depending on the
controller part number port 2 (instance 2) can be used with Modbus, CIP and Profibus. For fur-
ther information read through the remainder of this section.
Modbus Introduction to the Modbus Protocol
Gould Modicon, now called AEG Schneider, first created the protocol referred to as "Modbus
RTU" used in process control systems. Modbus provides the advantage of being extremely reli-
able in exchanging information, a highly desirable feature for industrial data communications.
This protocol works on the principle of packet exchanges. The packet contains the address of
the controller to receive the information, a command field that says what is to be done with
the information, and several fields of data. Each PM parameter has a unique Modbus address
and they can be found in the following Operations, Setup, Profiling, and Factory Pages.
All Modbus registers are 16-bits and as displayed in this User's Guide are relative addresses
(actual). Some legacy software packages limit available Modbus registers to 40000 to 49999 (5
digits). Many applications today require access to all available Modbus registers which range
from 400000 to 465535 (6 digits). For parameters listed as float, notice that only one (low
order) of the two registers is listed; this is true throughout this document. By default, the
low order word contains the two low bytes of the 32-bit parameter. As an example, look in
the Operations Page for the Analog Input Value. Find the column identified in the header as
Modbus and notice that it lists register 360. Because this parameter is a float it is actually
represented by registers 360 (low order bytes) and 361 (high order bytes). The Modbus specifi-
cation does not dictate which register should be high or low order therefore, Watlow provides
the user the ability to swap this order (Setup Page, CoЛЏ Menu) from the default low/high
Lohi to high/low hiLo.

Note:
With the release of firmware revision 7.00 and above new functions where introduced into
this product line. With the introduction of these new functions there was a reorganization
of Modbus registers. Notice in the column identified as Modbus the reference to Map 1 and
Map 2 registers for each of the various parameters. If the new functions, namely; Math,
Linearization, Process Value, Real Time Clock and the Special Output Function are to be
used than use Map 2 Modbus registers. If the new functions of this product line are not
to be used, Map 1 (legacy PM controls) Modbus registers will be sufficient. The Modbus
register mapping [map] can be changed in the Setup Page under the CoЛЏ Menu. This set-
ting will apply across the control.
It should also be noted that some of the cells in the Modbus column contain wording pertain-
ing to an offset. Several parameters in the control contain more than one instance; such as,
profiles (4), alarms (4), analog inputs (2), etc... The Modbus register shown always represents
instance one. Take for an example the Alarm Silence parameter found in the Setup Page under
the Alarm Menu. Instance one of Map 1 is shown as address 1490 and +50 is identified as the
offset to the next instance. If there was a desire to read or write to instance 3 simply add 100
to 1490 to find its address, in this case, the instance 3 address for Alarm Silence is 1590.

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® P MI C ontrol l er • 61 • Cha pte

Char 2pte
Ins
r 4ta ll
Home
a n d Pa
W i gr e
 The Modbus communications instance can be either 1 or 2 depending on the part number.
Instance 1:
PM _ _ _ _ _ - [1] _ _ _ _ _ _
Instance 2:
PM _ _ _ _ _ - [2] _ _ _ _ _ _
To learn more about the Modbus protocol point your browser to http://www.modbus.org.
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Introduction to CIP
Both DeviceNet and EtherNet/IP use open object based programming tools and use the same
addressing scheme. In the following menu pages notice the column header identified as CIP.
There you will find the Class, Instance and Attribute in hexadecimal, (decimal in parenthesis)
which makes up the addressing for both protocols.
The CIP communications instance will always be instance 2.
Data Types Used with CIP
int = Signed 16-bit integer
uint = Signed 16-bit integer
dint = Signed 32-bits, long
real = Float, IEEE 754 32-bit
string = ASCII, 8 bits per character
sint = Signed 8 bits , byte
To learn more about the DeviceNet and EtherNet/IP protocol point your browser to http://
www.odva.org.
Profibus DP
To accommodate for Profibus DP addressing the following menus contain a column identified
as Profibus Index. Data types used in conjunction with Profibus DP can be found in the table
below.
The Profibus communications instance will always be instance 2.
real = Float, IEEE 754 32-bit
int = Signed 16-bit integer
byte = 8-bits
To learn more about the Profibus DP protocol point your browser to http://www.profibus.org

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 62 • Cha pte r 5 Ope r a tio n s Pa g e

 5 Chapter 5: Operations Page
PM Operation Page Parameters
To navigate to the Operations Page, follow the steps below:
1. From the Home Page, press both the Up ¿ and Down ¯ keys for three seconds. Ai will ap-
pear in the upper display and oPEr will appear in the lower display.
2. Press the Up ¿ or Down ¯ key to view available menus.
3. Press the Advance Key ‰ to enter the menu of choice.
4. If a submenu exists (more than one instance), press the Up ¿ or Down ¯ key to select and
then press the Advance Key ‰ to enter.
5. Press the Up ¿ or Down ¯ key to move through available menu prompts.
6. Press the Infinity Key ˆ to move backwards through the levels: parameter to submenu, sub-
menu to menu, menu to Home Page.
7.Press and hold the Infinity Key ˆ for two seconds to return to the Home Page.
On the following pages, top level menus are identified with a yellow background color.
Note:
Some of these menus and parameters may not appear, depending on the controller's op-
tions. See model number information in the Appendix for more information. If there is
only one instance of a menu, no submenus will appear.
Note:
Some of the listed parameters may not be visible. Parameter visibility is dependent upon
controller part number.

Ai Pu
opEr Analog Input Menu opEr Process Value Menu
1 1
Ai Analog Input (1 to 2) Pu Process Value (1 to 2)
Ain Analog Input Value Su.A Source Value A
i.Er Input Error Su.b Source Value B
i.CA Calibration Offset oFSt Offset
Lnr o.u Output Value
opEr Linearization Menu dio
1 opEr Digital Input/Output Menu
Lnr Linearization (1 to 2) 1
Su.a Source Value A dio Digital Input/Output (5 to 12)
ofst Offset do.S Output State
o.u Output Value di.S Input State
Ei.s Event Status

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 63 • Cha pte r 5 Ope r a tio n s Pa g e

LiЛЏ CUrr
opEr Limit Menu opEr Current Menu
1 1
LiЛЏ Limit CUrr Current
LL.S Low Limit Set Point C.hi High Set Point
Lh.S High Limit Set Point C.Lo Low Set Point
LCr Clear Limit CU.r Load Current RMS
L.St Limit Status C.Er Error
h.Er Heater Error
ЛЏon
opEr Monitor Menu tЛЏr
1 oPEr Timer Menu
ЛЏon Monitor (1 to 2) 1
C.ЛЏA Control Mode Active tЛЏr Monitor
h.pr Heat Power Su.A Source Value A
Su.C Source Value C
C.pr Cool Power
Su.d Source Value D
C.sp Set Point P.PS1 Produced Set Point 1
pu.a Process Value Active tE.o1 Timer Event Output 1
tE.o2 Timer Event Output 2
Loop tE.o3 Timer Event Output 3
opEr Loop Menu t.r Time Remaining
1 r.bS Ready Band State
Loop Loop (1 to 2) hoUr Hours
r.En Remote Enable ЛЏin Minutes
SEC Seconds
C.ЛЏ Control Mode
Ct.SP Closed Loop Timer Set Point
A.tsp Autotune Set Point
aUt Autotune ЛЏat
C.sp Closed Loop Set Point opEr Math Menu
id.S Idle Set Point 1
h.pb Heat Proportional Band pasr Math (1)
h.hy On/Off Heat Hysteresis Su.a Source Value A
C.pb Cool Proportional Band Su.b Source Value B
C.hy On/Off Cool Hysteresis Su.E Source Value E
ti Time Integral ofst Offset
td Time Derivative o.u Output Value
db Dead Band sof
o.sp Manual Power opEr Special Output Function Menu
aLЛЏ 1
opEr Alarm Menu sof Special Output Function (1)
1 Su.a Source Value A
aLЛЏ Alarm (1 to 4) Su.b Source Value B
A.Lo Low Set Point ou.1 Output Value 1
a.hi High Set Point ou.2 Output Value 2
a.CLr Clear Alarm
a.Sir Silence Alarm
a.st Alarm State

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 64 • Cha pte r 5 Ope r a tions Pa g e

P.sta
opEr Profile Status Menu
1
P.sta Profile Status 1
P.str Profile Start
paCr Profile Action Request
stp Current Step
styp Step Type
t.Sp1 Target Set Point Loop 1
t.Sp2 Target Set Point Loop 2
AC.sp Produced Set Point 1
p.sp2 Produced Set Point 2
hour Hours Remaining
ЛЏin Minutes Remaining
sEC Seconds Remaining
Ent1 Active Event Output 1
Ent2 Active Event Output 2
JC Jump Count Remaining

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 65 • Cha pte r 5 Ope r a tio n s Pa g e

 Operations Page
CIP Data
Pa-
Modbus Class Type
Parameter Name Profibus ram-
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance and
Description Index eter
dress Attribute Access
ID
hex (dec) **
Ai
opEr
Analog Input Menu
Ain Analog Input (1 -1,999.000 to ---- Instance 1 0x68 (104) 0 4001 float
Ain to 2) 9,999.000°F or Map 1 Map 2 1 to 2 R
Value units 360 360 1
View the process -1,128.000 to Instance 2
value. 5,537.000°C Map 1 Map 2
Note: 440 450
Ensure that the
Error Status (be-
low) indicates no
error (61) when
reading this value
using a field bus
protocol. If an
error exists, the
last known value
prior to the error
occurring will be
returned.
i.Er Analog Input (1 nonE None (61) ---- Instance 1 0x68 (104) 1 4002 uint
i.Er to 2) OpEn Open (65) Map 1 Map 2 1 to 2 R
Error Status shrt Shorted 362 362 2
View the cause (127) Instance 2
of the most re- Map 1 Map 2
E.ЛЏ Measurement
cent error. If the 442 452
Error (140)
attn message is E.CaL Bad Calibra-
Er.i1 or Er.i2, tion Data (139)
this parameter
Er.ab Ambient Er-
will display the
ror (9)
cause of the input
error. E.rtd RTD Error
(141)
faiL Fail (32)
nsrc Not Sourced
(246)
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 66 • Cha pte r 5 Ope r a tions Pa g e

 Operations Page
CIP Data
Pa-
Modbus Class Type
Parameter Name Profibus ram-
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance and
Description Index eter
dress Attribute Access
ID
hex (dec) **
i.Ca Analog Input (1 -1,999.000 to 0.0 Instance 1 0x68 (104) 2 4012 float
i.CA to 2) 9,999.000°F or Map 1 Map 2 1 to 2 RWES
Calibration Offset units 382 382 0xC (12)
Offset the input -1,110.555 to Instance 2
reading to com- 5,555.000°C Map 1 Map 2
pensate for lead 462 472
wire resistance or
other factors that
cause the input
reading to vary
from the actual
process value.
Lnr
opEr
Linearization Menu
Su.a Linearization (1 -1,999.000 to ---- Instance 1 0x86 ---- 34004 float
Su.A to 2) 9,999.000°F or Map 1 Map 2 (134) R
Source Value A units - - - - 3566 1 to 2
View the value -1,128.000 to Instance 2 4
of Source A. 5,537.000°C Map 1 Map 2
Source A of Lin- - - - - 3636
earization 1 is
connected to
Analog Input 1,
Source A of Lin-
earization 2 is
connected to Ana-
log Input 2
ofst Linearization (1 -1,999.000 to 0 Instance 1 0x86 ---- 34006 float
oFSt to 2) 9,999.000°F or Map 1 Map 2 (134) RWES
Offset units - - - - 3570 1 to 2
Set an offset to -1,128.000 to Instance 2 6
be applied to 5,537.000°C Map 1 Map 2
this function's - - - - 3640
output.
o.u Linearization (1 -1,999.000 to ---- Instance 1 0x86 ---- 34007 float
o.v to 2) 9,999.000°F or Map 1 Map 2 (134) R
Output Value units - - - - 3572 1 to 2
View the value -1,128.000 to Instance 2 7
of this function's 5,537.000°C Map 1 Map 2
output. - - - - 3642

** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 67 • Cha pte r 5 Ope r a tio n s Pa g e

 Operations Page
CIP Data
Pa-
Modbus Class Type
Parameter Name Profibus ram-
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance and
Description Index eter
dress Attribute Access
ID
hex (dec) **
No Dis- Linearization (1 None (61) ---- Instance 1 0x86 ---- 34028 uint
play to 2) Open (65) Map 1 Map 2 (134) R
Error Shorted (127) - - - - 3614 1 to 2
View reported Measurement error Instance 2 0x1C (28)
cause for Linear- (140) Map 1 Map 2
ization output Bad calibration - - - - 3684
malfunction. data (139)
Ambient error (9)
RTD error (14)
Fail (32)
Math error (1423)
Not sourced (246)
Stale (1617)
Can't process
(1659)
Pu
opEr
Process Value Menu
Su.a Process Value (1 -1,999.000 to ---- Instance 1 0x7E (126) - - - - 26016 float
Su.A to 2) 9,999.000°F or Map 1 Map 2 1 to 2 R
Source Value A units - - - - 3310 0x10 (16)
View the value of -1,128.000 to Instance 2
Source A. 5,537.000°C Map 1 Map 2
Linearization 1 - - - - 3380
is connected to
Source A of Process
Value 1
Linearization 2
is connected to
Source A of Pro-
cess Value 2
Su.b Process Value (1 -1,999.000 to ---- Instance 1 0x7E (126) - - - - 26017 float
Su.b to 2) 9,999.000°F or Map 1 Map 2 1 to 2 R
Source Value B units - - - - 3312 0x11 (17)
View the value of -1,128.000 to Instance 2
Source B. 5,537.000°C Map 1 Map 2
Linearization 2 - - - - 3382
is connected to
Source B of Pro-
cess Value 1
Linearization 1
is connected to
Source B of Pro-
cess Value 2
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 68 • Cha pte r 5 Ope r a tions Pa g e

 Operations Page
CIP Data
Pa-
Modbus Class Type
Parameter Name Profibus ram-
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance and
Description Index eter
dress Attribute Access
ID
hex (dec) **
ofst Process Value (1 -1,999.000 to 0 Instance 1 0x7E (126) - - - - 26023 float
oFSt to 16) 9,999.000°F or Map 1 Map 2 1 to 2 RWES
Offset units - - - - 3324 0x17 (23)
Set an offset to -1,128.000 to Instance 2
be applied to this 5,537.000°C Map 1 Map 2
function's output. - - - - 3394

o.u Process Value (1 -1,999.000 to Instance 1 0x7E (126) - - - - 26022 float

o.u to 2) 9,999.000°F or Map 1 Map 2 1 to 2 R
Output Value units - - - - 3322 0x16 (22)
View the value -1,128.000 to ----
Instance 2
of this function 5,537.000°C Map 1 Map 2
block's output. - - - - 3392
No Dis- Process Value (1 None (61) None Instance 1 0x7E ---- 26027 uint
play to 2) Open (65) Map 1 Map 2 (126) R
Output Error Shorted (127) - - - - 3332 (134)
View reported Measurement error Instance 2 1 to 2
cause for Process (140) Map 1 Map 2 0x1B (27)
output malfunc- Bad calibration - - - - 3402
tion. data (139)
Ambient error (9)
RTD error (14)
Fail (32)
Math error (1423)
Not sourced (246)
Stale (1617)
Can't process
(1659)
dio
opEr
Digital Input/Output Menu
do.s Digital Output (5 off Off (62) ---- Instance 5 0x6A (106) 46 6007 uint
do.S to 12) on On (63) Map 1 Map 2 5 to 12 R
Output State 1012 1132 7
View the state of Offset to
this output. next instance
equals +30
di.s Digital Input (5 to off Off (62) ---- Instance 5 0x6A (106) - - - - 6011 uint
di.S 12) on On (63) Map 1 Map 2 5 to 12 R
Input State 1020 1140 0x0B (11)
View this event Offset to
input state. next instance
equals +30
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 69 • Cha pte r 5 Ope r a tio n s Pa g e

 Operations Page
CIP Data
Pa-
Modbus Class Type
Parameter Name Profibus ram-
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance and
Description Index eter
dress Attribute Access
ID
hex (dec) **
Ei.s Digital Input (5 ϸAct Inactive (41) Instance 5 0x6E (110) 140 10005 uint
Ei.S to 6) act Active (5) Map 1 Map 2 5 to 6 R
Event Status 1408 1648 5
View this event Offset to
input state. next instance
equals +20

Ei.s Digital Input (7 to ϸAct Inactive (41) Instance 7 0x6E (110) 140 10005 uint
Ei.S 12) act Active (5) Map 1 Map 2 7 to C (12) R
Event Status 1448 1688 5
View this event Offset to
input state. next instance
equals +20

No Dis- EZ-Key/s (1 to 2) ϸAct Inactive (41) Off Instance 1 0x6E (110) 140 10005 uint
play Event Status act Active (5) Map 1 Map 2 3 to 4 R
View this event 1328 1568 5
input state. Instance 2
Map 1 Map 2
1348 1588

LiЛЏ
opEr
Limit Menu
LL.s Limit (1) -1,999.000 to 0.0°F or Instance 1 0x70 (112) 38 12003 float
LL.S Low Limit Set 9,999.000°F or units Map 1 Map 2 1 RWES
Point units -18.0°C 684 724 3
Set the low pro- -1,128.000 to
cess value that 5,537.000°C
will trigger the
limit.
Lh.s Limit (1) -1,999.000 to 0.0°F or Instance 1 0x70 (112) 39 12004 float
Lh.S High Limit Set 9,999.000°F or units Map 1 Map 2 1 RWES
Point units -18.0°C 686 726 4
Set the high pro- -1,128.000 to
cess value that 5,537.000°C
will trigger the
limit.
No Dis- Limit (1) Off (62) ---- Instance 1 0x70 (112) - - - - 12006 uint
play Limit State None (61) Map 1 Map 2 1 R
Clear limit once Limit High (51) 690 730 6
limit condition is Limit Low (52)
cleared. Error (225)
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 70 • Cha pte r 5 Ope r a tions Pa g e

 Operations Page
CIP Data
Pa-
Modbus Class Type
Parameter Name Profibus ram-
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance and
Description Index eter
dress Attribute Access
ID
hex (dec) **
LCr Limit (1) Clear (0) ---- Instance 1 0x70 (112) - - - - 12014 uint
LCr Clear Limit * No Change (255) Map 1 Map 2 1 W
Clear limit once 680 720 1
limit condition is
cleared.
L.st Limit (1) faiL Fail (32) ---- Instance 1 0x70 (112) - - - - 12013 uint
L.St Limit Status * safE Safe Map 1 Map 2 1 R
Reflects whether (1667) ---- 744 0x0D (13)
or not the limit is
in a safe or failed
mode..
ЛЏon
opEr
Monitor Menu
C.ЛЏA Monitor (1 to 2) off Off (62) ---- 2222 0x97 (151) - - - - 8002 uint
C.MA Control Mode Ac- aUto Auto (10) [offset 70] 1 to 2 R
tive ЛЏan Manual (54) 2
View the current
control mode.
h.pr Monitor (1 to 2) 0.0 to 100.0% ---- 2244 0x97 (151) - - - - 8011 float
h.Pr Heat Power [offset 70] 1 to 2 R
View the current 0xD (13)
heat output level.
C.pr Monitor (1 to 2) -100.0 to 0.0% ---- 2246 0x97 (151) - - - - 8014 float
C.Pr Cool Power [offset 70] 1 to 2 R
View the current 0xE (14)
cool output level.
C.sp Monitor (1 to 2) -1,999.000 to ---- 2512 0x6B (107) - - - - 8029 float
C.SP Closed Loop Ac- 9,999.000°F or [offset 80] 1 to 2 R
tive Set Point units 7
View the set point -1,128.000 to
currently in effect. 5,537.000°C
pu.a Monitor (1 to 2) -1,999.000 to ---- ---- 0x68 (104) - - - - 8031 float
Pv.A Process Value Ac- 9,999.000°F or 1 to 2 R
tive units 0x16 (22)
View the current -1,128.000 to
filtered process 5,537.000°C
value using the
control input.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 71 • Cha pte r 5 Ope r a tio n s Pa g e

 Operations Page
CIP Data
Pa-
Modbus Class Type
Parameter Name Profibus ram-
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance and
Description Index eter
dress Attribute Access
ID
hex (dec) **
No Dis- Monitor (1 to 2) Off (62) ---- 2272 0x1B (27) ---- 8027 uint
play Autotune Status Waiting for cross 1 [offset 70] 1 to 2 R
Read the present positive (119) 27
status of Autotune. Waiting for cross 1
negative (120)
Waiting for cross 2
positive (121)
Waiting for cross 2
negative (122)
Waiting for cross 3
positive (123)
Waiting for cross 3
negative (150)
Measuring maxi-
mum peak (151)
Measuring minimum
peak (152)
Calculating (153)
Complete (18)
Timeout (118)
Loop
opEr
Control Loop Menu
r.En Control Loop (1 no No (59) No Instance 1 0x6B 48 7021 uint
r.En to 2) yEs Yes (106) Map 1 Map 2 (107) RWES
Remote Set Point 2200 2680 1 to 2
Enable this loop Instance 2 0x15 (21)
to switch control Map 1 Map 2
to the remote 2280 2760
set point.
C.ЛЏ Control Loop (1 off Off (62) Auto Instance 1 0x97 63 8001 uint
C.M to 2) aUto Auto (10) Map 1 Map 2 (151) RWES
Control Mode 1880 2360 1 to 2
ЛЏan Manual
Select the Instance 2 1
(54)
method that this Map 1 Map 2
loop will use to 1950 2430
control.

a.tsp Control Loop (1 50.0 to 200.0% 90.0 Instance 1 0x97 ---- 8025 float
A.tSP to 2) Map 1 Map 2 (151) RWES
Autotune Set 1918 2398 1 to 2
Point Instance 2 0x14 (20)
Set the set Map 1 Map 2
point that the 1988 2468
autotune will
use, as a per-
centage of the
current set
point.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 72 • Cha pte r 5 Ope r a tions Pa g e

 Operations Page
CIP Data
Pa-
Modbus Class Type
Parameter Name Profibus ram-
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance and
Description Index eter
dress Attribute Access
ID
hex (dec) **
a.Ut Control Loop (1 no No (59) No Instance 1 0x97 64 8026 uint
AUt to 2) yEs Yes (106) Map 1 Map 2 (151) RW
Autotune 1920 2400 1 to 2
Start an Instance 2 0x15 (21)
autotune. While Map 1 Map 2
the autotune 1990 2470
is active, the
Home Page will
display attn
tUn1. When the
autotune is com-
plete, the mes-
sage will clear
automatically.
C.sp Control Loop (1 Low Set Point to 75.0°F Instance 1 0x6B 49 7001 float
C.SP to 2) Maximum Set Point or units Map 1 Map 2 (107) RWES
Set Point (Setup Page) 24.0°C 2160 2640 1 to 2
Set the closed Instance 2 1
loop set point Map 1 Map 2
that the control- 2240 2720
ler will automat-
ically control to.
id.s Control Loop (1 Low Set Point to 75.0°F Instance 1 0x6B 50 7009 float
id.S to 2) High Set Point or units Map 1 Map 2 (107) RWES
Idle Set Point (Setup Page) 24.0°C 2176 2656 1 to 2
Define a set Instance 2 9
point that can be Map 1 Map 2
triggered by an 2197 2736
event state.

h.pb Control Loop (1 0.001 to 25.0°F Instance 1 0x97 65 8009 float

h.Pb to 2) 9,999.000°F or or units Map 1 Map 2 (151) RWES
Heat Proportional units 14.0°C 1890 2370 1 to 2
Band 0.001 to Instance 2 6
Set the PID pro- 5,555.000°C Map 1 Map 2
portional band 1960 2440
for the heat out-
puts.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 73 • Cha pte r 5 Ope r a tio n s Pa g e

 Operations Page
CIP Data
Pa-
Modbus Class Type
Parameter Name Profibus ram-
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance and
Description Index eter
dress Attribute Access
ID
hex (dec) **
h.hy Control Loop (1 0.001 to 3.0°F Instance 1 0x97 66 8010 float
h.hy to 2) 9,999.000°F or or units Map 1 Map 2 (151) RWES
On/Off Heat Hys- units 2.0°C 1900 2380 1 to 2
teresis 0.001 to Instance 2 0xB (11)
Set the control 5,555.000°C Map 1 Map 2
switching hys- 1970 2450
teresis for on-off
control. This de-
termines how far
into the “on” re-
gion the process
value needs to
move before the
output turns on.
C.pb Control Loop (1 0.001 to 25.0°F Instance 1 0x97 67 8012 float
C.Pb to 2) 9,999.000°F or or units Map 1 Map 2 (151) RWES
Cool Proportional units 14.0°C 1892 2372 1 to 2
Band 0.001 to Instance 2 7
Set the PID pro- 5,555.000°C Map 1 Map 2
portional band 1962 2442
for the cool out-
puts.
C.hy Control Loop (1 0.001 to 3.0°F Instance 1 0x97 68 8013 float
C.hy to 2) 9,999.000°F or or units Map 1 Map 2 (151) RWES
On/Off Cool Hys- units 2.0°C 1902 2382 1 to 2
teresis 0.001 to Instance 2 0xC (12)
Set the control 5,555.000°C Map 1 Map 2
switching hys- 1972 2522
teresis for on-off
control. This de-
termines how far
into the “on” re-
gion the process
value needs to
move before the
output turns on.
ti Control Loop (1 0 to 9,999 seconds 180 sec- Instance 1 0x97 69 8006 float
ti to 2) per repeat onds per Map 1 Map 2 (151) RWES
Time Integral repeat 1894 2374 1 to 2
Set the PID in- Instance 2 8
tegral for the Map 1 Map 2
outputs. 1964 2444

** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 74 • Cha pte r 5 Ope r a tions Pa g e

 Operations Page
CIP Data
Pa-
Modbus Class Type
Parameter Name Profibus ram-
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance and
Description Index eter
dress Attribute Access
ID
hex (dec) **
td Control Loop (1 0 to 9,999 seconds 0 Instance 1 0x97 70 8007 float
td to 2) seconds Map 1 Map 2 (151) RWES
Time Derivative 1896 2376 1 to 2
Set the PID de- Instance 2 9
rivative time for Map 1 Map 2
the outputs. 1966 2446

db Control Loop (1 -1,000.0 to 0.0 Instance 1 0x97 71 8008 float

db to 2) 1,000.0°F or units Map 1 Map 2 (151) RWES
Dead Band -556 to 556°C 1898 2378 1 to 2
Set the offset to Instance 2 0xA (10)
the proportional Map 1 Map 2
band. With a 1968 2448
negative value,
both heating and
cooling outputs
are active when
the process value
is near the set
point. A posi-
tive value keeps
heating and cool-
ing outputs from
fighting each
other.
o.sp Control Loop (1 -100 to 100% (heat 0.0 Instance 1 0x6B 51 7002 float
o.SP to 2) and cool) Map 1 Map 2 (107) RWES
Manual Power 0 to 100% (heat 2162 2642 1 to 2
Set a fixed level only) Instance 2 2
of output power -100 to 0% (cool Map 1 Map 2
when in manual only) 2242 2722
(open-loop)
mode.
No Dis- Control Loop (1 nonE None (61) ---- Instance 1 0x6C - - - - 8048 uint
play to 2) Lp.o Open Loop Map 1 Map 2 (108) R
Loop Error (1274) 1928 2408 1
Open Loop detect
Lp.r Reversed Instance 2 0x30 (48)
deviation has
Sensor (1275) Map 1 Map 2
been exceeded.
1998 2478
No Dis- Control Loop (1 CLr Clear (129) ---- Instance 1 0x6C (108) ---- 8049 uint
play to 2) ignr Ignore (204) Map 1 Map 2 1 W
Clear Loop Error 1930 2410 0x31 (49)
Current state of
limit output. Instance 2
Map 1 Map 2
2000 2480
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 75 • Cha pte r 5 Ope r a tio n s Pa g e

 Operations Page
CIP Data
Pa-
Modbus Class Type
Parameter Name Profibus ram-
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance and
Description Index eter
dress Attribute Access
ID
hex (dec) **
No Dis- Control Loop (1 -100.0 to 100.0 ---- Instance 1 0x97 (151) ---- 8033 float
play to 2) Map 1 Map 2 1 to 2 R
Loop Output 1908 2388 0x0F (15)
Power Instance 2
View the loop Map 1 Map 2
output power. 1978 2458

aLЛЏ
opEr
Alarm Menu
a.Lo Alarm (1 to 4) -1,999.000 to 32.0°F Instance 1 0x6D 18 9002 float
A.Lo Low Set Point 9,999.000°F or or units Map 1 Map 2 (109) RWES
If Type (Setup units 0.0°C 1482 1882 1 to 24
Page, Alarm -1,128.000 to Offset to 2
Menu) is set to: 5,537.000°C next instance
Process - set the (Map 1)
process value that equals +50
will trigger a low Offset to
alarm. next instance
Deviation - set (Map 2)
the span of units equals +60
from the set point
that will trigger
a low alarm. A
negative set point
represents a value
below closed
loop set point. A
positive set point
represents a value
above closed loop
set point.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 76 • Cha pte r 5 Ope r a tions Pa g e

 Operations Page
CIP Data
Pa-
Modbus Class Type
Parameter Name Profibus ram-
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance and
Description Index eter
dress Attribute Access
ID
hex (dec) **
a.hi Alarm (1 to 4) -1,999.000 to 300.0 Instance 1 0x6D 19 9001 float
A.hi High Set Point 9,999.000°F or °F or Map 1 Map 2 (109) RWES
If Type (Setup units units 1480 1880 1 to 4
Page, Alarm -1,128.000 to 150.0 Offset to 1
Menu) is set to: 5,537.000°C °C next instance
Process - set the (Map 1)
process value that equals +50
will trigger a high Offset to
alarm. next instance
Deviation - set (Map 2)
the span of units equals +60
from the set point
that will trigger
a low alarm. A
negative set point
represents a value
below closed
loop set point. A
positive set point
represents a value
above closed loop
set point.
A.CLr Alarm (1 to 4) CLr Clear ---- Instance 1 0x6D ---- 9013 uint
A.CLr Clear Alarm ignr Ignore Map 1 Map 2 (109) W
Write to this reg- 1504 1904 1 to 4
ister to clear an 0x0D (13)
alarm Offset to
next instance
(Map1 1
equals +50,
Map 2 equals
+60)
A.sir Alarm (1 to 4) siL Silence Instance 1 0x6D ---- 9014 uint
A.Sir Silence Alarm Map 1 Map 2 (109) W
Write to this reg- 1506 1906 1 to 4
ister to silence 0x0E (14)
an alarm Offset to
next instance
(Map1 1
equals +50,
Map 2 equals
+60)
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 77 • Cha pte r 5 Ope r a tio n s Pa g e

 Operations Page
CIP Data
Pa-
Modbus Class Type
Parameter Name Profibus ram-
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance and
Description Index eter
dress Attribute Access
ID
hex (dec) **
A.st Alarm (1 to 4) Startup (88) ---- Instance 1 0x6D ---- 9009 uint
A.St State None (61) Map 1 Map 2 (109) R
Current state of Blocked (12) 1496 1896 1 to 2
alarm Alarm low (8) Offset to 9
Alarm high (7) next instance
Error (28) (Map1 1
equals +50,
Map 2 equals
+60)
No Dis- Alarm (1 to 4) No (59) Instance 1 0x6D ---- 9012 uint
play Alarm Clearable Yes (106) Map 1 Map 2 (109) R
Indicates if alarm 1502 1902 1 to 4
can be cleared. Offset to 0xC (12)
next instance
(Map1 1
equals +50,
Map 2 equals
+60)
No Dis- Alarm (1 to 4) No (59) ---- Instance 1 0x6D ---- 9011 uint
play Alarm Silenced Yes (106) Map 1 Map 2 (109) R
Indicates if alarm 1500 1900 1 to 4
is silenced. Offset to 0x0B (11)
next instance
(Map1 1
equals +50,
Map 2 equals
+60)
No Dis- Alarm (1 to 4) No (59) ---- Instance 1 0x6D ---- 9010 uint
play Alarm Latched Yes (106) Map 1 Map 2 (109) R
Indicates if alarm 1498 1898 1 to 4
is latched. Offset to 0x0A (10)
next instance
(Map1 1
equals +50,
Map 2 equals
+60)
CUrr
opEr
Current Menu
C.hi Current (1) -1,999.000 to 50.0 Instance 1 0x73 ---- 15008 float
C.hi High Set Point 9,999.000 Map 1 Map 2 (115) RWES
Set the current 1134 1374 1
value that will 8
trigger a high
heater error
state.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 78 • Cha pte r 5 Ope r a tions Pa g e

 Operations Page
CIP Data
Pa-
Modbus Class Type
Parameter Name Profibus ram-
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance and
Description Index eter
dress Attribute Access
ID
hex (dec) **
C.Lo Current (1) -1,999.000 to 0.0 Instance 1 0x73 ---- 15009 float
C.Lo Low Set Point 9,999.000 Map 1 Map 2 (115) RWES
Set the current 1136 1376 1
value that will 9
trigger a low
heater error
state.
CU.r Current (1) 0 to 9,999.00 ---- Instance 1 0x73 ---- 15007 float
CU.r Load Current RMS Map 1 Map 2 (115) R
View the RMS 1132 1372 1
value of the 7
measured cur-
rent.
C.Er Current (1) nonE None (61) ---- Instance 1 0x73 ---- 15002 uint
C.Er Error Shrt Shorted Map 1 Map 2 (115) R
View the most (127) 1160 1400 1
recent load 2
opEn Open (65)
fault.
h.Er Current (1) nonE None (61) ---- Instance 1 0x73 ---- 15003 uint
h.Er Heater Error high High (37) Map 1 Map 2 (115) R
Determine if load LoФІ Low (53) 1124 1364 1
current flow is 3
within the High
and Low Set
Points.
No Dis- Current (1) -1,999.000 to ---- Instance 1 0x73 ---- 15021 float
play Error Status 9,999.000 Map 1 Map 2 (115) R
View the most 1160 1400 1
recent load fault 21
tЛЏr
oPEr
Timer Menu
Su.A Timer on On (63) ---- Instance 1 0x83 ---- 31007 uint
Su.A Source Value A oFF Off (62) Map 1 Map 2 (109) R
View the state - - - - 8012 1
of Source Func- 0x07 (7)
tion A.
Su.C Timer -1999.000 to ---- Instance 1 0x83 ---- 31037 float
Su.C Source Value C 999.000°F or Map 1 Map 2 (109) R
View the value units - - - - 8572 1
of Source Func- -1110.555 to 0x25 (37)
tion C. 5555.000
Su.d Timer on On (63) ---- Instance 1 0x83 ---- 31038 uint
Su.d Source Value D oFF Off (62) Map 1 Map 2 (109) R
View the state - - - - 8574 1
of Source Func- 0x26 (38)
tion D.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 79 • Cha pte r 5 Ope r a tio n s Pa g e

 Operations Page
CIP Data
Pa-
Modbus Class Type
Parameter Name Profibus ram-
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance and
Description Index eter
dress Attribute Access
ID
hex (dec) **
P.SP1 Timer -1999.000 to ---- Instance 1 0x83 ---- 31039 float
P.SP1 Produced Set 999.000°F or Map 1 Map 2 (109) R
Point 1 units - - - - 8576 1
View the value of -1110.555 to 0x27 (39)
Set Point 1. 5555.000
tE.o1 Timer on On (63) ---- Instance 1 0x83 ---- 31040 uint
tE.o1 Timer Event Out- oFF Off (62) Map 1 Map 2 (109) R
put 1 - - - - 8578 1
View the state of 0x28 (40)
Event Output 1.
tE.o2 Timer on On (63) ---- Instance 1 0x83 ---- 31041 uint
tE.o2 Timer Event Out- oFF Off (62) Map 1 Map 2 (109) R
put 2 - - - - 8580 1
View the state of 0x29 (41)
Event Output 2.
tE.o3 Timer on On (63) ---- Instance 1 0x83 ---- 31046 uint
tE.o3 Timer Event Out- oFF Off (62) Map 1 Map 2 (109) R
put 3 - - - - 8590 1
View the state of 0x2E (46)
Event Output 3.
t.r Timer 00.00 00:00 to 7 Instance 1 0x83 (131) ---- 31021 string
t.r Time Remaining 99:59 Map 1 Map 2 1 R
Display the time ---- 0x15 (21)
remaining on the
timer.

r.bS Timer yES Yes (106) ---- Instance 1 0x83 (131) ---- 31022 uint
r.bS Ready Band State no No (59) Map 1 Map 2 1 R
Display whether - - - - 8542 0x16 (22)
the process value
is in the ready
band.

hoUr Timer 0 to 99 0 Instance 1 0x83 (131) ---- 31025 uint

hoUr Hours Map 1 Map 2 1 RWES
Set the timer pe- - - - - 8548 0x19 (25)
riod hours.

ЛЏin Timer 0 to 59 0 Instance 1 0x83 (131) ---- 31026 uint

Min Minutes Map 1 Map 2 1 RWES
Set the timer pe- - - - - 8550 0x1A (26)
riod minutes.

SEC Timer 0 to 59 10 Instance 1 0x83 (131) ---- 31027 uint

SEC Seconds Map 1 Map 2 1 RWES
Set the timer pe- - - - - 8552 0x1B (27)
riod seconds.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 80 • Cha pte r 5 Ope r a tions Pa g e

 Operations Page
CIP Data
Pa-
Modbus Class Type
Parameter Name Profibus ram-
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance and
Description Index eter
dress Attribute Access
ID
hex (dec) **
Ct.SP Timer -1999.000 to 75 Instance 1 0x83 (131) ---- 31028 float
Ct.SP Closed Loop Timer 9999.000°F or Map 1 Map 2 1 RWES
Set Point units - - - - 8554 0x1C (28)
Set the set point -1110.555 to
that will be in ef- 5555.000°C
fect during the
timer period.
No Dis- Timer On (63) ---- Instance 1 0x83 (131) ---- 31015 uint
play Timer Timing Off (62) Map 1 Map 2 1 R
Indicates whether - - - - 8528 0x0F (15)
the timer is run-
ning.
No Dis- Timer None (61) ---- Instance 1 0x83 (131) ---- 31018 uint
play Output Error Open (65) Map 1 Map 2 1 R
Indicates errors Shorted (127) - - - - 8534 0x12 (18)
that may have in- Measurement Error
terfered with the (140)
timer operation.
Bad Calibration
Data (139)
Ambient Error (9)
RTD Error (141)
Fail (32)
Math Error (1423)
Not Sourced (246
Stale (1617)
No Dis- Timer Off (62) ---- Instance 1 0x83 (131) ---- 31042 uint
play Indicator Request Ready (1662) Map 1 Map 2 1 R
View the status of Ready Ack (1950) - - - - 8582 0x2A (42)
the timer illumi- Running (149)
nated indicators.
No Dis- Timer Inactive (41) ---- Instance 1 0x83 (131) ---- 31043 uint
play Countdown State Wait Process (209) Map 1 Map 2 1 R
View the state of Wait Event (144) - - - - 8584 0x2B (43)
the countdown Running (149)
cycle.
Pause (146)
Complete (18)
End (27)
No Dis- Timer 0 to 4,294,967,295 ---- Instance 1 0x83 (131) ---- 31047 udint
play Elapsed Signal mS Map 1 Map 2 1 R
Time - - - - 8592 0x2F (47)
Counts from 0 to
Signal Time while
signal time is ac-
tive.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 81 • Cha pte r 5 Ope r a tio n s Pa g e

 Operations Page
CIP Data
Pa-
Modbus Class Type
Parameter Name Profibus ram-
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance and
Description Index eter
dress Attribute Access
ID
hex (dec) **
No Dis- Timer 0 to 4,294,967,295 ---- Instance 1 0x83 (131) ---- 31048 udint
play Elapsed Time mS Map 1 Map 2 1 R
Counts from 0 to - - - - 8594 0x30 (48)
Countdown Time
while time cycle
is active.

ЛЏat
opEr
Math Menu
Su.a Math (1) -1,999.000 to ---- Instance 1 0x7D ---- 25016 float
Su.A Source Value A 9,999.000°F or Map 1 Map 2 (125) R
View the value units - - - - 3030 1
of Source A. -1,128.000 to 0x10 (16)
5,537.000°C
Su.b Math (1) -1,999.000 to ---- Instance 1 0x7D ---- 25017 float
Su.b Source Value B 9,999.000°F or Map 1 Map 2 (125) R
View the value units - - - - 3032 1
of Source B. -1,128.000 to 0x11 (17)
5,537.000°C
Su.E Math (1) off Off (62) ---- Instance 1 0x7D ---- 25020 uint
Su.E Source Value E on On (63) Map 1 Map 2 (125) R
View the value - - - - 3038 1
of Source E. 0x14 (20)
ofst Math (1) -1,999.000 to 0 Instance 1 0x7D ---- 25023 float
oFSt Offset 9,999.000°F or Map 1 Map 2 (125) RWES
Set an offset to units - - - - 3044 1
be applied to -1,128.000 to 0x17 (23)
this function's 5,537.000°C
output.
o.u Math (1) -1,999.000 to ---- Instance 1 0x7D ---- 25022 float
o.v Output Value 9,999.000°F or Map 1 Map 2 (125) R
View the value units - - - - 3042 1
of this function's -1,128.000 to 0x16 (22)
output. 5,537.000°C
No Dis- Math (1) None (61) ---- Instance 1 0x7D ---- 25029 uint
play Error Open (65) Map 1 Map 2 (125) R
Read reported Shorted (127) - - - - 3056 1
cause for math Measurement Error 0x1D (29)
error (140)
Bad Cal Data (139)
Ambient Error (9)
RTD Error (141)
Fail (32)
Math Error (1423)
Not Sourced (246)
Stale (1617)
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 82 • Cha pte r 5 Ope r a tions Pa g e

 Operations Page
CIP Data
Pa-
Modbus Class Type
Parameter Name Profibus ram-
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance and
Description Index eter
dress Attribute Access
ID
hex (dec) **
Sof
opEr
Special Output Function Menu
Su.a Special Output -1,999.000 to ---- Instance 1 0x87 ---- 35007 float
Su.A Function (1) 9,999.000°F or Map 1 Map 2 (135) R
Source Value A units - - - - 3852 1
View the value of -1,128.000 to 7
Source A. 5,537.000°C
Su.b Special Output -1,999.000 to ---- Instance 1 0x87 ---- 35008 float
Su.b Function (1) 9,999.000°F or Map 1 Map 2 (135) R
Source Value B units - - - - 3854 1
View the value of -1,128.000 to 8
Source B. 5,537.000°C
o.u1 Special Output -1,999.000 to ---- Instance 1 0x87 ---- 35010 float
o.v1 Function (1) 9,999.000°F or Map 1 Map 2 (135) R
Output Value 1 units - - - - 3858 1
View the value -1,128.000 to 0xA (10)
of this function's 5,537.000°C
Output 1.
o.u2 Special Output -1,999.000 to ---- Instance 1 0x87 ---- 35012 float
o.v2 Function (1) 9,999.000°F or Map 1 Map 2 (135) R
Output Value 2 units - - - - 3862 1
View the value -1,128.000 to 0xC (12)
of this function's 5,537.000°C
Output 2.
No Dis- Special Output None (61) ---- Instance 1 0x87 ---- 35011 uint
play Function (1) Open (65) Map 1 Map 2 (135) R
Error 1 Shorted (127) - - - - 3860 1
View reported Measurement error 0x0B (11)
output malfunc- (140)
tion. Bad calibration
data (139)
Ambient error (9)
RTD error (14)
Fail (32)
Math error (1423)
Not sourced (246)
Stale (1617)
Can't process
(1659)
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 83 • Cha pte r 5 Ope r a tio n s Pa g e

 Operations Page
CIP Data
Pa-
Modbus Class Type
Parameter Name Profibus ram-
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance and
Description Index eter
dress Attribute Access
ID
hex (dec) **
No Dis- Special Output None (61) ---- Instance 1 0x87 ---- 35013 uint
play Function (1 to 4) Open (65) Map 1 Map 2 (135) R
Error 2 Shorted (127) - - - - 3940 1 to 4
View reported Measurement error 0x0D (13)
cause for output (140)
malfunction. Bad calibration
data (139)
Ambient error (9)
RTD error (14)
Fail (32)
Math error (1423)
Not sourced (246)
Stale (1617)
Can't process
(1659)
P.sta * Available with PM8/9 only.
* Some parameters in the Profile Status Menu can be changed for the currently
opEr running profile, but should only be changed by knowledgeable personnel and
Profile Status Menu with caution. Changing parameters via the Profile Status Menu will not change
the stored profile but will have an immediate impact on the profile that is run-
ning. Changes made to profile parameters in the Profiling Pages will be saved
and will also have an immediate impact on the running profile.
p.str Profile Status 1 to 40 1 Instance 1 0x7A 204 22001 uint
Profile Start Map 1 Map 2 (122) W
P.Str 2520 4340 1
1
p.ACr Profile Status nonE None (61) None Instance 1 0x7A 205 22011 uint
Action Request Map 1 Map 2 (122) W
PACr stEp Step (89) 2540 4360 1
End Terminate
(148) 0xB (11)
rEsU Resume
(147)
paUs Pause (146)
prof Profile (77)
stp Profile Status 1 to 40 ---- Instance 1 0x7A ---- 22004 uint
Current Step 0 (none) Map 1 Map 2 (122) R
StP 2526 4346 1
View the currently
running step. 4
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 84 • Cha pte r 5 Ope r a tions Pa g e

 Operations Page
CIP Data
Pa-
Modbus Class Type
Parameter Name Profibus ram-
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance and
Description Index eter
dress Attribute Access
ID
hex (dec) **
s.typ Profile Status Ustp Unused ---- Instance 1 0x7A ---- 22013 uint
S.typ Step Type Step (50) Map 1 Map 2 (122) R
View the currently 2544 4364 1
SoaH Soak (87)
running step type. 0xD (13)
ФІ.E Wait For
Event (144)
ФІ.pr Wait For
Process (209)
ФІ.bo Wait For
Process or Event
(210)
JL Jump (116)
End End (27)
CloC Wait For
Time (1543)
ti Time (143)
ratE Ramp Rate
(81)
t.sp1 Profile Status -1,999.000 to 0.0°F Instance 1 0x7A ---- 22012 float
*Target Set Point 9,999.000°F or or units Map 1 Map 2 (122) RW
t.SP1 -18.0°C 2542
Loop 1 units 4362 1
View or change -1,128.000 to 0xC (12)
the target set 5,537.000°C
point of the cur-
rent step.
t.sp2 Profile Status -1,999.000 to 0.0°F Instance 1 0x7A ---- 22048 float
*Target Set Point 9,999.000°F or or units Map 1 Map 2 (122) RW
t.SP2 -18.0°C - - - - 4434 1
Loop 2 units
View or change -1,128.000 to 0x30 (48)
the target set 5,537.000°C
point of the cur-
rent step.
AC.SP Profile Status -1,999.000 to ---- Instance 1 - - - - ---- 22005 float
AC.SP Produced Set 9,999.000°F or Map 1 Map 2 R
Point 1 units 2528 4348
Display the cur- -1,128.000 to
rent set point, 5,537.000°C
even if the profile
is ramping.
p.sp2 Profile Status -1,999.000 to ---- Instance 1 - - - - ---- 22051 float
P.SP2 Produced Set 9,999.000°F or Map 1 Map 2 R
Point 2 units - - - - 4440
Display the cur- -1,128.000 to
rent set point, 5,537.000°C
even if the profile
is ramping.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 85 • Cha pte r 5 Ope r a tio n s Pa g e

 Operations Page
CIP Data
Pa-
Modbus Class Type
Parameter Name Profibus ram-
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance and
Description Index eter
dress Attribute Access
ID
hex (dec) **
hoUr Profile Status 0 to 99 0 Instance 1 0x7A ---- 22078 uint
hoUr Hours Map 1 Map 2 (122) RW
Step time remain- - - - - 4494 1
ing in hours. 0x4E (78)
ЛЏin Profile Status 0 to 59 0 Instance 1 0x7A ---- 22077 uint
Min Minutes Map 1 Map 2 (122) RW
Step time remain- - - - - 4492 1
ing in minutes. 0x4D (77)
SEC Profile Status 0 to 59 0 Instance 1 0x7A ---- 22076 uint
SEC Seconds Map 1 Map 2 (122) RW
Step time remain- - - - - 4490 1
ing in seconds. 0x4C (76)
Ent1 Profile Status off Off (62) Off Instance 1 0x7A ---- 22014 uint
Ent1 *Event 1 on On (63) Map 1 Map 2 (122) RW
View or change 2546 4366 1
the event output 0xE (14)
states.
Ent2 Profile Status off Off (62) Off Instance 1 0x7A ---- 22015 uint
Ent2 *Event 2 on On (63) Map 1 Map 2 (122) RW
View or change 2548 4368 1
the event output 0xF (15)
states.
JC Profile Status 0 to 9,999 ---- Instance 1 0x7A ---- 22010 uint
JC Jump Count Re- Map 1 Map 2 (122) R
maining 2538 4358 1
View the jump 0xA (10)
counts remaining
for the current
loop. In a profile
with nested loops,
this may not in-
dicate the actual
jump counts re-
maining.
No Dis- Profile Status 1 to 25 ---- Instance 1 0x7A ---- 22003 uint
play Current File 0 (none) Map 1 Map 2 (122) R
Indicates current 2522 4342 1
file being ex- 3
ecuted.
No Dis- Profile Status Off (62) ---- Instance 1 0x7A ---- 22002 uint
play Profile State Running (149) Map 1 Map 2 (122) R
Read current Pro- Pause (146) 2524 4344 1
file state. 2
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 86 • Cha pte r 5 Ope r a tions Pa g e

 6 Chapter 6: Setup Page
Navigating the Setup Page
To navigate to the Setup Page follow the steps below:
1. From the Home Page, press and hold both the Up ¿ and Down ¯ keys for six seconds. Ai
will appear in the upper display and SEt will appear in the lower display. If the up and down
arrow keys are released where is displayed, simply press and hold those same keys for an ad-
ditional 3 seconds.
Note: (for firmware release 13 and below)
If keys are released when opEr is displayed, press the Infinity Key ˆ or reset key to exit
and repeat until SEt is displayed.
2. Press the Up ¿ or Down ¯ key to view available menus.
3. Press the Advance Key ‰ to enter the menu of choice.
4. If a submenu exists (more than one instance), press the Up ¿ or Down ¯ key to select and
then press the Advance Key ‰ to enter.
5. Press the Up ¿ or Down ¯ key to move through available menu prompts.
6. Press the Infinity Key ˆ to move backwards through the levels: parameter to submenu, sub-
menu to menu, menu to Home Page.
7.Press and hold the Infinity Key ˆ for two seconds to return to the Home Page.
On the following pages, top level menus are identified with a yellow background color.
Note:
Some of these menus and parameters may not appear, depending on the controller's op-
tions. See model number information in the Appendix for more information. If there is
only one instance of a menu, no submenus will appear.
Note:
Some of the listed parameters may not be visible. Parameter visibility is dependent upon
controller part number.

Ai P.EE Process Error En- Lnr

sEt Analog Input Menu able sEt Linearization Menu
1 P.EL Process Error Low 1
Ai Analog Input (1 to 2) Value Lnr Linearization (1 to 24)
sEn Sensor Type t.C Thermistor Curve fn Function
Lin TC Linearization r.r Resistance Range sfn.a Source Function A
rtL RTD Leads fiL Filter Si.a Source Instance A
Unit Units i.Er Input Error Latching sz.a Source Zone A
dEC Display Precision Unit Units
s.Lo Scale Low
i.Ca Calibration Offset * ip.1 Input Point 1
s.hi Scale High op.1 Output Point 1
r.Lo Range Low ain Analog Input Value *
i.Er Input Error * ip.2 Input Point 2
r.hi Range High op.2 Output Point 2
* These parameters/prompts are available with firmware revisions 11.0 and above.
Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 87 • Cha pte r 6 Se tu p Pa g e
 ip.3 Input Point 3 LiЛЏ r.En Remote Set Point
op.3 Output Point 3 Enable
sEt Limit Menu r.ty Remote Set Point
ip.4 Input Point 4
LiЛЏLimit Type
op.4 Output Point 4
L.sdSides Ufa Auto-to-Manual Pow-
ip.5 Input Point 5
op.5 Output Point 5 L.hyHysteresis er
ip.6 Input Point 6 sp.Lh
Maximum Set faiL Input Error Power
op.6 Output Point 6 Point ЛЏan Fixed Power
ip.7 Input Point 7 sp.LL
Minimum Set L.dE Open Loop Detect
op.7 Output Point 7 Point Enable
ip.8 Input Point 8 Lh.sHigh Limit Set Point L.dt Open Loop Detect
* Time
op.8 Output Point 8
LL.s Low Limit Set Point L.dd Open Loop Detect
ip.q Input Point 9 Deviation
op.q Output Point 9 *
rp Ramp Action
ip.10 Input Point 10 sfn.a Source Function r.sC Ramp Scale
op.10 Output Point 10 A* r.rt Ramp Rate
Pu si.a Source Instance L.sp Minimum Set Point
sEt Process Value A* h.sp Maximum Set Point
1 L.Cr Clear Limit * C.sp Set Point*
Pu Process Value (1 to 2) L.st Limit Status * id.s Idle Set Point *
fn Function L.it Integrate with Sys- sp.Lo Minimum Manual
p.unt Pressure Units tem Power
SP.hi Maximum Manual
a.unt Altitude Units Loop Power
b.pr Barometric Pres- sEt Control Loop Menu o.sp Manual Power *
sure 1 C.ЛЏ Control Mode *
fil Filter Loop Control Loop (1 to 2)
dio h.ag Heat Algorithm otpt
C.ag Cool Algorithm sEt Output Menu
sEt Digital Input/Output
Menu C.Cr Cool Output Curve 1
h.pb Heat Proportional otpt Output (1 to 4)
5
Band * fn Function
dio Digital Input/Output (5
to 12) h.hy On/Off Heat Hyster- fi Output Function In-
esis * stance
dir Direction
C.pb Cool Proportional o.Ct Time Base Type
fn Function
Band * o.tb Fixed Time Base
fi Output Function In-
C.hy On/Off Cool Hyster- o.Lo Low Power Scale
stance
esis * o.hi High Power Scale
o.Ct Time Base Type ti Time Integral *
o.tb Fixed Time Base otpt Output Process 1, 3
td Time Derivative * o.ty Type
o.Lo Low Power Scale db Dead Band *
o.hi High Power Scale fn Function
t.tun TRU-TUNE+® Enable r.sr Retransmit Source
LEv Active Level
t.bnd TRU-TUNE+ Band fi Function Instance
fn Active Level Func-
t.gn TRU-TUNE+ Gain s.Lo Scale Low
tion
a.tsp Autotune Set Point * s.hi Scale High
fi Function Instance
t.agr Autotune Aggressive- r.Lo Range Low
ness r.hi Range High
p.dL Peltier Delay o.Ca Calibration Offset

* These parameters/prompts are available with firmware revisions 11.0 and above.
Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 88 • Cha pte r 6 Se tu p Pa g e
aLЛЏ ЛЏin Minutes C_f Display Units
sEt Alarm Menu SEC Seconds aC.Lf AC Line Frequency
1 Ct.SP Closed Loop Timer r.typ Ramping Type
Set Point p.typ Profile Type
aLЛЏ Alarm (1 to 4)
St Signal Time gsE Guaranteed Soak En-
a.ty Type
sr.a Alarm Source ЛЏat able
is.a Alarm Source In- gsd1 Guaranteed Soak De-
sEt Math Menu viation 1
stance 1
Loop Control Loop gsd2 Guaranteed Soak De-
ЛЏat Math viation 2
a.hy Hysteresis fn Function si.a Source Instance A
a.Lg Logic Sfn.E Source Function E si.b Source Instance B
a.sd Sides Si.E Source Instance E poti Power Off Time
a.Lo Low Set Point * s.Lo Scale Low sutb Synchronized Vari-
a.hi High Set Point * S.hi Scale High able Time Base
a.La Latching r.Lo Range Low C.LEd Communications LED
a.bL Blocking r.hi Range High Action
a.si Silencing fiL Filter 2onE Zone
a.dsp Display Chan Channel
a.dL Delay Time sof
a.CLr Clear Alarm * sEt Special Output Function d.prs Display Pairs
d.ti Display Time
a.sir Silence Alarm * Menu
Usr.s Save Settings As
a.st Alarm State * sof Special Output Function
Usr.r Restore Settings
fn Function From
CUrr Sfn.a Source Function A
sEt Current Menu Si.a Source Instance A COЛЏ
CUrr Current Sfn.b Source Function B sEt Communications Menu
C.sd Sides Si.b Source Instance B 1
C.Ur Indicate Reading pon.a Input A Turn On COЛЏ Communications (1 to
C.dt Detection Thresh- 2)
pof.a Input A Turn Off
old pCoL Protocol
pon.b Input B Turn On a.ds Standard Bus Ad-
C.sC Input Scaling
pof.b Input B Turn Off dress
C.ofs Heater Offset
on.t Minimum On Time ad.ЛЏ Modbus Address
C.si Monitored Output
of.t Minimum Off Time baUd Baud Rate
tЛЏr t.t Valve Travel Time par Parity
SEt Timer Menu db Dead Band ЛЏ.hL Modbus Word Order
ti.En Timer Enable t.dL Time Delay iP.ЛЏ IP Address Mode
ti.St Timer Start Method ip.f1 IP Fixed Address Part
SFn.A Source Function A fUn 1
Si.A Source Instance A sEt Variable Menu ip.f2 IP Fixed Address Part
SFn.C Source Function C 1 2
Si.C Source Instance C fUn Function Key (1 to 2) ip.f3 IP Fixed Address Part
SFn.d Source Function D LEv Active Level 3
Si.d Source Instance D Fn Action Function ip.f4 IP Fixed Address Part
t.r Time Remaining fi Function Instance 4
r.bS Ready Band State ip.f5 IP Fixed Address Part
rdy Ready Band gLbL 5
t.For Time Format sEt Global Menu ip.f6 IP Fixed Address Part
hoUr Hours gLbL Global 6
* These parameters/prompts are available with firmware revisions 11.0 and above.
Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 89 • Cha pte r 6 Se tu p Pa g e
 ips1 IP Fixed Subnet Part 1
ips2 IP Fixed Subnet Part 2
ips3 IP Fixed Subnet Part 3
ips4 IP Fixed Subnet Part 4
ips5 IP Fixed Subnet Part 5
ips6 IP Fixed Subnet Part 6
ipg1 IP Fixed Subnet Part 1
ipg2 IP Fixed Subnet Part 2
ipg3 IP Fixed Subnet Part 3
ipg4 IP Fixed Subnet Part 4
ipg5 IP Fixed Subnet Part 5
ipg6 IP Fixed Subnet Part 6
ЛЏb.E Modbus TCP Enable
Eip.E EtherNet/IP Enable
ao.nb CIP Implicit Assembly Output Member Quantity
ai.nb CIP Implicit Assembly Input Member Quantity
C_f Display Units
ЛЏap Data Map
nu.s Non-volatile Save
rtC
sEt Real Time Clock
hoUr Hours
ЛЏin Minutes
doФІ Day of Week

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 90 • Cha pte r 6 Se tu p Pa g e

 Setup Page
CIP - Data
Modbus Class Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance fibus eter and
Description
dress Attribute Index ID Access
hex (dec) **
Ai
sEt
Analog Input Menu
sEn Analog Input (1 to 2) off Off (62) Thermo- Instance 1 0x68 3 4005 uint
SEn Sensor Type tC Thermocouple couple or Map 1 Map 2 (104) RWES
Set the analog sen- (95) Thermis- 368 368 1 to 2
sor type to match tor Instance 2 5
the device wired to
ЛЏu Millivolts (56)
voLt Volts dc (104) Map 1 Map 2
this input. 448 458
ЛЏa Milliamps dc
Note: (112)
There is no open r0.1H RTD 100 Ω (113)
sensor protection
for process inputs.
r1.0H RTD 1,000 Ω
(114)
pot Potentiometer 1
kΩ (155)
thEr Thermistor
(229)

Lin Analog Input (1 to 2) b B (11) HK J Instance 1 0x68 4 4006 uint

Lin TC Linearization (48) Map 1 Map 2 (104) RWES
Set the linearization C C (15) nN 370 370 1 to 2
to match the ther- (58) Instance 2 6
mocouple wired to Map 1 Map 2
this input.
d D (23) rR
(80) 450 460
E E (26) sS
(84)
f F (30) tT
(93)
J J (46)
rt.L Analog Input (1 to 2) 2 2 (1) 2 Instance 1 0x68 ---- 4007 uint
rt.L RTD Leads 3 3 (2) Map 1 Map 2 (104) RWES
Set to match the 372 372 1 to 2
number of leads on Instance 2 7
the RTD wired to Map 1 Map 2
this input. 452 462

Unit Analog Input (1 to 2) a.tp Absolute Tem- Process Instance 1 0x68 5 4042 uint
Unit Units perature (1540) Map 1 Map 2 (104) RWES
Set the type of units rh Relative Humidity - - - - 442 1 to 2
the sensor will mea- (1538) Instance 2 0x2A
sure. Map 1 Map 2 (42)
pro Process (75)
PФІr Power (73) ---- 532

* These parameters/prompts are available in these menus with firmware revisions 11.0 and above.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 91 • Cha pte r 6 Se tu p Pa g e

 Setup Page
CIP - Data
Modbus Class Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance fibus eter and
Description
dress Attribute Index ID Access
hex (dec) **
s.Lo Analog Input (1 to 2) -100.0 to 1,000.0 0.0 Instance 1 0x68 6 4015 float
S.Lo Scale Low Map 1 Map 2 (104) RWES
Set the low scale for 388 388 1 to 2
process inputs. This Instance 2 0xF (15)
value, in millivolts, Map 1 Map 2
volts or milliamps, 468 478
will correspond to
the Range Low out-
put of this function
block.

s.hi Analog Input (1 to 2) -100.0 to 1,000.0 20.0 Instance 1 0x68 7 4016 float
S.hi Scale High Map 1 Map 2 (104) RWES
Set the high scale 390 390 1 to 2
for process inputs. Instance 2 0x10
This value, in mil- Map 1 Map 2 (16)
livolts, volts or milli- 470 480
amperes, will corre-
spond to the Range
High output of this
function block.

r.Lo Analog Input (1 to 2) -1,999.000 to 0.0 Instance 1 0x68 8 4017 float

r.Lo Range Low 9,999.000 Map 1 Map 2 (104) RWES
Set the low range 392 392 1 to 2
for this function Instance 2 0x11
block's output. Map 1 Map 2 (17)
472 482

r.hi Analog Input (1 to 2) -1,999.000 to 9,999 Instance 1 0x68 9 4018 float

r.hi Range High 9,999.000 Map 1 Map 2 (104) RWES
Set the high range 394 394 1 to 2
for this function Instance 2 0x12
block's output. Map 1 Map 2 (18)
474 484

p.EE Analog Input (1 to 2) off Off (62) Off Instance 1 0x68 10 4030 uint
P.EE Process Error En- LoФІ Low (53) Map 1 Map 2 (104) RWES
able 418 418 1 to 2
Turn the Process Er- Instance 2 0x1E
ror Low feature on Map 1 Map 2 (30)
or off. 498 508

p.EL Analog Input (1 to 2) -100.0 to 1,000.0 0.0 Instance 1 0x68 11 4031 float
P.EL Process Error Low Map 1 Map 2 (104) RWES
Value 420 420 1 to 2
If the process value Instance 2 0x1F
drops below this Map 1 Map 2 (31)
value, it will trigger 500 510
an input error.
* These parameters/prompts are available in these menus with firmware revisions 11.0 and above.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 92 • Cha pte r 6 Se tup Pa g e

 Setup Page
CIP - Data
Modbus Class Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance fibus eter and
Description
dress Attribute Index ID Access
hex (dec) **
t.C Analog Input (1 to 2) a Curve A (1451) Curve A Instance 1 0x68 ---- 4038 uint
t.C Thermistor Curve b Curve B (1452) Map 1 Map 2 (104) RWES
Select a curve to ap- 434 434 1 to 2
ply to the thermistor
C Curve C (1453) 0x26
CUst Custom (180) Instance 2
input. Map 1 Map 2 (38)
514 524

r.r Analog Input (1 to 2) 5 5K (1448) 40K Instance 1 0x68 ---- 4037 uint
r.r Resistance Range 10 10K (1360) Map 1 Map 2 (104) RWES
Set the maximum 432 432 1 to 2
resistance of the
20 20K (1361) 0x25
40 40K (1449) Instance 2
thermistor input. Map 1 Map 2 (37)
512 522

fiL Analog Input (1 to 2) 0.0 to 60.0 seconds 0.5 Instance 1 0x68 12 4014 float
FiL Filter Map 1 Map 2 (104) RWES
Filtering smooths 386 386 1 to 2
out the process sig- Instance 2 0xE (14)
nal to both the dis- Map 1 Map 2
play and the input. 466 476
Increase the time to
increase filtering.
Note:
Filter does not ap-
ply to the Limit
sensor but does
apply to all other
functions.

i.Er Analog Input (1 to 2) off Off (62) Off Instance 1 0x68 ---- 4028 uint
i.Er Error Latching on On (63) Map 1 Map 2 (104) RWES
Turn input error 414 414 1 to 2
latching on or off. If Instance 2 0x1C
latching is on, errors Map 1 Map 2 (28)
must be manually 494 504
cleared.

dEC Analog Input (1 to 2) 0 Whole (105) Whole Instance 1 0x68 ---- 4020 uint
dEC Display Precision 0.0 Tenths (94) Map 1 Map 2 (104) RWES
Set the precision of 398 398 1 to 2
the displayed value.
0.00 Hundredths (40) 0x14
0.000 Thousandths Instance 2
Map 1 Map 2 (20)
(96)
478 488
* These parameters/prompts are available in these menus with firmware revisions 11.0 and above.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 93 • Cha pte r 6 Se tu p Pa g e

 Setup Page
CIP - Data
Modbus Class Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance fibus eter and
Description
dress Attribute Index ID Access
hex (dec) **
i.Ca Analog Input (1 to 2) -1,999.000 to 0.0 Instance 1 0x68 2 4012 float
i.CA Calibration Offset * 9,999.000°F or units Map 1 Map 2 (104) RWES
Offset the input -1,110.555 to 382 382 1 to 2
reading to compen- 5,555.000°C Instance 2 0xC (12)
sate for lead wire Map 1 Map 2
resistance or other 462 472
factors that cause
the input reading to
vary from the actual
process value.
ain Analog Input (1 to 2) -1,999.000 to ---- Instance 1 0x68 0 4001 float
Ain Analog Input Value 9,999.000°F or units Map 1 Map 2 (104) R
* -1,128.000 to 360 360 1 to 2
View the process 5,537.000°C Instance 2 1
value. Map 1 Map 2
Note: 440 450
Ensure that the Er-
ror Status (below)
indicates no error
(61) when reading
this value using a
field bus protocol.
If an error exists,
the last known value
prior to the error
occurring will be re-
turned.
i.Er Analog Input (1 to 2) nonE None (61) ---- Instance 1 0x68 1 4002 uint
i.Er Input Error * OpEn Open (65) Map 1 Map 2 (104) R
View the cause of 362 362 1 to 2
the most recent er-
shrt Shorted (127) 2
E.ЛЏ Measurement Er- Instance 2
ror. Map 1 Map 2
ror (140)
442 452
E.CaL Bad Calibration
Data (139)
Er.ab Ambient Error
(9)
E.rtd RTD Error (141)
faiL Fail (32)
* These parameters/prompts are available in these menus with firmware revisions 11.0 and above.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 94 • Cha pte r 6 Se tup Pa g e

 Setup Page
CIP - Data
Modbus Class Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance fibus eter and
Description
dress Attribute Index ID Access
hex (dec) **
Lnr
sEt
Linearization Menu
Fn Linearization (1 to off Off (62) Off Instance 1 0x86 155 34005 uint
Fn 2) intr Interpolated Map 1 Map 2 (134) RWES
Function (1482) - - - - 3568 1 to 2
Set how this func- stpd Stepped (1483) Instance 2 5
tion will linearize Map 1 Map 2
Source A. - - - - 3638

Unit Linearization (1 to src Source (1539) Source Instance 1 0x86 156 34029 uint
Unit 2) nonE None (61) Map 1 Map 2 (134) RWES
Units a.tp Absolute Tem- - - - - 3616 1 to 2
Set the units of the perature (1540) Instance 2 0x1D
output value. Map 1 Map 2 (29)
r.tp Relative Tem-
perature (1541) - - - - 3686
pФІr Power (73)
pro Process (75)
rh Relative Humidity
(1538)

ip.1 Linearization (1 to -1,999.000 to 0.0 Instance 1 0x86 157 34008 float

ip.1 2) 9,999.000 Map 1 Map 2 (134) RWES
Input Point 1 - - - - 3574 1 to 2
Set the value that Instance 2 8
will be mapped to Map 1 Map 2
output 1. - - - - 3644

op.1 Linearization (1 to -1,999.000 to 0.0 Instance 1 0x86 158 34018 float

op.1 2) 9,999.000 Map 1 Map 2 (134) RWES
Output Point 1 - - - - 3594 1 to 2
Set the value that Instance 2 0x12
will be mapped to Map 1 Map 2 (18)
input 1. - - - - 3664

ip.2 Linearization (1 to -1,999.000 to 1.0 Instance 1 0x86 159 34009 float

ip.2 2) 9,999.000 Map 1 Map 2 (134) RWES
Input Point 2 - - - - 3576 1 to 2
Set the value that Instance 2 9
will be mapped to Map 1 Map 2
output 2. - - - - 3646

op.2 Linearization (1 to -1,999.000 to 1.0 Instance 1 0x86 160 34019 float

op.2 2) 9,999.000 Map 1 Map 2 (134) RWES
Output Point 2 - - - - 3596 1 to 2
Set the value that Instance 2 0x13
will be mapped to Map 1 Map 2 (19)
input 2. - - - - 3666
* These parameters/prompts are available in these menus with firmware revisions 11.0 and above.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 95 • Cha pte r 6 Se tu p Pa g e

 Setup Page
CIP - Data
Modbus Class Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance fibus eter and
Description
dress Attribute Index ID Access
hex (dec) **
ip.3 Linearization (1 to -1,999.000 to 2.0 Instance 1 0x86 161 34010 float
ip.3 2) 9,999.000 Map 1 Map 2 (134) RWES
Input Point 3 - - - - 3578 1 to 2
Set the value that Instance 2 0xA (10)
will be mapped to Map 1 Map 2
output 3. - - - - 3648

op.3 Linearization (1 to -1,999.000 to 2.0 Instance 1 0x86 162 34020 float

op.3 2) 9,999.000 Map 1 Map 2 (134) RWES
Output Point 3 - - - - 3598 1 to 2
Set the value that Instance 2 0x14
will be mapped to Map 1 Map 2 (20)
input 3. - - - - 3668

ip.4 Linearization (1 to -1,999.000 to 3.0 Instance 1 0x86 163 34011 float

ip.4 2) 9,999.000 Map 1 Map 2 (134) RWES
Input Point 4 - - - - 3580 1 to 2
Set the value that Instance 2 0xB (11)
will be mapped to Map 1 Map 2
output 4. - - - - 3651

op.4 Linearization (1 to -1,999.000 to 3.0 Instance 1 0x86 164 34021 float

op.4 2) 9,999.000 Map 1 Map 2 (134) RWES
Output Point 4 - - - - 3600 1 to 2
Set the value that Instance 2 0x15
will be mapped to Map 1 Map 2 (21)
input 4. - - - - 3670

ip.5 Linearization (1 to -1,999.000 to 4.0 Instance 1 0x86 165 34012 float

ip.5 2) 9,999.000 Map 1 Map 2 (134) RWES
Input Point 5 - - - - 3582 1 to 2
Set the value that Instance 2 0xC (12)
will be mapped to Map 1 Map 2
output 5. - - - - 3652

op.5 Linearization (1 to -1,999.000 to 4.0 Instance 1 0x86 166 34022 float

op.5 2) 9,999.000 Map 1 Map 2 (134) RWES
Output Point 5 - - - - 3602 1 to 2
Set the value that Instance 2 0x16
will be mapped to Map 1 Map 2 (22)
input 5. - - - - 3672

ip.6 Linearization (1 to -1,999.000 to 5.0 Instance 1 0x86 167 34013 float

ip.6 2) 9,999.000 Map 1 Map 2 (134) RWES
Input Point 6 - - - - 3584 1 to 2
Set the value that Instance 2 0xD (13)
will be mapped to Map 1 Map 2
output 6. - - - - 3654
* These parameters/prompts are available in these menus with firmware revisions 11.0 and above.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 96 • Cha pte r 6 Se tup Pa g e

 Setup Page
CIP - Data
Modbus Class Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance fibus eter and
Description
dress Attribute Index ID Access
hex (dec) **
op.6 Linearization (1 to -1,999.000 to 5.0 Instance 1 0x86 168 34023 float
op.6 2) 9,999.000 Map 1 Map 2 (134) RWES
Output Point 6 - - - - 3604 1 to 2
Set the value that Instance 2 0x17
will be mapped to Map 1 Map 2 (23)
input 6. - - - - 3674

ip.7 Linearization (1 to -1,999.000 to 6.0 Instance 1 0x86 169 34014 float

ip.7 2) 9,999.000 Map 1 Map 2 (134) RWES
Input Point 7 - - - - 3586 1 to 2
Set the value that Instance 2 E (14)
will be mapped to Map 1 Map 2
output 7. - - - - 3656

op.7 Linearization (1 to -1,999.000 to 6.0 Instance 1 0x86 170 34024 float

op.7 2) 9,999.000 Map 1 Map 2 (134) RWES
Output Point 7 - - - - 3606 1 to 2
Set the value that Instance 2 0x18
will be mapped to Map 1 Map 2 (24)
input 7. - - - - 3676

ip.8 Linearization (1 to -1,999.000 to 7.0 Instance 1 0x86 171 34015 float

ip.8 2) 9,999.000 Map 1 Map 2 (134) RWES
Input Point 8 - - - - 3588 1 to 2
Set the value that Instance 2 0xF (15)
will be mapped to Map 1 Map 2
output 8. - - - - 3658

op.8 Linearization (1 to -1,999.000 to 7.0 Instance 1 0x86 172 34025 float

op.8 2) 9,999.000 Map 1 Map 2 (134) RWES
Output Point 8 - - - - 3608 1 to 2
Set the value that Instance 2 0x19
will be mapped to Map 1 Map 2 (25)
input 8. - - - - 3678

ip.q Linearization (1 to -1,999.000 to 8.0 Instance 1 0x86 173 34016 float

ip.9 2) 9,999.000 Map 1 Map 2 (134) RWES
Input Point 9 - - - - 3590 1 to 2
Set the value that Instance 2 0x10
will be mapped to Map 1 Map 2 (16)
output 9. - - - - 3660

op.q Linearization (1 to -1,999.000 to 8.0 Instance 1 0x86 174 34026 float

op.9 2) 9,999.000 Map 1 Map 2 (134) RWES
Output Point 9 - - - - 3610 1 to 2
Set the value that Instance 2 0x1A
will be mapped to Map 1 Map 2 (26)
input 9. - - - - 3680
* These parameters/prompts are available in these menus with firmware revisions 11.0 and above.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 97 • Cha pte r 6 Se tu p Pa g e

 Setup Page
CIP - Data
Modbus Class Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance fibus eter and
Description
dress Attribute Index ID Access
hex (dec) **
ip.10 Linearization (1 to -1,999.000 to 9.0 Instance 1 0x86 175 34017 float
ip.10 2) 9,999.000 Map 1 Map 2 (134) RWES
Input Point 10 - - - - 3592 1 to 2
Set the value that Instance 2 0x11
will be mapped to Map 1 Map 2 (17)
output 10. - - - - 3662

op.10 Linearization (1 to -1,999.000 to 9.0 Instance 1 0x86 176 34027 float

op.10 2) 9,999.000 Map 1 Map 2 (134) RWES
Output Point 10 - - - - 3612 1 to 2
Set the value that Instance 2 0x1B
will be mapped to Map 1 Map 2 (27)
input 10. - - - - 3682

Pu
sEt
Process Value Menu
fn Process Value (1 to off Off (62) Off Instance 1 0x7E 123 26021 uint
Fn 2) aLt Pressure to Alti- Map 1 Map 2 (126) RWES
Function - - - - 3320 1 to 2
tude (1649)***
Set the function Instance 2 0x15
that will be applied root Square Root Map 1 Map 2 (21)
to the source or (1380)
- - - - 3390
sources. diff Differential
(1373)
Note: rati Ratio (1374)
Differential and
Ratio not available
ФІ.b Wet Bulb Dry
using instance 2. Bulb (1369)
vsLa Vaisala (1648)
s.ba Sensor Backup
(1201)

p.unt Process Value (1 to psi Pounds per PSI Instance 1 0x7E ---- 26028 uint
P.unt 2) Square Inch (1671) Map 1 Map 2 (126) RWES
Pressure Units*** pasc Pascal (1674) - - - - 3334 1 to 2
If Process Value Instance 2 0x1C
function is set for
atЛЏ Atmosphere (28)
(1675) Map 1 Map 2
Pressure to Altitude - - - - 3404
units, define units ЛЏbr Millibar (1672)
of measure for con- torr Torr (1673)
version.
* These parameters/prompts are available in these menus with firmware revisions 11.0 and above.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 98 • Cha pte r 6 Se tup Pa g e

 Setup Page
CIP - Data
Modbus Class Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance fibus eter and
Description
dress Attribute Index ID Access
hex (dec) **
a.unt Process Value (1 to Hft Kilofeet (1677) HFt Instance 1 0x7E ---- 26029 uint
A.unt 2) ft Feet (1676) Map 1 Map 2 (126) RWES
Altitude Units*** - - - - 3336 1 to 2
If Process Value Instance 2 0x1D
function is set for Map 1 Map 2 (29)
Pressure to Altitude - - - - 3406
units, define units
of measure for con-
version.
*** Pressure Altitude calculation is based on the International Standard Atmosphere 1976

b.pr Process Value (1 to 10.0 to 16.0 14.7 Instance 1 0x7E ---- 26030 float
b.Pr 2) Map 1 Map 2 (126) RWES
Barometric Pres- - - - - 3338 1 to 2
sure*** Instance 2 0x1E
If Process Value Map 1 Map 2 (30)
function is set for - - - - 3408
Wet Bulb / Dry
Bulb, define pres-
sure value used for
humidity calcula-
tion.

fiL Process Value (1 to 0.0 to 60.0 seconds 0.0 Instance 1 0x7E ---- 26026 float
FiL 2) Map 1 Map 2 (126) RWES
Filter - - - - 3330 1 to 2
Filtering smooths Instance 2 0x1A
out the output sig- Map 1 Map 2 (26)
nal of this function - - - - 3400
block. Increase the
time to increase
filtering.
*** Pressure Altitude calculation is based on the International Standard Atmosphere 1976

dio
sEt
Digital Input/Output Menu
dir Digital Input/Output Otpt Output (68) Output Instance 5 0x6A 82 6001 uint
dir (5 to 12) in Input Voltage Map 1 Map 2 (106) RWES
Direction (193) 1000 1120 5 to 12
Set this function to 1
operate as an input
iCon Input Dry Con- Offset to
tact (44)
or output. next instance
Note: (Map 1
Modbus Map 1 & Map 2)
has instances 5 equals +30
through 8 only
* These parameters/prompts are available in these menus with firmware revisions 11.0 and above.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 99 • Cha pte r 6 Se tu p Pa g e

 Setup Page
CIP - Data
Modbus Class Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance fibus eter and
Description
dress Attribute Index ID Access
hex (dec) **
fn Digital Output (5 to off Off (62) Off Instance 5 0x 6A 83 6005 uint
Fn 12) aLЛЏ Alarm (6) Map 1 Map 2 (106) RWES
Function 1008 1128 5 to 12
hEat Heat (36)
Select what func- 5
tion will drive this CooL Cool (20) Offset to
output. sof.1 Special Func- next instance
tion Output 1 (1532) (Map 1 & Map
Note:
Modbus Map 1
sof.2 Special Func- 2) equals +30
tion Output 2 (1533)
has instances 5
through 8 only tE.o1 Timer Event
Output 1 (1951)
tE.o2 Timer Event
Output 2 (1952)
tE.o3 Timer Event
Output 3 (1953)
Ent.a Profile Event
Out A (233)
Ent.b Profile Event
Out B (234)
h.Er Heater Error
(184)

fi Digital Output (5 to 1 to 4 1 Instance 5 0x6A 84 6006 uint

Fi 12) Map 1 Map 2 (106) RWES
Function Instance 1010 1130 5 to 12
Set the instance 6
of the function se- Offset to
lected above. next instance
Note: (Map 1 & Map
Modbus Map 1 2) equals +30
has instances 5
through 8 only

o.Ct Digital Output (5 to ftb Fixed Time Base Fixed Instance 5 0x6A 85 6002 uint
o.Ct 12) (34) Time Map 1 Map 2 (106) RWES
Time Base Type vtb Variable Time Base 1002 1122 5 to 12
Set the time base Base (103) 2
type. This param- Offset to
eter is only used next instance
with PID control, (Map 1 & Map
but can be set any- 2) equals +30
time.
Note:
Modbus Map 1
has instances 5
through 8 only
* These parameters/prompts are available in these menus with firmware revisions 11.0 and above.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

** These prompts are only available in this menu with firmware revision 11.0 and above.
Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 100 • Cha pte r 6 Se tup Pa g e
 Setup Page
CIP - Data
Modbus Class Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance fibus eter and
Description
dress Attribute Index ID Access
hex (dec) **
o.tb Digital Output (5 to 0.1 to 60.0 seconds 1.0 Instance 5 0x6A 86 6003 float
o.tb 12) Map 1 Map 2 (106) RWES
Fixed Time Base 1004 1124 5 to 12
Set the time base 3
for fixed-time-base Offset to
control. next instance
Note: (Map 1 & Map
Modbus Map 1 2) equals +30
has instances 5
through 8 only

o.Lo Digital Output (5 to 0.0 to 100.0 0.0 Instance 5 0x6A 87 6009 float
o.Lo 12) Map 1 Map 2 (106) RWES
Low Power Scale 1016 1136 5 to 12
The power output 9
will never be less Offset to
than the value next instance
specified and will (Map 1 & Map
represent the value 2) equals +30
at which output
scaling begins.

o.hi Digital Output (5 to 0.0 to 100.0 100.0 Instance 5 0x6A 88 6010 float
o.hi 12) Map 1 Map 2 (106) RWES
High Power Scale 1018 1138 5 to 12
The power output A (10)
will never be great- Offset to
er than the value next instance
specified and will (Map 1 & Map
represent the value 2) equals +30
at which output
scaling stops.

LEu Digital Input (5 to 6) high High (37) High Instance 5 0x6E 137 10001 uint
LEv Active Level LoФІ Low (53) Map 1 Map 2 (110) RW
Select which action 1320 1560 5 to 6
will be interpreted 1
as a true state. Offset to
next instance
(Map 1 & Map
2) equals +20

* These parameters/prompts are available in these menus with firmware revisions 11.0 and above.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 101 • Cha pte r 6 Se tu p Pa g e

 Setup Page
CIP - Data
Modbus Class Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance fibus eter and
Description
dress Attribute Index ID Access
hex (dec) **
LEu Digital Input (7 to high High (37) High Instance 7 0x6E 137 10001 uint
LEv 12) LoФІ Low (53) Map 1 Map 2 (110) RW
Active Level 1400 1640 7 to C
Select which action (12)
will be interpreted Offset to 1
as a true state. next instance
Note: Map 2 equals
Modbus Map 1 has +20
instances 7 and 8
only
* These parameters/prompts are available in these menus with firmware revisions 11.0 and above.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 102 • Cha pte r 6 Se tup Pa g e

 Setup Page
CIP - Data
Modbus Class Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance fibus eter and
Description
dress Attribute Index ID Access
hex (dec) **
Fn Digital Input (5 to 6) nonE None (61) None Instance 5 0x6E 138 10003 uint
Fn Action Function s.stp Start Step Map 1 Map 2 (110) RWES
Select the func- (1077) 1324 1564 5 to 6
tion that will be P.StS Profile Start/ 3
triggered by a true Stop, level triggered Offset to
state for Digital In- (208) next instance
puts 5 to 6. ProF Start Profile, (Map 1 & Map
edge triggered (196) 2) equals +20
P.hoL Profile Hold/Re-
sume, level triggered
(207)
P.diS Profile Disable,
level triggered (206)
t.da TRU-TUNE+® Dis-
able, level triggered
(219)
oFF Switch Control
Loop Off, level trig-
gered (90)
ЛЏAn Manual, level
triggered (54)
tUnE Tune, edge trig-
gered (98)
idLE Idle Set Point,
level triggered (107)
F.AL Force Alarm to
occur, level triggered
(218)
AoF Control Loops Off
and Alarms to Non-
alarm State, level
triggered (220)
SiL Silence Alarms,
edge triggered (108)
ALЛЏ Alarm Reset,
edge triggered (6)
P.LoC Keypad Lock-
out, level triggered
(217)
usr.r User Set Re-
store, edge triggered
(227)
LЛЏr Limit Reset,
edge triggered (82)
r.En Remote Set Point
enable (216)
* These parameters/prompts are available in these menus with firmware revisions 11.0 and above.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 103 • Cha pte r 6 Se tu p Pa g e

 Setup Page
CIP - Data
Modbus Class Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance fibus eter and
Description
dress Attribute Index ID Access
hex (dec) **
Fn Digital Input (7 to nonE None (61) None Instance 7 0x6E 138 10003 uint
Fn 12) s.stp Start Step Map 1 Map 2 (110) RWES
Action Function (1077) 1404 1644 7 to C
Select the func- P.StS Profile Start/ (12)
tion that will be Stop, level triggered Offset to 3
triggered by a true (208) next instance
state for Digital In- ProF Start Profile, (Map 1 & Map
puts 7 through 12. edge triggered (196) 2) equals +20
P.hoL Profile Hold/Re-
Note: sume, level triggered
Modbus Map 1 (207)
has instances 7 P.diS Profile Disable,
through 10 only level triggered (206)
t.da TRU-TUNE+® Dis-
able, level triggered
(219)
oFF Switch Control
Loop Off, level trig-
gered (90)
ЛЏAn Manual, level
triggered (54)
tUnE Tune, edge trig-
gered (98)
idLE Idle Set Point,
level triggered (107)
F.AL Force Alarm to
occur, level triggered
(218)
AoF Control Loops Off
and Alarms to Non-
alarm State, level
triggered (220)
SiL Silence Alarms,
edge triggered (108)
ALЛЏ Alarm Reset,
edge triggered (6)
P.LoC Keypad Lock-
out, level triggered
(217)
usr.r User Set Re-
store, edge triggered
(227)
LЛЏr Limit Reset,
edge triggered (82)
r.En Remote Set Point
enable (216)
* These parameters/prompts are available in these menus with firmware revisions 11.0 and above.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 104 • Cha pte r 6 Se tup Pa g e

 Setup Page
CIP - Data
Modbus Class Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance fibus eter and
Description
dress Attribute Index ID Access
hex (dec) **
Fi Digital Input (5 to 6) 0 to 4 0 Instance 5 0x6E 139 10004 uint
Fi Function Instance Map 1 Map 2 (110) RWES
Select which Digital 1326 1566 5 to 6
Input will be trig- 4
gered by a true Offset to
state. next instance
(Map 1 & Map
2) equals +20

Fi Digital Input (7 to 0 to 4 0 Instance 7 0x6E 139 10004 uint

Fi 12) Map 1 Map 2 (110) RWES
Function Instance 1406 1646 7 to C
Select which Digital (12)
Input will be trig- Offset to 4
gered by a true next instance
state. (Map 1 & Map
2) equals +20
Note:
Modbus Map 1 has
instances 7 through
10 only

LiЛЏ
sEt
Limit Menu
L.sd Limit (1) both Both (13) Both Instance 1 0x70 40 12005 uint
L.Sd Sides high High (37) Map 1 Map 2 (112) RWES
Select which side or LoФІ Low (53) 688 728 1
sides of the process 5
value will be moni-
tored.

L.hy Limit (1) 0.001 to 9,999.000°F 3.0°F or Instance 1 0x70 41 12002 float
L.hy Hysteresis or units units Map 1 Map 2 (112) RWES
Set the hysteresis 0.001 to 5,555.000°C 2.0°C 682 722 1
for the limit func- 2
tion. This deter-
mines how far into
the safe range the
process value must
move before the
limit can be cleared.

sp.Lh Limit (1) -1,999.000 to 9,999.000 Instance 1 0x70 42 12009 float

SP.Lh Maximum Set Point 9,999.000 Map 1 Map 2 (112) RWES
Set the high end of 696 736 1
the limit set point 9
range.
* These parameters/prompts are available in these menus with firmware revisions 11.0 and above.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 105 • Cha pte r 6 Se tu p Pa g e

 Setup Page
CIP - Data
Modbus Class Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance fibus eter and
Description
dress Attribute Index ID Access
hex (dec) **
sp.LL Limit (1) -1,999.000 to -1,999.000 Instance 1 0x70 43 12010 float
SP.LL Minimum Set Point 9,999.000 Map 1 Map 2 (112) RWES
Set the low end of 698 738 1
the limit set point 0xA (10)
range.

Lh.s Limit (1) -1,999.000 to 0.0°F or Instance 1 0x70 39 12004 float

Lh.S High Limit Set 9,999.000°F or units units Map 1 Map 2 (112) RWES
Point * -1,128.000 to -18.0°C 686 726 1
Set the high process 5,537.000°C 4
value that will trig-
ger the limit.
LL.s Limit (1 ) -1,999.000 to 0.0°F or Instance 1 0x70 38 12003 float
LL.S Low Limit Set 9,999.000°F or units units Map 1 Map 2 (112) RWES
Point * -1,128.000 to -18.0°C 684 724 1
Set the low process 5,537.000°C 3
value that will trig-
ger the limit.
sfn.a Limit (1) nonE None (61) None Instance 1 0x70 ---- 12015 uint
SFn.A Source Function A * dio Digital I/O (1142) Map 1 Map 2 (112) RWES
Set the source for fUn Function Key - - - - 748 1
the limit reset func- (1001) 0x0F
tion. (15)

si.a Limit (1) 1 to 12 1 ---- 0x70 ---- 12016 uint

Si.A Source Instance A * (112) RWES
Set the instance of 1
the function select- 0x10
ed above. (16)

L.Cr Limit (1) CLr Clear (0) ---- Instance 1 0x70 ---- 12014 uint
LCr Clear Limit * ignr Ignore (204) Map 1 Map 2 (112) W
Clear limit once 680 720 1
limit condition is 1
safe.
L.st Limit (1) faiL Fail (32) ---- Instance 1 0x70 ---- 12013 uint
L.St Limit Status * safE Safe (1667) Map 1 Map 2 (112) R
Reflects whether - - - - 744 1
or not the limit is 0x0D
in a safe or failed (13)
mode.
* These parameters/prompts are available in these menus with firmware revisions 11.0 and above.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 106 • Cha pte r 6 Se tup Pa g e

 Setup Page
CIP - Data
Modbus Class Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance fibus eter and
Description
dress Attribute Index ID Access
hex (dec) **
L.it Limit (1) no No (59) No Instance 1 0x70 ---- 12008 uint
L.it Integrate with Sys- yES Yes (106) Map 1 Map 2 (112) RWES
tem 694 734 1
In a limit state the 8
controller will turn
off the outputs,
terminate an ac-
tive profile and
freeze PID and
TRU-TUNE+® calcu-
lations.
No Limit (1) off Off (62) ---- Instance 1 0x70 ---- 12006 uint
Dis- Limit State nonE None (61) Map 1 Map 2 (112) R
play Clear limit once Li.h Limit High (51) 690 730 1
limit condition is Li.l Limit Low (52) 6
cleared. Err Error (28)
Loop
sEt
Control Loop Menu
h.ag Control Loop (1 to off Off (62) PID Instance 1 0x97 72 8003 uint
h.Ag 2) pid PID (71) Map 1 Map 2 (151) RWES
Heat Algorithm on.of On-Off (64) 1884 2364 1 to 2
Set the heat con- Instance 2 3
trol method. Map 1 Map 2
1954 2434

C.ag Control Loop (1 to off Off (62) Off Instance 1 0x97 73 8004 uint
C.Ag 2) pid PID (71) Map 1 Map 2 (151) RWES
Cool Algorithm on.of On-Off (64) 1886 2366 1 to 2
Set the cool control Instance 2 4
method. Map 1 Map 2
1956 2436

C.Cr Control Loop (1 to off Off (62) Off Instance 1 0x97 ---- 8038 uint
C.Cr 2) Cr.a Non-linear Curve Map 1 Map 2 (151) RWES
Cool Output Curve 1 (214) 1888 2368 1 to 2
Select a cool Cr.b Non-linear Curve Instance 2 5
output curve to 2 (215) Map 1 Map 2
change the re- 1958 2438
sponsiveness of
the system.
* These parameters/prompts are available in these menus with firmware revisions 11.0 and above.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 107 • Cha pte r 6 Se tu p Pa g e

 Setup Page
CIP - Data
Modbus Class Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance fibus eter and
Description
dress Attribute Index ID Access
hex (dec) **
h.pb Control Loop (1 to 0.001 to 9,999.000°F 25.0°F Instance 1 0x97 65 8009 float
h.Pb 2) or units or units Map 1 Map 2 (151) RWES
Heat Proportional 0.001 to 5,555.000°C 14.0°C 1890 2370 1 to 2
Band * Instance 2 6
Set the PID pro- Map 1 Map 2
portional band for 1960 2440
the heat outputs.
h.hy Control Loop (1 to 0.001 to 9,999.000°F 3.0°F or Instance 1 0x97 66 8010 float
h.hy 2) or units units Map 1 Map 2 (151) RWES
On / Off Heat Hys- 0.001 to 5,555.000°C 2.0°C 1900 2380 1 to 2
teresis * Instance 2 0xB (11)
Set the control Map 1 Map 2
switching hyster- 1970 2450
esis for on-off con-
trol. This deter-
mines how far into
the “on” region
the process value
needs to move
before the output
turns on.
C.pb Control Loop (1 to 0.001 to 9,999.000°F 25.0°F Instance 1 0x97 67 8012 float
C.Pb 2) or units or units Map 1 Map 2 (151) RWES
Cool Proportional 0.001 to 5,555.000°C 14.0°C 1892 2372 1 to 2
Band * Instance 2 7
Set the PID pro- Map 1 Map 2
portional band for 1962 2442
the cool outputs.

C.hy Control Loop (1 to 0.001 to 9,999.000°F 3.0°F or Instance 1 0x97 68 8013 float
C.hy 2) or units units Map 1 Map 2 (151) RWES
On/Off Cool Hys- 0.001 to 5,555.000°C 2.0°C 1902 2382 1 to 2
teresis * Instance 2 0xC
Set the control Map 1 Map 2 (12)
switching hyster- 1972 2522
esis for on-off con-
trol. This deter-
mines how far into
the “on” region
the process value
needs to move
before the output
turns on.
* These parameters/prompts are available in these menus with firmware revisions 11.0 and above.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 108 • Cha pte r 6 Se tup Pa g e

 Setup Page
CIP - Data
Modbus Class Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance fibus eter and
Description
dress Attribute Index ID Access
hex (dec) **
ti Control Loop (1 to 0 to 9,999 seconds 180 sec- Instance 1 0x97 69 8006 float
ti 2) per repeat onds per Map 1 Map 2 (151) RWES
Time Integral * repeat 1894 2374 1 to 2
Set the PID inte- Instance 2 8
gral for the out- Map 1 Map 2
puts. 1964 2444

td Control Loop (1 to 0 to 9,999 seconds 0 Instance 1 0x97 70 8007 float

td 2) seconds Map 1 Map 2 (151) RWES
Time Derivative * 1896 2376 1 to 2
Set the PID deriva- Instance 2 9
tive time for the Map 1 Map 2
outputs. 1966 2446

db Control Loop (1 to -1,000.0 to 1,000.0°F 0.0 Instance 1 0x97 71 8008 float

db 2) or units Map 1 Map 2 (151) RWES
Dead Band * -556 to 556°C 1898 2378 1 to 2
Set the offset to Instance 2 0xA (10)
the proportional Map 1 Map 2
band. With a nega- 1968 2448
tive value, both
heating and cool-
ing outputs are
active when the
process value is
near the set point.
A positive value
keeps heating and
cooling outputs
from fighting each
other.
t.tUn Control Loop (1 to no No (59) No Instance 1 0x97 - - - - 8022 uint
t.tUn 2) yEs Yes (106) Map 1 Map 2 (151) RWES
TRU-TUNE+® En- 1910 2390 1 to 2
able Instance 2 10 (16)
Enable or disable Map 1 Map 2
the TRU-TUNE+ 1980 2460
adaptive tuning
feature.
* These parameters/prompts are available in these menus with firmware revisions 11.0 and above.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 109 • Cha pte r 6 Se tu p Pa g e

 Setup Page
CIP - Data
Modbus Class Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance fibus eter and
Description
dress Attribute Index ID Access
hex (dec) **
t.bnd Control Loop (1 to 0 to 100 0 Instance 1 0x97 ---- 8034 uint
t.bnd 2) Map 1 Map 2 (151) RWES
TRU-TUNE+ Band 1912 2392 1 to 2
Set the range, cen- Instance 2 0x11
tered on the set Map 1 Map 2 (17)
point, within which 1982 2462
TRU-TUNE+ will be
in effect. Use this
function only if the
controller is unable
to adaptive tune
automatically.

t.gn Control Loop (1 to 1 to 6 3 Instance 1 0x97 ---- 8035 uint

t.gn 2) Map 1 Map 2 (151) RWES
TRU-TUNE+ Gain 1914 2394 1 to 2
Select the re- Instance 2 0x12
sponsiveness of Map 1 Map 2 (18)
the TRU-TUNE+ 1984 2464
adaptive tuning
calculations. More
responsiveness may
increase overshoot.

a.tsp Control Loop (1 to 50.0 to 200.0% 90.0 Instance 1 0x97 ---- 8025 float
A.tSP 2) Map 1 Map 2 (151) RWES
Autotune Set Point 1918 2398 1 to 2
* Instance 2 0x14
Set the set point Map 1 Map 2 (20)
that the autotune 1988 2468
will use, as a per-
centage of the
current set point.
t.agr Control Loop (1 to Undr Under damped Critical Instance 1 0x97 ---- 8024 uint
t.Agr 2) (99) Map 1 Map 2 (151) RWES
Autotune Aggres- Crit Critical damped 1916 2396 1 to 2
siveness (21) Instance 2 0x13
Select the aggres- ovEr Over damped Map 1 Map 2 (19)
siveness of the (69) 1986 2466
autotuning calcula-
tions.
* These parameters/prompts are available in these menus with firmware revisions 11.0 and above.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 110 • Cha pte r 6 Se tup Pa g e

 Setup Page
CIP - Data
Modbus Class Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance fibus eter and
Description
dress Attribute Index ID Access
hex (dec) **
p.dL Control Loop (1 to 0.0 to 5.0 seconds 0.0 Instance 1 0x97 ---- 8051 float
P.dL 2) Map 1 Map 2 (151) RWES
Peltier Delay 1934 2414 1 to 2
Set a value that Instance 2 0x1C
will cause a de- Map 1 Map 2 (28)
lay when switch- 2004 2484
ing from heat PID
mode to cool PID
mode.

r.En Control Loop (1 to no No (59) No Instance 1 0x6B 48 7021 uint

r.En 2) yEs Yes (106) Map 1 Map 2 (107) RWES
Remote Set Point 2200 2680 1 to 2
Enable Instance 2 0x15
Set whether this Map 1 Map 2 (21)
loop will use a re- 2280 2760
mote set point.

r.ty Control Loop (1 to aUto Auto (10) Auto Instance 1 0x6B ---- 7022 uint
r.ty 2) ЛЏan Manual (54) Map 1 Map 2 (107) RWES
Remote Set Point 2202 2682 1 to 2
Type Instance 2 0x16
Set what type of Map 1 Map 2 (22)
set point will be 2282 2762
used.

Ufa Control Loop (1 to off Off, sets output User Instance 1 0x6B - - - - 7012 uint
UFA 2) power to 0% (62) Map 1 Map 2 (107) RWES
Auto-to-Manual bpLs Bumpless trans- 2182 2662 1 to 2
Power fer, maintains same Instance 2 0xC (12)
Select what the output power, if it was Map 1 Map 2
controller out- less than 75% and sta- 2262 2742
puts will do when ble, otherwise 0% (14)
the user switches ЛЏan Fixed Power,
control to manual sets output power to
mode. Fixed Power setting
(54)
UsEr User, sets
output power to last
open-loop set point
the user entered (100)
* These parameters/prompts are available in these menus with firmware revisions 11.0 and above.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 111 • Cha pte r 6 Se tu p Pa g e

 Setup Page
CIP - Data
Modbus Class Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance fibus eter and
Description
dress Attribute Index ID Access
hex (dec) **
faiL Control Loop (1 to off Off, sets output User Instance 1 0x6B - - - - 7013 uint
FAiL 2) power to 0% (62) Map 1 Map 2 (107) RWES
Input Error Power bpLs Bumpless trans- 2184 2664 1 to 2
Select what the fer, maintains same Instance 2 0xD (13)
controller outputs output power, if it was Map 1 Map 2
will do when an in- less than 75% and sta- 2264 2744
put error switches ble, otherwise 0% (14)
control to manual ЛЏan Fixed Power,
mode. sets output power to
Fixed Power setting
(54)
UsEr User, sets
output power to last
open-loop set point
the user entered (100)

ЛЏan Control Loop (1 to Set Point Open Loop 0.0 Instance 1 0x6B - - - - 7011 float
MAn 2) Limit Low to Set Point Map 1 Map 2 (107) RWES
Fixed Power Open Loop Limit High 2180 2660 1 to 2
Set the manual (Setup Page) Instance 2 0xB (11)
output power level Map 1 Map 2
that will take ef- 2260 2740
fect if an input er-
ror failure occurs
while User Failure
Action is set to
Fixed Power.

L.dE Control Loop (1 to no No (59) No Instance 1 0x97 74 8039 uint

L.dE 2) yEs Yes (106) Map 1 Map 2 (151) RWES
Open Loop Detect 1922 2402 1 to 2
Enable Instance 2 0x16
Select Yes to de- Map 1 Map 2 (22)
tect conditions that 1992 2472
prevent the pro-
cess from changing
in specified time
frame by a speci-
fied amount when
PID power is at
100%. An open loop
detect error will
disable the control
loop.
* These parameters/prompts are available in these menus with firmware revisions 11.0 and above.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 112 • Cha pte r 6 Se tup Pa g e

 Setup Page
CIP - Data
Modbus Class Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance fibus eter and
Description
dress Attribute Index ID Access
hex (dec) **
L.dt Control Loop (1 to 0 to 3,600 seconds 240 Instance 1 0x97 75 8040 uint
L.dt 2) Map 1 Map 2 (151) RWES
Open Loop Detect 1924 2404 1 to 2
Time Instance 2 0x17
Process must devi- Map 1 Map 2 (23)
ate by the Open 1994 2474
Loop. Detect De-
viation value in
this specified time
while at 100% PID
to prevent an open
loop error.

L.dd Control Loop (1 to -1,999.000 to 10.0°F or Instance 1 0x97 76 8041 float

L.dd 2) 9,999.000°F or units units Map 1 Map 2 (151) RWES
Open Loop Detect -1,110.555 to 6.0°C 1926 2406 1 to 2
Deviation 5,555.000°C Instance 2 0x18
Process must devi- Map 1 Map 2 (24)
ate by this value 1996 2476
in the Open Loop
Detect Time while
at 100% PID power
to prevent an open
loop error.

rp Control Loop (1 to off Off (62) Off Instance 1 0x6B 56 7014 uint
rP 2) str Startup (88) Map 1 Map 2 (107) RWES
Ramp Action stpt Set Point 2186 2666 1 to 2
Select when the Change (85) Instance 2 0xE (14)
controller's set Map 1 Map 2
both Both (13)
point will ramp to 2266 2746
the defined end set
point.

r.sC Control Loop (1 to hoUr Hours (39) Minutes Instance 1 0x6B 57 7015 uint
r.SC 2) ЛЏin Minutes (57) Map 1 Map 2 (107) RWES
Ramp Scale 2188 2668 1 to 2
Select the scale of Instance 2 0xF (15)
the ramp rate. Map 1 Map 2
2268 2748

r.rt Control Loop (1 to 0.0 to 9,999.000°F or 1.0°F or Instance 1 0x6B 58 7017 float
r.rt 2) units units Map 1 Map 2 (107) RWES
Ramp Rate 0.0 to 5,555.000°C 1.0°C 2192 2672 1 to 2
Set the rate for the Instance 2 0x11
set point ramp. Set Map 1 Map 2 (17)
the time units for 2272 2752
the rate with the
Ramp Scale param-
eter.
* These parameters/prompts are available in these menus with firmware revisions 11.0 and above.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 113 • Cha pte r 6 Se tu p Pa g e

 Setup Page
CIP - Data
Modbus Class Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance fibus eter and
Description
dress Attribute Index ID Access
hex (dec) **
L.sp Control Loop (1 to -1,999.000 to -1,999°F Instance 1 0x6B 52 7003 float
L.SP 2) 9,999.000°F or units or units Map 1 Map 2 (107) RWES
Minimum Set Point -1,128.000 to -1,128°C 2164 2644 1 to 2
Set the minimum 5,537.000°C Instance 2 3
value of the closed Map 1 Map 2
loop set point 2244 2724
range.

h.sp Control Loop (1 to -1,999.000 to 9,999°F Instance 1 0x6B 53 7004 float

h.SP 2) 9,999.000°F or units or units Map 1 Map 2 (107) RWES
Maximum Set Point -1,128.000 to 5,537°C 2166 2646 1 to 2
Set the maximum 5,537.000°C Instance 2 4
value of the closed Map 1 Map 2
loop set point 2246 2726
range.

C.sp Control Loop (1 to -1,999.000 to 75.0°F Instance 1 0x6B 49 7001 float

C.SP 2) 9,999.000°F or units or units Map 1 Map 2 (107) RWES
Set Point * -1,128.000 to 24.0°C 2160 2640 1 to 2
Set the set point 5,537.000°C Instance 2 1
that the controller Map 1 Map 2
will automatically 2240 2720
control to.
id.s Control Loop (1 to -1,999.000 to 75.0°F Instance 1 0x6B 50 7009 float
id.S 2) 9,999.000°F or units or units Map 1 Map 2 (107) RWES
Idle Set Point * -1,128.000 to 24.0°C 2176 2656 1 to 2
Set a closed loop 5,537.000°C Instance 2 9
set point that can Map 1 Map 2
be triggered by an 2197 2736
event state.

sp.Lo Control Loop (1 to -100.0 to 100.0% -100 Instance 1 0x6B 54 7005 float
SP.Lo 2) Map 1 Map 2 (107) RWES
Minimum Manual 2168 2648 1 to 2
Power Instance 2 5
Set the minimum Map 1 Map 2
value of the open- 2248 2728
loop set point
range.

sp.hi Control Loop (1 to -100.0 to 100.0% 100 Instance 1 0x6B 55 7006 float
SP.hi 2) Map 1 Map 2 (107) RWES
Maximum Manual 2170 2650 1 to 2
Power Instance 2 6
Set the maximum Map 1 Map 2
value of the open- 2250 2730
loop set point
range.
* These parameters/prompts are available in these menus with firmware revisions 11.0 and above.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 114 • Cha pte r 6 Se tup Pa g e

 Setup Page
CIP - Data
Modbus Class Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance fibus eter and
Description
dress Attribute Index ID Access
hex (dec) **
o.sp Control Loop (1 to -100.0 to 100.0% 0.0 Instance 1 0x6B 51 7002 float
o.SP 2) (heat and cool) 0 to Map 1 Map 2 (107) RWES
Manual Power * 100.0% (heat only) 2162 2642 1 to 2
Set a fixed level -100.0 to 0% (cool Instance 2 2
of output power only) Map 1 Map 2
when in manual 2242 2722
(open-loop) mode.

C.ЛЏ Control Loop (1 to off Off (62) Auto Instance 1 0x97 63 8001 uint
C.M 2) aUto Auto (10) Map 1 Map 2 (151) RWES
Control Mode * ЛЏan Manual (54) 1880 2360 1 to 2
Select the method Instance 2 1
that this loop will Map 1 Map 2
use to control. 1950 2430

otpt
SEt
Output Menu
Fn Output Digital (1 oFF Off (62) Output 1 Instance 1 0x6A 83 6005 uint
Fn to 4) ALЛЏ Alarm (6) - Heat Map 1 Map 2 (106) RWES
Function hEat Heat (36) Output 2 888 1008 1 to 4
Select what func- Cool Cool (20) - Alarm 5
tion will drive this Output 3
SoF.1 Special Func- Offset to
output. tion Output 1 (1532) - Off next instance
Note: SoF.2 Special Func- Output 4 (Map 1 & Map
Output 4 is always tion Output 2 (1533) - Off 2) equals +30
a limit when limit tE.o1 Timer Event 1
is present. Use as (1951)
primary limit con- tE.o2 Timer Event 2
nection. (1952)
tE.o3 Timer Event 3
(1953)
Ent.A Profile Event
Out A (233)
Ent.b Profile Event
Out B (234)
LiЛЏ Limit (126)
Fi Output Digital (1 1 to 4 1 Instance 1 0x6A 84 6006 uint
Fi to 4) Map 1 Map 2 (106) RWES
Function Instance 890 1010 1 to 4
Set the instance of 6
the function select- Offset to
ed above. next in-
stance (Map
1 & Map 2)
equals +30

* These parameters/prompts are available in these menus with firmware revisions 11.0 and above.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 115 • Cha pte r 6 Se tu p Pa g e

 Setup Page
CIP - Data
Modbus Class Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance fibus eter and
Description
dress Attribute Index ID Access
hex (dec) **
o.Ct Output Digital (1 Ftb Fixed Time Base Fixed Instance 1 0x6A 85 6002 uint
o.Ct to 4) (34) Time Map 1 Map 2 (106) RWES
Time Base Type utb Variable Time Base 882 1002 1 to 4
Set the time base Base (103) 2
type. This parame- Offset to
ter is only used with next in-
PID control, but can stance (Map
be set anytime. 1 & Map 2)
equals +30

o.tb Output Digital (1 0.1 to 60.0 seconds 1.0 sec. Instance 1 0x6A 86 6003 float
o.tb to 4) (solid-state relay or for SSR Map 1 Map 2 (106) RWES
Fixed Time Base switched dc) or swdc 884 1004 1 to 4
Set the time base 5.0 to 60.0 seconds 5.0 for 3
for fixed-time-base (mechanical relay or relay Offset to
control. NO-ARC power con- next in-
trol) stance (Map
1 & Map 2)
equals +30

o.Lo Output Digital (1 0.0 to 100.0% 0.0% Instance 1 0x6A 87 6009 float
o.Lo to 4) Map 1 Map 2 (106) RWES
Low Power Scale 896 1016 1 to 4
The power output 9
will never be less Offset to
than the value next in-
specified and will stance (Map
represent the value 1 & Map 2)
at which output equals +30
scaling begins.

o.hi Output Digital (1 0.0 to 100.0% 100.0% Instance 1 0x6A 88 6010 float
o.hi to 4) Map 1 Map 2 (106) RWES
High Power Scale 898 1018 1 to 4
The power output 0xA (10)
will never be great- Offset to
er than the value next in-
specified and will stance (Map
represent the value 1 & Map 2)
at which output equals +30
scaling stops.

o.ty Output Process (1 uoLt Volts (104) Volts Instance 1 0x76 95 18001 uint
o.ty or 3) ЛЏA Milliamps (112) Map 1 Map 2 (118) RWES
Type 720 840 1 or 3
Select whether the Instance 3 1
process output will Map 1 Map 2
operate in volts or 800 920
milliamps.

* These parameters/prompts are available in these menus with firmware revisions 11.0 and above.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 116 • Cha pte r 6 Se tup Pa g e

 Setup Page
CIP - Data
Modbus Class Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance fibus eter and
Description
dress Attribute Index ID Access
hex (dec) **
Fn Output Process (1 oFF Off (62) Off Instance 1 0x76 96 18002 uint
Fn or 3) hEat Heat (36) Map 1 Map 2 (118) RWES
Function Cool Cool (20) 722 842 1 or 3
Set the type of dupl Duplex (212) Instance 3 2
function that will ALЛЏ Alarm (6) Map 1 Map 2
drive this output. Ent.A Profile Event 802 922
Out A (233)
Ent.b Profile Event
Out B (234)
rЛЏt Retransmit
(213)

r.Sr Output Process (1 Ai Analog Input (142) Analog Instance 1 0x76 97 18003 uint
r.Sr or 3) StPt Set Point (85) Input Map 1 Map 2 (118) RWES
Retransmit Source CUrr Current Sample 724 844 1 or 3
Select the value and hold (22) Instance 3 3
that will be retrans- Pu Process Value Map 1 Map 2
mitted. (241) 804 924

Fi Output Process (1 1 to 4 1 Instance 1 0x76 98 18004 uint

Fi or 3) Map 1 Map 2 (118) RWES
Function Instance 726 846 1 or 3
Set the instance of Instance 3 4
the function select- Map 1 Map 2
ed above. 806 926

S.Lo Output Process (1 -100.0 to 100.0 0.00 Instance 1 0x76 99 18009 float
S.Lo or 3) Map 1 Map 2 (118) RWES
Scale Low 736 856 1 or 3
Set the scale low Instance 3 9
for process output Map 1 Map 2
in electrical units. 816 936
This value; in volts
or milliamps, will
correspond to 0%
PID power output or
range low retrans-
mit output.
* These parameters/prompts are available in these menus with firmware revisions 11.0 and above.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 117 • Cha pte r 6 Se tu p Pa g e

 Setup Page
CIP - Data
Modbus Class Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance fibus eter and
Description
dress Attribute Index ID Access
hex (dec) **
S.hi Output Process (1 -100.0 to 100.0 10.00 Instance 1 0x76 100 18010 float
S.hi or 3) Map 1 Map 2 (118) RWES
Scale High 738 858 1 or 3
Set the scale high Instance 3 0xA (10)
for process output Map 1 Map 2
in 818 938
electrical units. This
value; in volts or
milliamps, will cor-
respond to 100% PID
power output or
range high retrans-
mit output.

r.Lo Output Process (1 -1,999.000 to 0.0°F or Instance 1 0x76 101 18011 float
r.Lo or 3) 9,999.000°F or units units Map 1 Map 2 (118) RWES
Range Low -1,128.000 to -18°C 740 860 1 or 3
Set the minimum 5,537.000°C Instance 3 0xB (11)
value of the re- Map 1 Map 2
transmit value 820 940
range in process
units. When the
retransmit source
is at this value, the
retransmit output
will be at its Scale
Low value.

r.hi Output Process (1 -1,999.000 to 100.0°F Instance 1 0x76 102 18012 float
r.hi or 3) 9,999.000°F or units or units Map 1 Map 2 (118) RWES
Range High -1,128.000 to 38.0°C 742 862 1 or 3
Set the maximum 5,537.000°C Instance 3 0xC (12)
value of the re- Map 1 Map 2
transmit value 822 942
range in process
units. When the
retransmit source
is at this value, the
retransmit output
will be at its Scale
High value.

o.CA Output Process (1 -1,999.000 to 0.0°F or Instance 1 0x76 105 18007 float
o.CA or 3) 9,999.000°F or units units Map 1 Map 2 (118) RWES
Calibration Offset -1,110.555 to 0.0°C 732 852 1 or 3
Set an offset value 5,555.000°C Instance 3 7
for a process out- Map 1 Map 2
put. 812 932
* These parameters/prompts are available in these menus with firmware revisions 11.0 and above.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 118 • Cha pte r 6 Se tup Pa g e

 Setup Page
CIP - Data
Modbus Class Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance fibus eter and
Description
dress Attribute Index ID Access
hex (dec) **
ALЛЏ
SEt
Alarm Menu
A.ty Alarm (1 to 4) oFF Off (62) Off Instance 1 0x6D 20 9015 uint
A.ty Type PR.AL Process Alarm Map 1 Map 2 (109) RWES
Select whether the (76) 1508 1908 1 to 4
alarm trigger is a dE.AL Deviation Alarm 0xF (15)
fixed value or will (24) Offset to
track the set point. next in-
stance (Map
1 +50, Map 2
+60)

Sr.A Alarm (1 to 4) nonE None (61) Instance 1 0x6D 21 9017 uint

Sr.A Alarm Source Ai Analog Input Map 1 Map 2 (109) RWES
Select what will (142) 1512 1912 1 to 4
trigger this alarm. Lnr Linearization 0x11
Note: (238) Offset to (17)
When using Devia- Pu Process Value next in-
tion Alarms with (241) stance (Map
Differential con- PФІr Power (73) 1 +50, Map 2
trol, the Alarm CU.r Load Current +60)
Source must be set RMS (179)
to Process Value. CUrr Current Read
is Sample and Hold
(22)

is.A Alarm (1 to 4) 1 or 2 1 Instance 1 0x6D 22 9018 uint

iS.A Alarm Source In- Map 1 Map 2 (109) RWES
stance 1514 1914 1 to 2
Set the instance of 0x12
the function select- Offset to (18)
ed above. next in-
stance (Map
1 +50, Map 2
+60)

Loop Alarm (1 to 4) 1 to 2 1 Instance 1 0x6D 23 9023 uint

LooP Control Loop Map 1 Map 2 (109) RWES
Set the instance 1524 1924 1 to 2
of the Set Point 0x17
Closed, Control Offset to (23)
Loop, that will be next in-
referenced by the stance (Map
deviation alarm. 1 +50, Map 2
+60)
Note:
Not available on
single loop models.
* These parameters/prompts are available in these menus with firmware revisions 11.0 and above.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 119 • Cha pte r 6 Se tu p Pa g e

 Setup Page
CIP - Data
Modbus Class Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance fibus eter and
Description
dress Attribute Index ID Access
hex (dec) **
A.hy Alarm (1 to 4) 0.001 to 9,999.000°F 1.0°F or Instance 1 0x6D 24 9003 float
A.hy Hysteresis or units units Map 1 Map 2 (109) RWES
Set the hysteresis 0.001 to 5,555.000°C 1.0°C 1484 1884 1 to 4
for an alarm. This 3
determines how far Offset to
into the safe region next in-
the process value stance (Map
needs to move be- 1 equals
fore the alarm can +50, Map 2
be cleared. +60)

A.Lg Alarm (1 to 4) AL.C Close On Alarm Close On Instance 1 0x6D 25 9005 uint
A.Lg Logic (17) Alarm Map 1 Map 2 (109) RWES
Select what the AL.o Open On Alarm 1488 1888 1 to 4
output condition (66) 5
will be during the Offset to
alarm state. next in-
stance (Map
1 +50, Map 2
+60)

A.Sd Alarm (1 to 4) both Both (13) Both Instance 1 0x6D 26 9004 uint
A.Sd Sides high High (37) Map 1 Map 2 (109) RWES
Select which side LoФІ Low (53) 1486 1886 1 to 4
or sides will trigger 4
this alarm. Offset to
next in-
stance (Map
1 +50, Map 2
+60)
* These parameters/prompts are available in these menus with firmware revisions 11.0 and above.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 120 • Cha pte r 6 Se tup Pa g e

 Setup Page
CIP - Data
Modbus Class Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance fibus eter and
Description
dress Attribute Index ID Access
hex (dec) **
A.Lo Alarm (1 to 4) -1,999.000 to 32.0°F Instance 1 0x6D 18 9002 float
A.Lo Low Set Point 9,999.000°F or units or units Map 1 Map 2 (109) RWES
If Type (Setup -1,128.000 to 0.0°C 1482 1882 1 to 4
Page, Alarm Menu) 5,537.000°C 2
is set to: Offset to
Process - set the next in-
process value that stance (Map
will trigger a low 1 +50, Map
alarm. 2 +60)
Deviation - set
the span of units
from the closed
loop set point
that will trigger
a low alarm. A
negative set point
represents a value
below closed
loop set point. A
positive set point
represents a value
above closed loop
set point.
A.hi Alarm (1 to 4) -1,999.000 to 300.0°F Instance 1 0x6D 19 9001 float
A.hi High Set Point 9,999.000°F or units or units Map 1 Map 2 (109) RWES
If Type (Setup -1,128.000 to 150.0°C 1480 1880 1 to 4
Page, Alarm Menu) 5,537.000°C 1
is set to: Offset to
Process - set the next in-
process value that stance (Map
will trigger a high 1) equals
alarm. +50
Deviation - set the
span of units from Offset to
the closed loop next in-
set point that stance (Map
will trigger a high 2) equals
alarm. +60

* These parameters/prompts are available in these menus with firmware revisions 11.0 and above.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 121 • Cha pte r 6 Se tu p Pa g e

 Setup Page
CIP - Data
Modbus Class Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance fibus eter and
Description
dress Attribute Index ID Access
hex (dec) **
A.LA Alarm (1 to 4) nLAt Non-Latching Non- Instance 1 0x6D 27 9007 uint
A.LA Latching (60) Latching Map 1 Map 2 (109) RWES
Turn latching on or LAt Latching (49) 1492 1892 1 to 4
off. A latched alarm 7
has to be turned off Offset to
by the user. next in-
stance (Map
1 equals
+50, for Map
2 equals
+60)

A.bL Alarm (1 to 4) oFF Off (62) Off Instance 1 0x6D 28 9008 uint
A.bL Blocking Str Startup (88) Map 1 Map 2 (109) RWES
Select when an StPt Set Point (85) 1494 1894 1 to 4
alarm will be both Both (13) 8
blocked. After start- Offset to
up and/or after the next in-
set point changes, stance (Map
the alarm will be 1 equals
blocked until the +50, for Map
process value enters 2 equals
the normal range. +60)

A.Si Alarm (1 to 4) oFF Off (62) Off Instance 1 0x6D 29 9006 uint
A.Si Silencing on On (63) Map 1 Map 2 (109) RWES
Turn silencing on to 1490 1890 1 to 4
allow the user to 6
disable this alarm. Offset to
next in-
stance (Map
1 equals
+50, for Map
2 equals
+60)

A.dSP Alarm (1 to 4) oFF Off (62) On Instance 1 0x6D 30 9016 uint

A.dSP Display on On (63) Map 1 Map 2 (109) RWES
Display an alarm 1510 1910 1 to 4
message when an 0x10
alarm is active. Offset to (16)
next in-
stance (Map
1 equals
+50, for Map
2 equals
+60)
* These parameters/prompts are available in these menus with firmware revisions 11.0 and above.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 122 • Cha pte r 6 Se tup Pa g e

 Setup Page
CIP - Data
Modbus Class Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance fibus eter and
Description
dress Attribute Index ID Access
hex (dec) **
A.dL Alarm (1 to 4) 0 to 9,999 seconds 0 Instance 1 0x6D 31 9021 uint
A.dL Delay Time Map 1 Map 2 (109) RWES
Set the span of time 1520 1920 1 to 4
that the alarm will 0x15
be delayed after Offset to (21)
the process value next in-
exceeds the alarm stance (Map
set point. 1 equals
+50, for Map
2 equals
+60)

a.Clr Alarm (1 to 4) CLr Clear (0) ---- Instance 1 0x6D ---- 9013 uint
A.Clr Clear Alarm ignr Ignore (204) Map 1 Map 2 (109) W
Write to this reg- 1504 1904 1 to 4
ister to clear an 0xD
alarm Offset to (13)
Note: next in-
If an alarm is set- stance
up to latch when (Map1 1
active [a;Clr] will equals
appear on the dis- +50, Map 2
play. equals +60)

a.sir Alarm (1 to 4) siL Silence (1010) ---- Instance 1 0x6D ---- 9014 uint
A.Sir Silence Alarm Map 1 Map 2 (109) W
Write to this reg- 1506 1906 1 to 4
ister to silence an 0xE (14)
alarm Offset to
Note: next in-
If an alarm is stance
setup to silence (Map1 1
alarm when active equals
[a;sir] will appear +50, Map 2
on the display. equals +60)

a.st Alarm (1 to 4) str Startup (88) ---- Instance 1 0x6D ---- 9009 uint
A.St Alarm State nonE None (61) Map 1 Map 2 (109) R
Current state of 1496 1896 1 to 4
bLo Blocked (12)
alarm 9
aL.L Alarm low (8) Offset to
aL.h Alarm high (7) next in-
aL.E Error (28) stance
(Map1 1
equals
+50, Map 2
equals +60)
* These parameters/prompts are available in these menus with firmware revisions 11.0 and above.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 123 • Cha pte r 6 Se tu p Pa g e

 Setup Page
CIP - Data
Modbus Class Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance fibus eter and
Description
dress Attribute Index ID Access
hex (dec) **
CUrr Note:
SEt For further description and usage tips see the CT Appli-
cation Note in this User's Guide.
Current Menu
C.Sd Current (1) oFF Off (62) off Instance 1 0x73 145 15005 uint
C.Sd Sides high High (37) Map 1 Map 2 (115) RWES
Select which side or loФІ Low (53) 1128 1368 1
sides will be moni- both Both (13) 5
tored.

CU.r Current (1) no No (59) no Instance 1 0x73 146 15004 uint

CU.r Indicate Reading yEs Yes (106) Map 1 Map 2 (115) RWES
Use Indicate Reading 1126 1366 1
to display solid-state 4
relay (SSR) failure
and heater failure
messages.

C.dt Current (1) 3 to 59 9 Instance 1 0x73 147 15012 uint

C.dt Input Detection Map 1 Map 2 (115) RWES
Threshold 1142 1382 1
For factory adjust- 0xC (12)
ment only.

C.SC Current (1) 0 to 9,999.000 50.0 Instance 1 0x73 148 15022 float
C.SC Input Scaling Map 1 Map 2 (115) RWES
Adjust scaling to 1162 1402 1
match the trans- 0x16
former's high range. (22)

C.oFs Current (1) -9,999.000 to 0.0 Instance 1 0x73 149 15011 float
C.oFS Heater Offset 9,999.000 Map 1 Map 2 (115) RWES
Calibrate the cur- 1140 1380 1
rent reading with 0xB (11)
an offset value.

C.Si Current (1) 1 to 12 1 Instance 1 0x73 150 15019 uint

C.Si Monitored Output Map 1 Map 2 (115) RWES
Select which output 1156 1396 1
instance the current 0x13
transformer will (19)
monitor.

* These parameters/prompts are available in these menus with firmware revisions 11.0 and above.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 124 • Cha pte r 6 Se tup Pa g e

 Setup Page
CIP - Data
Modbus Class Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance fibus eter and
Description
dress Attribute Index ID Access
hex (dec) **
tЛЏr
SEt
Timer Menu
ti.En Timer yES Yes (106) Yes Instance 1 0x83 ---- 31029 uint
ti.En Timer Enable no No (59) Map 1 Map 2 (131) RWES
Enable the timer - - - - 8556 1
function. 0x1D
(29)

ti.St Timer iЛЏd Immediate Immedi- Instance 1 0x83 ---- 31030 uint
ti.St Timer Start Method (1049) ate Map 1 Map 2 (131) RWES
Select what will rdy Ready Band - - - - 8558 1
start the timer. (1942) 0x1E
(30)
rdyA Ready Ack
(1950)
PФІr Power (73)
SFn.A Timer FUn Function Key Function Instance 1 0x83 ---- 31001 uint
SFn.A Source Function A (1001) Key Map 1 Map 2 (131) RWES
Select which input nonE None (61) - - - - 8500 1
will start or termi- 0x01 (1)
dio Digital I/O (1142)
nate the timer.

Si.A Timer 1 to 24 8 Instance 1 0x83 ---- 31003 uint

Si.A Source Instance A Map 1 Map 2 (131) RWES
Select an instance - - - - 8504 1
of Function A. 0x03 (3)

SFn.C Timer Pu Process Value Process Instance 1 0x83 ---- 31031 uint
SFn.C Source Function C (241) Value Map 1 Map 2 (131) RWES
Select the analog nonE None (61) - - - - 8560 1
source for the ready 0x1F
Ai Analog Input (142)
band. (31)
Lnr Linearization
(238)

Si.C Timer 1 to 24 1 Instance 1 0x83 ---- 31033 uint

Si.C Source Instance C Map 1 Map 2 (131) RWES
Select an instance - - - - 8564 1
of Function C. 0x21
(33)

SFn.d Timer FUn Function Key Function Instance 1 0x83 ---- 31032 uint
SFn.D Source Function D (1001) Key Map 1 Map 2 (131) RWES
Select which input nonE None (61) - - - - 8562 1
will acknowledge 0x20
dio Digital I/O (1142)
the ready band. (32)
* These parameters/prompts are available in these menus with firmware revisions 11.0 and above.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 125 • Cha pte r 6 Se tu p Pa g e

 Setup Page
CIP - Data
Modbus Class Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance fibus eter and
Description
dress Attribute Index ID Access
hex (dec) **
Si.d Timer 1 to 24 7 Instance 1 0x83 ---- 31034 uint
Si.d Source Instance D Map 1 Map 2 (131) RWES
Select an instance - - - - 8566 1
of Function D. 0x22
(34)

t.r Timer 00.00 00:00 to 99:59 7 0x83 ---- 31021 string

t.r Time Remaining (131) R
Display the time ---- 1
remaining on the 0x15
timer. (21)

r.bS Timer yES Yes (106) ---- Instance 1 0x83 ---- 31022 uint
r.bS Ready Band State no No (59) Map 1 Map 2 (131) R
Display whether the - - - - 8542 1
process value is in 0x16
the ready band. (22)

rdy Timer 0.000 to 9999.000°F 5.000 Instance 1 0x83 ---- 31023 float
rdY Ready Band or units Map 1 Map 2 (131) RWES
Set the how close 0.000 to 5555.000°C - - - - 8544 1
the process value 0x17
must be to the (23)
closed loop timer
set point to be in
the ready band.

t.For Timer tЛЏS Time Time Instance 1 0x83 ---- 31024 uint
t.For Time Format Minutes:Seconds Minutes: Map 1 Map 2 (131) RWES
Select the time for- (1943) Seconds - - - - 8546 1
mat. thЛЏ Time 0x18
Hours:Minutes (1944) (24)

hoUr Timer 0 to 99 0 Instance 1 0x83 ---- 31025 uint

hoUr Hours Map 1 Map 2 (131) RWES
Set the timer period - - - - 8548 1
hours. 0x19
(25)

ЛЏn Timer 0 to 59 0 Instance 1 0x83 ---- 31026 uint

Min Minutes Map 1 Map 2 (131) RWES
Set the timer period - - - - 8550 1
minutes. 0x1A
(26)

SEC Timer 0 to 59 10 Instance 1 0x83 ---- 31027 uint

SEC Seconds Map 1 Map 2 (131) RWES
Set the timer period - - - - 8552 1
seconds. 0x1B
(27)
* These parameters/prompts are available in these menus with firmware revisions 11.0 and above.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 126 • Cha pte r 6 Se tup Pa g e

 Setup Page
CIP - Data
Modbus Class Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance fibus eter and
Description
dress Attribute Index ID Access
hex (dec) **
Ct.SP Timer -1999.000 to 75 Instance 1 0x83 ---- 31028 float
Ct.SP Closed Loop Timer 9999.000°F or units Map 1 Map 2 (131) RWES
Set Point -1110.555 to - - - - 8554 1
Set the set point 5555.000°C 0x1C
that will be in ef- (28)
fect during the
timer period.

St Timer 1 to 3600 Seconds 1 Instance 1 0x83 ---- 31045 uint

St Signal Time Map 1 Map 2 (131) RWES
Set the period of - - - - 8588 1
time that a signal 0x2D
output to be ac- (45)
tivated after the
timer period is com-
plete. Assign a digi-
tal output for this
function in Timer
Event Output 3.

ЛЏAt
SEt
Math Menu
Fn Math oFF Off (62) Off Instance 1 0x7D 128 25021 uint
Fn Function P.SC Process Scale Map 1 Map 2 (125) RWES
Set the operator (1371) - - - - 3040 1
that will be applied d.SC Deviation Scale 0x15
to the sources. (1372) (21)

SFn.e Math nonE None (61) None Instance 1 0x7D ---- 25005 uint
SFn.E Source Function E fUn Function Key Map 1 Map 2 (125) RWES
Set the type of (1001) - - - - 3008 1
function that will dio Digital I/O (1142) 5
be used for this
source.

si.E Math 1 to 12 1 Instance 1 0x7D 25010 float

Si.E Source Instance E Map 1 Map 2 (125) RWES
Set the instance of - - - - 3018 1
the function select- 0xA (10)
ed above.

S.Lo Math -1,999.000 to 0.0 Instance 1 0x7D 129 25024 float

S.Lo Scale Low 9,999.000 Map 1 Map 2 (125) RWES
This value will cor- - - - - 3046 1
respond to Output 0x18
Range Low. (24)
* These parameters/prompts are available in these menus with firmware revisions 11.0 and above.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 127 • Cha pte r 6 Se tu p Pa g e

 Setup Page
CIP - Data
Modbus Class Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance fibus eter and
Description
dress Attribute Index ID Access
hex (dec) **
S.hi Math -1,999.000 to 1.0 Instance 1 0x7D 130 25025 float
S.hi Scale High 9,999.000 Map 1 Map 2 (125) RWES
This value will cor- - - - - 3048 1
respond to Output 0x19
Range High. (25)

r.Lo Math -1,999.000 to 0.0 Instance 1 0x7D 131 25026 float

r.Lo Range Low 9,999.000 Map 1 Map 2 (125) RWES
This value will cor- - - - - 3050 1
respond to Input 0x1A
Scale Low. (26)

r.hi Math -1,999.000 to 1.0 Instance 1 0x7D 132 25027 float

r.hi Range High 9,999.000 Map 1 Map 2 (125) RWES
This value will cor- - - - - 3052 1
respond to Input 0x1B
Scale High. (27)

FiL Math 0.0 to 60.0 seconds 0.0 Instance 1 0x7D ---- 25028 float
FiL Filter Map 1 Map 2 (125) RWES
Filtering smooths - - - - 3054 1
out the output sig- 0x1C
nal of this function (28)
block. Increase the
time to increase fil-
tering.

sof
sEt
Special Output Function Menu
Fn Special Output oFF Off (62) Off Instance 1 0x87 181 35009 uint
Fn Function uA.C Motorized Valve Map 1 Map 2 (135) RWES
Set the function to (1508) - - - - 3856 1
match the device it Co.C Compressor Con- 9
will operate. trol (1506)

SFn.A Special Output nonE None (61) None Instance 1 0x87 182 35001 uint
SFn.A Source Function A PФІr Power (73) Map 1 Map 2 (135) RWES
Set the type of h.Pr Heat Power (160) - - - - 3840 1
function that will C.Pr Cool Power (161) 1
be used for this
source.

Si.A Special Output 1 to 2 1 Instance 1 0x87 183 35003 uint

Si.A Source Instance A Map 1 Map 2 (135) RWES
Set the instance of - - - - 3844 1
the function select- 3
ed above.
* These parameters/prompts are available in these menus with firmware revisions 11.0 and above.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 128 • Cha pte r 6 Se tup Pa g e

 Setup Page
CIP - Data
Modbus Class Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance fibus eter and
Description
dress Attribute Index ID Access
hex (dec) **
SFn.b Special Output nonE None (61) None Instance 1 0x87 184 35002 uint
SFn.b Source Function B PФІr Power (73) Map 1 Map 2 (135) RWES
Set the type of h.Pr Heat Power (160) - - - - 3842 1
function that will C.Pr Cool Power (161) 2
be used for this
source.

Si.B Special Output 1 to 2 1 Instance 1 0x87 185 35004 uint

Si.b Source Instance B Map 1 Map 2 (135) RWES
Set the instance of - - - - 3846 1
the function select- 4
ed above.

Pon.A Special Output -100.00 to 100.00% 0 Instance 1 0x87 186 35018 float
Pon.A Input A Turn On Map 1 Map 2 (135) RWES
Compressor 1 power - - - - 3874 1
on level. 0x12
(18)

PoF.A Special Output -100.00 to 100.00% 5 Instance 1 0x87 187 35019 float
PoF.A Input A Turn Off Map 1 Map 2 (135) RWES
Compressor 1 power - - - - 3876 1
off level. 0x13
(19)

Pon.b Special Output -100.00 to 100.00% 0 Instance 1 0x87 188 35020 float
Pon.b Input B Turn On Map 1 Map 2 (135) RWES
Compressor 2 power - - - - 3878 1
on level. 0x14
(20)

PoF.b Special Output -100.00 to 100.00% 5 Instance 1 0x87 189 35021 float
PoF.b Input B Turn Off Map 1 Map 2 (135) RWES
Compressor 1 power - - - - 3880 1
off level. 0x15
(21)

on.t Special Output 0 to 9,999 seconds 20 Instance 1 0x87 190 35022 uint
on.t Minimum On Time Map 1 Map 2 (135) RWES
At a minimum stay - - - - 3882 1
on specified amount 0x16
of time. (22)

oF.t Special Output 0 to 9,999 seconds 20 Instance 1 0x87 191 35023 uint
oF.t Minimum Off Time Map 1 Map 2 (135) RWES
At a minimum - - - - 3884 1
stay off specified 0x17
amount of time. (23)
* These parameters/prompts are available in these menus with firmware revisions 11.0 and above.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 129 • Cha pte r 6 Se tu p Pa g e

 Setup Page
CIP - Data
Modbus Class Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance fibus eter and
Description
dress Attribute Index ID Access
hex (dec) **
t.t Special Output 10 to 9,999 seconds 120 Instance 1 0x87 192 35024 uint
t.t Valve Travel Time Map 1 Map 2 (135) RWES
The amount of time - - - - 3886 1
it takes the valve to 0x18
fully open and then (24)
fully close.

db Special Output 1.0 to 100.0% 2 Instance 1 0x87 193 35025 float

db Dead Band Map 1 Map 2 (135) RWES
Output power needs - - - - 3888 1
to change by speci- 0x19
fied level prior to (25)
turning on.

t.dL Special Output 0 to 9,999 seconds 0 Instance 1 0x87 ---- 35026 uint
t.dL Time Delay Map 1 Map 2 (135) RWES
If requested power - - - - 3890 1
is 0.0% for longer 0x1A
than the specified (26)
Time Delay, the
compressor will
shut off.

FUn
SEt
Function Key
LEu Function Key (1 to high High (37) High Instance 1 0x6E 137 10001 uint
LEv 2) LoФІ Low (53) Map 1 Map 2 (110) RWES
Active Level 1360 1600 1 to 2
The Function Key Instance 2 1
will always power Map 1 Map 2
up in the low state. 1380 1620
Pressing the Func-
tion Key will toggle
the selected action.
* These parameters/prompts are available in these menus with firmware revisions 11.0 and above.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 130 • Cha pte r 6 Se tup Pa g e

 Setup Page
CIP - Data
Modbus Class Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance fibus eter and
Description
dress Attribute Index ID Access
hex (dec) **
Fn Function Key (1 to nonE None (61) None Instance 1 0x6E 138 10003 uint
Fn 2) r.En Remote Set Point Map 1 Map 2 (110) RWES
Action Function enable (216) 1364 1604 3 to 4
Program the EZ Key LЛЏr Limit Reset, Instance 2 3
edge triggered (82)
to trigger an action. Map 1 Map 2
Functions respond usr.r User Set Re- 1384 1624
to a level state store, edge triggered
change or an edge (227)
level change. P.LoC Keypad Lock-
out, level triggered
Note:
(217)
The Limit Reset
function is not
ALЛЏ Alarm Reset,
edge triggered (6)
available in firm-
ware revision 11.0
SiL Silence Alarms,
edge triggered (108)
and above.
AoF Control Loops Off
and Alarms to Non-
alarm State, level
triggered (220)
F.AL Force Alarm to
occur, level triggered
(218)
idLE Idle Set Point,
level triggered (107)
tUnE Tune, edge trig-
gered (98)
ЛЏAn Manual, level
triggered (54)
oFF Switch Control
Loop Off, level trig-
gered (90)
t.da TRU-TUNE+® Dis-
able, level triggered
(219)
P.diS Profile Disable,
level triggered (206)
P.hoL Profile Hold/Re-
sume, level triggered
(207)
ProF Start Profile,
edge triggered (196)
P.StS Profile Start/
Stop, level triggered
(208)
s.stp Start Step
(1077)
* These parameters/prompts are available in these menus with firmware revisions 11.0 and above.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 131 • Cha pte r 6 Se tu p Pa g e

 Setup Page
CIP - Data
Modbus Class Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance fibus eter and
Description
dress Attribute Index ID Access
hex (dec) **
Fi Function Key (1 to 0 to 4 0 Instance 1 0x96 139 10004 - - - -
Fi 2) Map 1 Map 2 (110)
Function Instance 1366 1606 3 to 4
Select which in- Instance 2 4
stance the EZ Map 1 Map 2
Key will affect. If 1386 1626
only one instance
is available, any
selection will af-
fect it.

gLbL
SEt
Global Menu
C_F Global F °F (30) °F Instance 1 0x67 110 3005 uint
Display Units Map 1 Map 2 (103) RWES
C_F C °C (15)
Select which scale 1838 2308 1
to use for tempera- 5
ture.

AC.LF Global 50 50 Hz (3) 60 Hz Instance 1 0x6A 89 1034 uint

AC.LF AC Line Frequency 60 60 Hz (4) Map 1 Map 2 (106) RWES
Set the frequency 886 1006 1
to the applied ac 4
line power source.

R.typ Global ratE Rate (81) Time Instance 1 0x7A ---- 22038 uint
R.tyP Ramping Type ti Time (143) Map 1 Map 2 (122) RWE
- - - - 4414 1
26 (38)

P.typ Global StPt Set Point (85) Set Point Instance 1 0x7A ---- 22008 uint
P.tyP Profile Type Pro Process (75) Map 1 Map 2 (122) RWE
Set the profile 2534 4354 1
startup to be based 8
on a set point or a
process value.

GSE Global oFF Off (62) Off Instance 1 0x7A ---- 22006 uint
gSE Guaranteed Soak on On (63) Map 1 Map 2 (122) RWE
Enable 2530 4350 1
Enables the guaran- 6
teed soak deviation
function in profiles.
* These parameters/prompts are available in these menus with firmware revisions 11.0 and above.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 132 • Cha pte r 6 Se tup Pa g e

 Setup Page
CIP - Data
Modbus Class Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance fibus eter and
Description
dress Attribute Index ID Access
hex (dec) **
GSd1 Global 0.0 to 9,999.000°F or 10.0°F or Instance 1 0x7A ---- 22007 float
gSd1 Guaranteed Soak units units Map 1 Map 2 (122) RWE
Deviation 1 0.0 to 5,555.000°C 6.0°C 2532 4352 1
Set the value of 7
the deviation band
that will be used
in all profile step
types. The process
value must enter
the deviation band
before the step can
proceed.

GSd2 Global 0.0 to 9,999.000°F or 10.0°F or Instance 1 0x7A ---- 22041 float
gSd2 Guaranteed Soak units units Map 1 Map 2 (122) RWE
Deviation 2 0.0 to 5,555.000°C 6.0°C - - - - 4420 1
Set the value of 0x29
the deviation band (41)
that will be used
in all profile step
types. The process
value must enter
the deviation band
before the step can
proceed.

Si.a Global 5 to 12 5 Instance 1 0x7A ---- 22060 uint

Si.a Source Instance A Map 1 Map 2 (122) RWES
Set the digital - - - - 4390 1
source for Wait for 0x1A
Event 1 in profile. (26)

Si.B Global 5 to 12 5 Instance 1 7A (122) - - - - 22061 uint

Si.b Source Instance B Map 1 Map 2 1 RWES
Set the digital - - - - 4392 0x1B
source for Wait for (27)
Event 2 in profile.

poti Global 0 to 9999 seconds 0 Instance 1 7A (122) - - - - 22073 uint

Poti Power Off Time Map 1 Map 2 1 RWE
If profile is running - - - - 4484 0x49
and power is lost, (73)
profile will resume
where it left off
provided time set
has not expired
prior to power res-
toration.
* These parameters/prompts are available in these menus with firmware revisions 11.0 and above.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 133 • Cha pte r 6 Se tu p Pa g e

 Setup Page
CIP - Data
Modbus Class Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance fibus eter and
Description
dress Attribute Index ID Access
hex (dec) **
sutb Global -2.00 to 2.00 Percent 0.00 ---- ---- ---- -- float
Sutb Synchronized Vari- -- RWE
able Time Base
Used to acquire
tighter accuracy
when running a
profile. A setting
of +0.01 would
equate to approxi-
mately +9 sec-
onds/day (faster)
where a setting of
-0.01 would equate
to approximately
-9 seconds/day
(slower).

C.LEd Global Con1 Comm port 1 both Instance 1 0x6A ---- 3014 uint
C.LEd Communications (1189) Map 1 Map 2 (103) RWES
LED Action Con2 Comm port 2 1856 2326 1
Turns comms LED on (1190) 0x0E
or off for selected both Comm port 1 (14)
comms ports. and 2 (13)
off Off (62)
2onE Global off Off (62) On Instance 1 0x6A ---- 3026 uint
Zone Zone on On (63) Map 1 Map 2 (103) RWES
Turns Zone LED on - - - - 2350 1
or off based on se- 0x1A
lection. (26)
Chan Global off Off (62) On Instance 1 0x6A ---- 3027 uint
Chan Channel on On (63) Map 1 Map 2 (103) RWES
Turns Channel LED - - - - 2352 1
on or off based on 0x1B
selection. (27)
d.prs Global 1 to 10 2 Instance 1 0x6A ---- 3028 uint
dPrS Display Pairs Map 1 Map 2 (103) RWES
Defines the number - - - - 2354 1
of Display Pairs. 0x1C
(28)
d.ti Global 0 to 60 0 Instance 1 0x6A ---- 3029 uint
d.ti Display Time Map 1 Map 2 (103) RWES
Time delay in tog- - - - - 2356 1
gling between Dis- 0x1D
play Pairs. (29)
* These parameters/prompts are available in these menus with firmware revisions 11.0 and above.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 134 • Cha pte r 6 Se tup Pa g e

 Setup Page
CIP - Data
Modbus Class Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance fibus eter and
Description
dress Attribute Index ID Access
hex (dec) **
USr.S Global SEt1 User Set 1 None Instance 1 0x(101) 118 1014 uint
USr.S Save Settings As (101) Map 1 Map 2 1 RWE
Save all of this SEt2 User Set 2 26 26 0xE (14)
controller's settings (102)
to the selected nonE None (61)
set.
USr.r Global FCty Factory (31) None Instance 1 0x65 117 1013 uint
USr.r Restore Settings nonE None (61) Map 1 Map 2 (101) RWE
From SEt1 User Set 1 24 24 1
Replace all of this (101) 0xD
controller's settings SEt2 User Set 2 (13)
with another set. (102)
CoЛЏ
SEt
Communications Menu
PCoL Communications 1 Std Standard Bus Modbus Instance 1 0x96 ---- 17009 uint
PCoL Protocol (1286) Map 1 Map 2 (150) RWE
Set the protocol of ЛЏod Modbus RTU 2492 2972 1
this controller to (1057) 7
the protocol that
this network is us-
ing.
Standard Bus
Ad.S Communications 1 1 to 16 1 Instance 1 0x96 ---- 17001 uint
Ad.S Standard Bus Ad- Map 1 Map 2 (150) RWE
dress 2480 2960 1
Set the network 1
address of this con-
troller. Each device
on the network
must have a unique
address.
The Zone Display on
the front panel will
display this number.
* These parameters/prompts are available in these menus with firmware revisions 11.0 and above.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 135 • Cha pte r 6 Se tu p Pa g e

 Setup Page
CIP - Data
Modbus Class Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance fibus eter and
Description
dress Attribute Index ID Access
hex (dec) **
Modbus RTU
AdЛЏ Communications (1 1 to 247 1 Instance 1 0x96 ---- 17007 uint
Ad.M or 2) Map 1 Map 2 (150) RWE
Modbus Address 2482 2962 1 to 2
Set the network Instance 2 2
address of this con- Map 1 Map 2
troller. Each device 2500 2980
on the network
must have a unique
address.

bAUd Communications (1 9600 9,600 (188) 9,600 Instance 1 0x96 ---- 17002 uint
bAUd or 2) 19.2 19,200 (189) Map 1 Map 2 (150) RWE
Baud Rate 38.4 38,400 (190) 2484 2964 1 to 2
Set the speed of Instance 2 3
this controller's Map 1 Map 2
communications to 2504 2984
match the speed of
the Modbus serial
network.

PAr Communications (1 nonE None (61) None Instance 1 0x96 ---- 17003 uint
PAr or 2) EuEn Even (191) Map 1 Map 2 (150) RWE
Parity odd Odd (192) 2486 2966 1 to 2
Set the parity of Instance 2 4
this controller to Map 1 Map 2
match the parity of 2506 2986
the Modbus serial
network.

C_f Communications (1 f Fahrenheit (30) F Instance 1 0x96 ---- 17050 uint

C_F or 2) C Celsius (15) Map 1 Map 2 (150) RWE
Display Units 2490 2970 1
Select whether this 6
communications
channel will display
in Celsius or Fahr-
enheit.
Note:
Applies to Modbus
only.

ЛЏ.hL Communications (1 Lohi Low-High Low-High Instance 1 0x96 ---- 17043 uint
M.hL or 2) (1331) Map 1 Map 2 (150) RWE
Modbus Word Order hiLo High-Low 2488 2968 1 to 2
Select the word (1330) Instance 2 5
order of the two Map 1 Map 2
16-bit words in the 2508 2988
floating-point val-
ues.
* These parameters/prompts are available in these menus with firmware revisions 11.0 and above.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 136 • Cha pte r 6 Se tup Pa g e

 Setup Page
CIP - Data
Modbus Class Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance fibus eter and
Description
dress Attribute Index ID Access
hex (dec) **
ЛЏap Communications (1 1 to 2 1 if 9th ---- ---- ---- 17059 uint
Map or 2) digit RWE
Data Map of part
If set to 1 the con- number
trol will use PM leg- is a D or
acy mapping. If set 1 other-
to 2 the control will wise, 2.
use new mapping to
accommodate new
functions.

nU.S Communications (1 yEs Yes (106) Yes Instance 1 0x96 198 17051 uint
nV.S or 2) no No (59) Map 1 Map 2 (150) RWE
Non-Volatile Save 2494 2974 1
If set to Yes all 8
values written to
the control will be
saved in EEPROM.
The EEPROM allows
for approximately
one million writes.
DeviceNet
Ad.d Communications (2) 0 to 63 63 ---- ---- ---- 17052 - - - -
Ad.d DeviceNet™ Node
Address
Set the DeviceNet™
address for this
gateway.
bAUd Communications (2) 125 125 kb (1351) 125 ---- ---- ---- 17053 - - - -
bAUd Baud Rate De- 250 250 kb (1352)
viceNet™ 500 500 kb (1353)
Set the DeviceNet
speed for this gate-
way's communica-
tions to match the
speed of the serial
network.
FC.E Communications (2) no No (59) No ---- ---- ---- 17054 - - - -
FC.E DeviceNet™ Quick yES Yes (106)
Connect Enable
Allows for immedi-
ate communication
with the scanner
upon power up.
ao.nb Communications (2) 1 to 20 20 ---- ---- ---- 24009 - - - -
Ao.nb CIP Implicit Assem-
bly Output Member
Quantity
* These parameters/prompts are available in these menus with firmware revisions 11.0 and above.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 137 • Cha pte r 6 Se tu p Pa g e

 Setup Page
CIP - Data
Modbus Class Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance fibus eter and
Description
dress Attribute Index ID Access
hex (dec) **
ai.nb Communications (2) 1 to 20 20 ---- ---- ---- 24010 - - - -
Ai.nb CIP Implicit Assem-
bly Input Member
Quantity

C_F Communications (2) F °F (30) °F Instance 2 0x96 199 17050 uint

C_F Display Units C °C (15) Map 1 Map 2 (150) RWE
Select which scale - - - - 2990 2
to use for tempera- 6
ture passed over
communications
port 2.

nU.S Communications (2) yEs Yes (106) No Instance 2 96 (150) 198 17051 uint
nU.S Non-volatile Save no No (59) Map 1 Map 2 2 RWE
If set to Yes all 2514 2994 8
values written to
the control will be
saved in EEPROM.
The EEPROM allows
for approximately
one million writes.

Profibus DP
P.Add Communications (2) 0 to 126 126 ---- ---- ---- 17060 - - - -
P.Add Profibus Node Ad-
dress
Set the Profibus ad-
dress for this con-
trol.
a.Loc Communications (2) no No (59) No ---- ---- ---- 17061 - - - -
A.Loc Profibus Address yES Yes (106)
Lock
When set to yes will
not allow address
to be changed using
software. Can be
changed from front
panel.
C_F Communications (2) F °F (30) °F Instance 2 0x96 199 17050 uint
C_F Display Units C °C (15) Map 1 Map 2 (150) RWE
Select which scale - - - - 2990 2
to use for tempera- 6
ture passed over
communications
port 2.
* These parameters/prompts are available in these menus with firmware revisions 11.0 and above.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 138 • Cha pte r 6 Se tup Pa g e

 Setup Page
CIP - Data
Modbus Class Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance fibus eter and
Description
dress Attribute Index ID Access
hex (dec) **
nU.S Communications (2) yEs Yes (106) No Instance 2 96 (150) 198 17051 uint
nU.S Non-volatile Save no No (59) Map 1 Map 2 2 RWE
If set to Yes all 2514 2994 8
values written to
the control will be
saved in EEPROM.
The EEPROM allows
for approximately
one million writes.

Modbus TCP or EtherNet/IP

ЛЏ.hL Communications (2) Lohi Low-High Low-High Instance 1 0x96 ---- 17043 uint
M.hL Modbus Word Order (1331) Map 1 Map 2 (150) RWE
Select the word hiLo High-Low 2488 2968 1 to 2
order of the two (1330) Instance 2 5
16-bit words in the Map 1 Map 2
floating-point val- 2508 2988
ues.

iP.ЛЏ Communications (2) dhCP DHCP (1281) DHCP ---- ---- ---- 17012 - - - -
iP.M IP Address Mode F.Add Fixed Address
Select DHCP to let a (1284)
DHCP server assign
an address to this
module.
Note:
When changing IP address, the control power must be cycled for the new address to take effect.

iP.F1 Communications (2) 0 to 255 169 ---- ---- ---- 17014 - - - -

ip.F1 IP Fixed Address
Part 1
Set the IP address
of this module.
Each device on the
network must have
a unique address.
iP.F2 Communications (2) 0 to 255 254 ---- ---- ---- 17015 - - - -
ip.F2 IP Fixed Address
Part 2
Set the IP address
of this module.
Each device on the
network must have
a unique address.
* These parameters/prompts are available in these menus with firmware revisions 11.0 and above.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 139 • Cha pte r 6 Se tu p Pa g e

 Setup Page
CIP - Data
Modbus Class Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance fibus eter and
Description
dress Attribute Index ID Access
hex (dec) **
iP.F3 Communications (2) 0 to 255 1 ---- ---- ---- 17016 - - - -
ip.F3 IP Fixed Address
Part 3
Set the IP address
of this module.
Each device on the
network must have
a unique address.
iP.F4 Communications (2) 0 to 255 1 ---- ---- ---- 17017 - - - -
ip.F4 IP Fixed Address
Part 4
Set the IP address
of this module.
Each device on the
network must have
a unique address.
iP.S1 Communications (2) 0 to 255 255 ---- ---- ---- 17020 - - - -
ip.S1 IP Fixed Subnet
Part 1
Set the IP subnet
mask for this mod-
ule.
iP.S2 Communications (2) 0 to 255 255 ---- ---- ---- 17021 - - - -
ip.S2 IP Fixed Subnet
Part 2
Set the IP subnet
mask for this mod-
ule.
iP.S3 Communications (2) 0 to 255 0 ---- ---- ---- 17022 - - - -
ip.S3 IP Fixed Subnet
Part 3
Set the IP subnet
mask for this mod-
ule.
iP.S4 Communications (2) 0 to 255 0 ---- ---- ---- 17023 - - - -
ip.S4 IP Fixed Subnet
Part 4
Set the IP subnet
mask for this mod-
ule.
iP.S5 Communications (2) 0 to 255 0 ---- ---- ---- 17024 - - - -
ip.S5 IP Fixed Subnet
Part 5
Set the IP subnet
mask for this mod-
ule
* These parameters/prompts are available in these menus with firmware revisions 11.0 and above.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 140 • Cha pte r 6 Se tup Pa g e

 Setup Page
CIP - Data
Modbus Class Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance fibus eter and
Description
dress Attribute Index ID Access
hex (dec) **
iP.S6 Communications (2) 0 to 255 0 ---- ---- ---- 17025 - - - -
ip.S6 IP Fixed Subnet
Part 6
Set the IP subnet
mask for this mod-
ule.
iP.g1 Communications (2) 0 to 255 0 ---- ---- ---- 17026 - - - -
ip.g1 Fixed IP Gateway
Part 1
Used for the pur-
pose of sending and
receiving messages
from another net-
work.
iP.g2 Communications (2) 0 to 255 0 ---- ---- ---- 17027 - - - -
ip.g2 Fixed IP Gateway
Part 2
Used for the pur-
pose of sending and
receiving messages
from another net-
work.
iP.g3 Communications (2) 0 to 255 0 ---- ---- ---- 17028 - - - -
ip.g3 Fixed IP Gateway
Part 3
Used for the pur-
pose of sending and
receiving messages
from another net-
work.
iP.g4 Communications (2) 0 to 255 0 ---- ---- ---- 17029 - - - -
ip.g4 Fixed IP Gateway
Part 4
Used for the pur-
pose of sending and
receiving messages
from another net-
work.
iP.g5 Communications (2) 0 to 255 0 ---- ---- ---- 17030 - - - -
ip.g5 Fixed IP Gateway
Part 5
Used for the pur-
pose of sending and
receiving messages
from another net-
work.
* These parameters/prompts are available in these menus with firmware revisions 11.0 and above.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 141 • Cha pte r 6 Se tu p Pa g e

 Setup Page
CIP - Data
Modbus Class Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance fibus eter and
Description
dress Attribute Index ID Access
hex (dec) **
iP.g6 Communications (2) 0 to 255 0 ---- ---- ---- 17031 - - - -
ip.g6 Fixed IP Gateway
Part 6
Used for the pur-
pose of sending and
receiving messages
from another net-
work.
ЛЏb.E Communications (2) yEs Yes (106) Yes ---- ---- ---- 17041 - - - -
Mb.E Modbus TCP Enable no No (59)
Activate Modbus
TCP.
EiP.E Communications (2) yEs Yes (106) Yes ---- ---- ---- 17042 - - - -
EiP.E EtherNet/IP™ Enable no No (59)
Activate Ethernet/
IP™.
ao.nb Communications (2) 1 to 20 20 ---- ---- ---- 24009 - - - -
Ao.nb When using Ether-
Net/IP set the CIP
Implicit Assembly
Output Member
Quantity

ai.nb Communications (2) 1 to 20 20 ---- ---- ---- 24010 - - - -

Ai.nb When using Ether-
Net/IP set the CIP
Implicit Assembly
Input Member
Quantity

C_F Communications (2) F °F (30) °F Instance 2 0x96 199 17050 uint

C_F Display Units C °C (15) Map 1 Map 2 (150) RWE
Select which scale - - - - 2990 2
to use for tempera- 6
ture passed over
communications
port 2.

nU.S Communications (2) yEs Yes (106) No Instance 2 96 (150) 198 17051 uint
nU.S Non-volatile Save no No (59) Map 1 Map 2 2 RWE
If set to Yes all 2514 2994 8
values written to
the control will be
saved in EEPROM.
The EEPROM allows
for approximately
one million writes.
Note:
When changing IP address, the control power must be cycled for the new address to take effect.
* These parameters/prompts are available in these menus with firmware revisions 11.0 and above.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 142 • Cha pte r 6 Se tup Pa g e

 Setup Page
CIP - Data
Modbus Class Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Instance fibus eter and
Description
dress Attribute Index ID Access
hex (dec) **
rtC
SEt
Real Time Clock Menu
hoUr Real Time Clock 0 to 23 0 Instance 1 88 (136) - - - - 36003 uint
hoUr Hours Map 1 Map 2 1 RW
Set the current - - - - 4004 3
time.
ЛЏin Real Time Clock 0 to 59 0 Instance 1 88 (136) - - - - 36004 uint
Min Minutes Map 1 Map 2 1 RW
Set the current - - - - 4006 4
time.
doФІ Real Time Clock sun Sunday (1565) Sun Instance 1 88 (136) - - - - 36002 uint
doW Day of Week ЛЏon Monday (1559) Map 1 Map 2 1 RW
Set the current day tuE Tuesday (1560) - - - - 4002 2
of the week. ФІEd Wednesday
(1561)
thUr Thursday (1562)
fri Friday (1563)
sat Saturday (1564)
* These parameters/prompts are available in these menus with firmware revisions 11.0 and above.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 143 • Cha pte r 6 Se tu p Pa g e

 7 Chapter 7: Profiling Page
Navigating the Profiling Page
Note:
Some of these menus and parameters may not appear, depending on the controller's op-
tions. See model number information in the Appendix for more information. If there is
only one instance of a menu, no submenus will appear.

Profile Setup
First, consider some foundational profile setup features that once configured, will apply to all
configured profiles. The screen shot below (EZ-ZONE Configurator software) graphically shows
the settings (shaded green)that will apply to all profiles; e.g., if Guaranteed Soak is not en-
abled here this feature will not be available in any individual profile configuration.
Some of those features that apply to all profiles are listed below with a brief description of
their function.
- Ramping Type (Time or
Rate) which changes the
profile set point based
on a set interval of
time or set rate.
- Profile Type (Set Point
or Process) determines
whether a step (any
step changing the set
point) of a profile will
begin by using the pro-
cess value (Process) or
the last closed-loop set
point (Set Point).
- Guaranteed Soak En-
able, when set to on
makes this feature avail-
able in all profiles. If
Guaranteed Soak Enable
is on, use Guaranteed
Soak Deviation 1 to 2 to set the value for the corresponding loop. Set the deviation or band
above or below the working set point where this condition must be met before the profile
can proceed.
Note:
Changes made to profile parameters in the Profiling Pages will be saved and take effect
on the next pass through the step. Changes made in the Profile Status page effect the cur-
rent step being executed and do not update the step setting in the profiling page. Chang-
ing profiles should only be changed by knowledgeable personnel and with caution.
Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 144 • Cha pte r 7 Pr ofili n g Pa g e
 Once these global profile features are configured, the next step will require navigation to the
Profiling Page. Here, each desired ramp and soak profile will be configured.
To navigate to the Profile Page from the front panel, follow the steps below:
1. From the Home Page, press and hold the Advance Key ‰ for approximately five seconds.
The profile prompt pro f will appear in the lower display and the profile number (e.g. p1)
appears in the upper display.
2. Press the Up ¿ or Down ¯ key to change to another profile (1 to 4).
3. Press the Advance Key ‰ to move to the selected profiles first step.
4. Press the Up ¿ or Down ¯ keys to move through and select the step type.
5. Press the Advance Key ‰ to move through the selected step settings.
6. Press the Up ¿ or Down ¯ keys to change the steps settings.
7. Press the Infinity Key ˆ at any time to return to the step number prompt.
8. Press the Infinity Key ˆ again to return to the profile number prompt.
9. From any point press and hold the Infinity Key ˆ for two seconds to return to the Home
Page.
If using EZ-ZONE
Configurator software,
simply click on the plus
sign next to Profiles in
the left hand column,
as shown in the screen
shot below.
Notice in the screen
shot to the right some
fields or parameters
are not selectable
(grayed out) based on
the Step Type that is
selected.

Starting a Profile
There are several ways
to start a profile. Some
of the examples that
follow requires that
certain optional hard-
ware be available on
the control. If you
are uncertain as to
how your control is
equipped, compare the part number of your control to the "Ordering Information" page found
in the Appendix of this Users Guide.
Three ways to start a profile:
- Function Key, Digital Input or Profile Request

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 145 • Cha pte r 7 Pr ofili n g Pa g e

 Configuring the Function Key to Start and Stop a Profile
1. Navigate to the Setup Page and then the Function menu. From the Home Page, press and
hold the ¿ or Down ¯ key for approximately six seconds where the upper display will show
ai and the lower display will show SEt.
2. Press the Up ¿ or Down ¯ key to navigate to the Function FUn menu.
3. Press the Advance Key ‰ to enter this menu. The upper display will show 1 and the lower
display will show fUn.
4. Press the Advance Key ‰ to select the level. The upper display will show hig h and the
lower display will show LEv.
5. Press the Up ¿ or Down ¯ keys to select the level that will start the profile (high or low).
6. Press the Advance Key ‰ to select the function. In this example, select Profile Start / Stop
p . s ts.
7. Press the Advance Key ‰ to select the function instance (Profile to start).
8. Return to the Home Page by pressing and holding the Infinity Key ˆ for approximately
three seconds.
Note:
The state of the EZ-Function Key (high or low) is maintained with each successive push of
the key.
Configuring a Digital Input to Start and Stop a Profile
1. Navigate to the Setup Page and then the Digital I/O menu. From the Home Page, press and
hold the ¿ or Down ¯ key for approximately six seconds where the upper display will show
ai and the lower display will show SEt.
2. Press the Up ¿ or Down ¯ key to navigate to the Digital I/O menu. Upper display will
show di o and the lower display will show SEt.
3. Press the Advance Key ‰ where the first available digital instance will be displayed in the
upper display.
4. Press the Up ¿ or Down ¯ key to select the input of choice.
5. Press the Advance Key ‰ to select the direction (input or output). In this example, select
Dry Contact iCo n.
6. Select the level (high or low) that will activate the function by pressing the Advance Key ‰
where the upper display will show hig h and the lower display will show LEv.
7. Press the Up ¿ or Down ¯ keys to select the level that will start the profile (high = closed
or low = open).
8. Press the Advance Key ‰ to select the function fn. In this example, select Profile Start /
Stop P. s ts.
9. Press the Advance Key ‰ to select the function instance (Profile to start).
10. Return to the Home Page by pressing and holding the Infinity Key ˆ for approximately
three seconds.
Starting a Profile from the Operations Page
1. Navigate to the Operations Page and then the Profile Status menu. From the Home Page,
press and hold the ¿ or Down ¯ key for approximately three seconds where the upper dis-
play will show ai and the lower display will show o pEr.
2. Press the Up ¿ or Down ¯ key to navigate to the Profile Status P. s ta menu.

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 146 • Cha pte r 7 Pr ofili n g Pa g e

 3. Press the Advance Key ‰ to enter this menu. The upper display will show 1 and the lower
display will show p . s tr.
4. Press the Up ¿ or Down ¯ keys to select the Profile or Step to start. In this example select
1.
5. Press the Advance Key ‰ to select the Profile Action Request. The upper display will show
n o nE and the lower display will show p . aCr.
6. Press the Up ¿ or Down ¯ keys to select the Profile start. The upper display will show
pro f and the lower display will show p . aCr.
Note:
As soon as the Green Advance Key ‰ is pressed (step 7 below) the designated Profile or
Step (as determined in step 4 above) will start.
7. Press the Advance Key ‰ to select whether Event 1 will be on or off. The upper display
will show o ff and the lower display will show En t1.
Note:
This setting will temporally override the profile configuration.
8. Press the Up ¿ or Down ¯ keys to select whether Event 1 will be on or off. This will imme-
diately drive the Event to the specified state regardless of the Profile configuration.
9. Press the Advance Key ‰ to select whether Event 2 will be on or off. The upper display
will show o ff and the lower display will show En t2.
10. Press the Up ¿ or Down ¯ keys to select whether Event 2 will be on or off. This will im-
mediately drive the Event to the specified state regardless of the Profile configuration.
Note:
The event state will be as left when the profile ended and may be toggled at the profile
status menu.
11. Press the Advance Key ‰ to see the current Jump Count. The upper display will show 0
and the lower display will show JC.
12. Return to the Home Page by pressing and holding the Infinity Key ˆ for approximately
three seconds.
Ending a Profile from the Operations Page
1. Navigate to the Operations Page and then the Profile Status menu. From the Home Page,
press and hold the ¿ or Down ¯ key for approximately three seconds where the upper dis-
play will show ai and the lower display will show o pEr.
2. Press the Up ¿ or Down ¯ key to navigate to the Profile Status p . s ta menu.
3. Press the Advance Key ‰ to enter this menu. The upper display will show 1 and the lower
display will show p . s tr.
4. Press the Advance Key ‰ to select the Profile Action Request. The upper display will show
n o nE and the lower display will show p . aCr.
6. Press the Up ¿ or Down ¯ keys to select the End. The upper display will show En d and
the lower display will show P. aCr.
7. Press the Advance Key ‰ to end the Profile.
8. Return to the Home Page by pressing and holding the Infinity Key ˆ for approximately
three seconds.

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 147 • Cha pte r 7 Pr ofilin g Pa g e

 Starting a Profile from the Home Page
1. When at the Home Page, press the Advance Key ‰ to locate Profile Start and select the
file or step number to start. The upper display will show 1 and the lower display will show
p . s t1.
2. Press the Up ¿ or Down ¯ key to choose the file or step number.
3. Press the Advance Key ‰ to select the Profile Action Request. The upper display will show
n o nE and the lower display will show p . aC1.
4. Press the Up ¿ or Down ¯ keys to select the Profile Start. The upper display will show
pro f and the lower display will show p . aC1.
5. Press the Infinity Key to return Home. The Profile will Start
Ending a Profile from the Home Page
1. Press the Advance Key ‰ to select the Profile Action Request. The upper display will show
n o nE and the lower display will show p . AC!.
2. Press the Up ¿ or Down ¯ keys to select the End. The upper display will show En d and
the lower display will show p . aC1.
3. Press the Infinity Key to return Home. The Profile will End.

Profiling Parameters
p1
prof Profile (1 to 4)
1
P1 Profile [1 to 4] Step (1 to 40)
s.typ Step Type
t.SP1 Target Set Point Loop 1
t.SP2 Target Set Point Loop 2
hoUr Hours
ЛЏin Minutes
SEC Seconds
ratE Rate
ФІ.pi Wait For Process Instance
ФІ.P1 Wait For Process 1
ФІ.E1 Wait For Event 1
ФІE.2 Wait for Event 2
doФІ Day of Week
Js Jump Step
JC Jump Count
End End Type
Ent1 Event 1
Ent2 Event 2

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 148 • Cha pte r 7 Pr ofiling Pa g e

 Profiling Page

CIP Data
Pa-
Modbus Class Type
Parameter Name ram-
Display Range Default Relative Instance and
Description eter
Address Attribute Access
ID
hex (dec) **
P1
prof
Profiling Menu
p1 Profile [1 to 4] Step 1 to 10 [profile 1] ---- ---- ---- ----
P1 to Select a step to edit or view. 11 to 20 [profile 2]
p4 21 to 30 [profile 3]
P4 31 to 40 [profile 4]

S.typ Step Type UStP Unused Step Unused Instance 1 0x79 (121) 21001 uint
S.typ Select a step type. (50) Map 1 Map 2 1 to 40 RWE
SoAH Soak (87) 2570 4500 1
Note:
Prior to selecting the Step
ФІ.E Wait For Event
(144) Offset to
Type consider whether or next in-
not profiles will be based
ФІ.Pr Wait For Pro-
cess (209) stance (Map
on time or rate of change. 1 equals
By default, profiles are
ФІ.bo Wait For Both
(210) +50, Map 2
configured for Time ti. equals +100)
Therefore, Rate will not
JL Jump (116)
be available here. If it is
End End (27)
desired to base profiles on
CLoC Wait For Time
(1543)
rate of change, navigate
to the Setup Page and then
ti Time (143)
the Global Menu where
ratE Rate (81)
Ramping Type can be
changed from Time to Rate.
t.SP1 Step Type Parameters -1,999.000 to 0.0°F or Instance 1 0x79 (121) 21002 float
t.SP1 Target Set Point Loop 1 9,999.000°F or units Map 1 Map 2 1 to 40 RWE
When Step Type is Time or units -18°C 2572 4502 2
Rate, enter the closed loop -1,128 to
set point for loop 1 to ramp 5,537.000°C Offset to
to for this step. next in-
stance (Map
1 equals
+50, Map 2
equals +100)
Note:
Some values will be rounded off to fit in the four-character display. Full values can be read with other inter-
faces.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 149 • Cha pte r 7 Pr ofilin g Pa g e

 Profiling Page

CIP Data
Pa-
Modbus Class Type
Parameter Name ram-
Display Range Default Relative Instance and
Description eter
Address Attribute Access
ID
hex (dec) **
t.SP2 Step Type Parameters -1,999.000 to 0.0°F or Instance 1 0x79 (121) 21028 float
t.SP2 Target Set Point Loop 2 9,999.000°F or units Map 1 Map 2 1 to 40 RWE
When Step Type is Time en- units -18°C - - - - 4554 0x1C (28)
ter the closed loop set point -1,128 to
for loop 2 to ramp to for this 5,537.000°C Offset to
step. next in-
stance Map
2 equals
+100
hoUr Step Type Parameters 0 to 99 0 Instance 1 0x79 (121) 21003 uint
hoUr Hours Map 1 Map 2 1 to 40 RWE
Select the hours (plus Min- 2574 4504 3
utes and Seconds) for a
timed step. Offset to
next in-
stance (Map
1 equals
+50, Map 2
equals +100)
ЛЏin Step Type Parameters 0 to 59 0 Instance 1 0x79 (121) 21004 uint
Min Minutes Map 1 Map 2 1 to 40 RWE
When Step Type is Time, 2576 4506 4
Soak, or Wait For Time enter
Minutes (plus Hours and Sec- Offset to
onds) for this step. next in-
stance (Map
1 equals
+50, Map 2
equals +100)
SEC Step Type Parameters 0 to 59 0 Instance 1 0x79 (121) 21005 uint
SEC Seconds Map 1 Map 2 1 to 40 RWE
When Step Type is Time, 2578 4508 5
Soak, or Wait For Time enter
Seconds (plus Hours and Min- Offset to
utes) for this step. next in-
stance (Map
1 equals
+50, Map 2
equals +100)
Note:
Some values will be rounded off to fit in the four-character display. Full values can be read with other inter-
faces.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 150 • Cha pte r 7 Pr ofiling Pa g e

 Profiling Page

CIP Data
Pa-
Modbus Class Type
Parameter Name ram-
Display Range Default Relative Instance and
Description eter
Address Attribute Access
ID
hex (dec) **
ratE Step Type Parameters 0 to 9,999.000°F or 0.0 Instance 1 0x79 (121) 21006 float
rAtE Rate units per minute Map 1 Map 2 1 to 40 RWE
When Step Type is Rate, en- 0 to 5,555.000°C per 2580 4510 6
ter the rate for ramping in minute
degrees or units per minute. Offset to
next in-
stance (Map
1 equals
+50, Map 2
equals +100)
ФІ.Pi Step Type Parameters 1 or 2 1 Instance 1 0x79 (121) 21015 uint
W.Pi Wait For Process Instance Map 1 Map 2 1 to 40 RWE
When Step Type is Wait for 2598 4528 0x0F (15)
Process or Wait For Both,
enter which analog input Offset to
specified by Wait For Process next in-
1 must be met before pro- stance (Map
ceeding in profile. 1 equals
+50, Map 2
equals +100)
ФІ.P1 Step Type Parameters -1,999.000 to 0.0°F or Instance 1 0x79 (121) 21011 float
W.P1 Wait For Process 1 9,999.000°F or units Map 1 Map 2 1 to 40 RWE
When Step Type is Wait for units -18.0°C 2590 4520 0x0B (11)
Process or Wait For Both, -1,128.000 to
enter wait for process value 5,537.000°C Offset to
on analog next in-
input specified by Wait For stance (Map
Process Instance before pro- 1 equals
ceeding in profile. +50, Map 2
equals +100)
Note:
Some values will be rounded off to fit in the four-character display. Full values can be read with other inter-
faces.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 151 • Cha pte r 7 Pr ofilin g Pa g e

 Profiling Page

CIP Data
Pa-
Modbus Class Type
Parameter Name ram-
Display Range Default Relative Instance and
Description eter
Address Attribute Access
ID
hex (dec) **
ФІE.1 Step Type Parameters oFF Off (62) Off Instance 1 0x79 (121) 21009 uint
WE.1 Wait Event 1 on On (63) Map 1 Map 2 1 to 10 RWE
When Step Type is Wait for nonE None (61) 2586 4516 9
Event or Wait For Both,
select the event state that Offset to
must next in-
be satisfied during this step. stance (Map
1 equals
Note:
+50, Map 2
Wait Event 1 can be equals +100)
mapped to any available
digital input (5 - 12). Navi-
gate to the Setup Page un-
der the Global Menu to find
and modify Source Instance
A s.ia (Event 1) and Source
Instance B s.ib (Event 2).
ФІE.2 Step Type Parameters oFF Off (62) Off Instance 1 0x79 (121) 21010 uint
WE.2 Wait Event 2 on On (63) Map 1 Map 2 1 to 40 RWE
When Step Type is Wait for nonE None (61) 2588 4518 0xA (10)
Event or Wait For Both,
select the event state that Offset to
must next in-
be satisfied during this step. stance (Map
1 equals
Note:
+50, Map 2
Wait Event 2 can be equals +100)
mapped to any available
digital input (5 - 12). Navi-
gate to the Setup Page un-
der the Global Menu to find
and modify Source Instance
A s.ia (Event 1) and Source
Instance B s.ib (Event 2).
doФІ Step Type Parameters Ed Every Day (1567) Sunday Instance 1 0x79 (121) 21041 uint
dow Day of Week ФІd Week days Map 1 Map 2 1 to 40 RWE
When Step Type is Wait for (1566) - - - - 4580 0x29 (41)
Time, the profile waits until sun Sunday (1565)
this Day of Week along with ЛЏon Monday (1559) Offset to
Hours, Minutes and Seconds tuE Tuesday (1560) next in-
time of day is met. ФІEd Wednesday stance Map
(1561) 2 equals
thUr Thursday +100)
(1562)
fri Friday (1563)
sat Saturday (1564)
Note:
Some values will be rounded off to fit in the four-character display. Full values can be read with other inter-
faces.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 152 • Cha pte r 7 Pr ofiling Pa g e

 Profiling Page

CIP Data
Pa-
Modbus Class Type
Parameter Name ram-
Display Range Default Relative Instance and
Description eter
Address Attribute Access
ID
hex (dec) **
JS Step Type Parameters 1 to 40 0 Instance 1 0x79 (121) 21012 uint
JS Jump Step Map 1 Map 2 1 to 40 RWE
When Step Type is Jump, 2592 4522 0xC (12)
this specifies which step to
jump back to. Jump Step Offset to
must be a lower step num- next in-
ber than the current step stance (Map
number. 1 equals
+50, Map 2
equals +100)
JC Step Type Parameters 0 to 9,999 0 Instance 1 0x79 (121) 21013 uint
JC Jump Count Map 1 Map 2 1 to 40 RWE
When Step Type is Jump, 2594 4524 0xD (13)
this specifies the number of
jumps to repeat. A value Offset to
of 0 creates an infinite loop. next in-
Loops can be nested four stance (Map
deep. 1 equals
+50, Map 2
equals +100)
End Step Type Parameters oFF Control Mode Off Instance 1 0x79 (121) 21014 uint
End End Type set to Off (62) Map 1 Map 1 to 40 RWE
When Step Type is End, this Hold Hold last 2 0xE (14)
specifies what the control- closed-loop set 2596 4526
ler will do when this profile point in the profile
ends. (47) Offset to
USEr User, reverts next in-
to previous set stance (Map
point (100) 1 equals
+50, Map 2
equals +100)
Ent1 Step Type Parameters oFF Off (62) Off Instance 1 0x79 (121) 21007 uint
Ent1 Event 1 on On (63) Map 1 Map 1 to 40 RWE
When Step Type is not Un- 2 7
used Step, select whether 2582 4512
Event Output 1 or 2 is on or
off during this step. Offset to
next in-
stance (Map
1 equals
+50, Map 2
equals +100)
Note:
Some values will be rounded off to fit in the four-character display. Full values can be read with other inter-
faces.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 153 • Cha pte r 7 Pr ofilin g Pa g e

 Profiling Page

CIP Data
Pa-
Modbus Class Type
Parameter Name ram-
Display Range Default Relative Instance and
Description eter
Address Attribute Access
ID
hex (dec) **
Ent2 Step Type Parameters oFF Off (62) Off Instance 1 0x79 (121) 21008 uint
Ent2 Event 2 on On (63) Map 1 Map 2 1 to 40 RWE
When Step Type is not Un- 2584 4514 8
used Step, select whether
Event Output 1 or 2 is on or Offset to
off during this step. next in-
stance (Map
1 equals
+50, Map 2
equals +100)
Note:
Some values will be rounded off to fit in the four-character display. Full values can be read with other inter-
faces.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Display Step Type Description Parameters in Step Type

UStP Step Types
UStP Unused Step
This is an empty step that can be used to plan for future steps ----
to be inserted or temporarily deactivate a step in a profile.
Change step type back when the step should be active again.
ti Step Types tg.S1 Target Set Point Loop 1
ti Time tg.S2 Target Set Point Loop 2
If Ramping Type found in the Global Menu of the Setup Page
hoUr Hours
is set for Time, the control loop will follow set point over the
specified time. If two loops of control are present then they will
ЛЏin Minutes
both follow independent set points over the specified time. The SEC Seconds
state of up to 2 event outputs may be set or maintained. Ent1 Event 1
Ent2 Event 2
rAtE Step Types tg.S1 Target Set Point Loop 1
rAtE Rate tg.S2 Target Set Point Loop 2
If Ramping Type found in the Global Menu of the Setup Page is
rAtE Rate
set for Rate, specify the rate of change in degrees or units per
minute. The state of up to 2 event outputs may be set or main-
Ent1 Event 1
tained. Ent2 Event 2

SoAH Step Types hoUr Hours

SoAh Soak ЛЏin Minutes
A Soak Step maintains the last Target Set Points for the desig-
SEC Seconds
nated time. The state of up to 2 event outputs may be set or
maintained.
Ent1 Event 1
Ent2 Event 2
CLoC Step Types hoUr Hours
CLoC Wait For Time ЛЏin Minutes
A Wait for Time Step is available with the real-time calendar
SEC Seconds
clock feature. This allows the program to wait for a specified
day and time before proceeding to the next step. Used to have
doФІ Day of Week
the profile execute steps everyday or only weekdays. The state Ent1 Event 1
of up to 2 event outputs may be set or maintained. Ent2 Event 2

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 154 • Cha pte r 7 Pr ofiling Pa g e

 Display Step Type Description Parameters in Step Type
ФІ.E Step Types ФІE.1 Wait Event 1
W.E Wait For Event ФІE.2 Wait Event 2
A Wait for Event Step will wait for the two Wait for Event states
Ent1 Event 1
(1 to 2) to match the specified state. The state of up to 2 event
outputs may be set or maintained.
Ent2 Event 2

ФІ.pr Step Types ФІ.p1 Wait for Process 1

W.Pr Wait For Process ФІ.p2 Wait for Process 2
A Wait for Process Step will wait for Process Value 1 or 2 to
Ent1 Event 1
match the Wait for Process Value. The state of up to 2 event
outputs may be set or maintained.
Ent2 Event 2

ФІ.bo Step Types ФІ.p1 Wait for Process 1

W.bo Wait For Both ФІ.p2 Wait for Process 2
A Wait For Process and Event Step will wait for Process Value 1
ФІE.1 Wait Event 1
or 2 to match the Wait for Process 1 value, and/or the two Wait
ФІE.2
Event states to match the specified state. The state of up to 2
Wait Event 2
event outputs may be set or maintained. Ent1 Event 1
Ent2 Event 2
JL Step Types JS Jump Step
JL Jump JC Jump Count
A Jump step will repeat previous steps a number of times
Ent1 Event 1
designated in Jump Count. Jumps can be nested up to four
deep. The state of up to 2 event outputs may be set or main-
Ent2 Event 2
tained.
End Step Types End End Type
End End Ent1 Event 1
An End Step will end the profile and set the control modes and
Ent2 Event 2
set points to match the End Type. The state of up to 2 event
outputs may be set or maintained. The event outputs will not
be set off unless specifically stated in this step. If a profile does
not have an End Step, the profile continues until step 40, then
stops and maintains the last set points and control modes.

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 155 • Cha pte r 7 Pr ofilin g Pa g e

 8 Chapter 8: Factory Page
Navigating the Factory Page
To navigate to the Factory Page follow the steps below:
1. From the Home Page, press and hold both the Advance ‰ and Infinity ˆ keys for six sec-
onds.
2. Press the Up ¿ or Down ¯ key to view available menus.
3. Press the Advance Key ‰ to enter the menu of choice.
4. If a submenu exists (more than one instance), press the Up ¿ or Down ¯ key to select and
then press the Advance Key ‰ to enter.
5. Press the Up ¿ or Down ¯ key to move through available menu prompts.
6. Press the Infinity Key ˆ to move backwards through the levels: parameter to submenu, sub-
menu to menu, menu to Home Page.
7.Press and hold the Infinity Key ˆ for two seconds to return to the Home Page.
On the following pages, top level menus are identified with a yellow background color.
Note:
Some of these menus and parameters may not appear, depending on the controller's op-
tions. See model number information in the Appendix for more information. If there is
only one instance of a menu, no submenus will appear.
Note:
Some of the listed parameters may not be visible. Parameter visibility is dependent upon
controller part number.

CUSt ULoC
FCty Custom Setup Menu FCty Security Setting Menu
1 CodE Public Key
CUSt Custom Setup (1 to 20) pass Password
par Parameter
iid Instance ID diAg
LoC FCty Diagnostics Menu
FCty Security Setting Menu diAg Diagnostics
LoC Security Setting Pn Part Number
LoC.o Operations Page rEu Software Revision
LoC.P Profiling Page S.bld Software Build Number
pas.E Password Enabled Sn Serial Number
RLoC Read Lock dAtE Date of Manufacture
SLoC Write Security ip.aC IP Actual Address Mode
LoC.L Locked Access Level ip.a1 IP Actual Address Part 1
roLL Rolling Password ip.a2 IP Actual Address Part 2
pas.u User Password ip.a3 IP Actual Address Part 3
pas.a Administrator Password ip.a4 IP Actual Address Part 4

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 156 • Cha pte r 8 F a c to r y Pa g e

 ip.a5 IP Actual Address Part 5
ip.a6 IP Actual Address Part 6
CAL
FCty Calibration Menu
1
Cal Calibration (1 to 2)
ЛЏu Electrical Measurement
ELi.o Electrical Input Offset
ELi.S Electrical Input Slope
ELo.o Electrical Output Offset
ELo.s Electrical Output Slope
Pn Part Number
CodE Code

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 157 • Cha pte r 8 F a c to r y Pa g e

 Factory Page
CIP
Class Data
Modbus Instance Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Attri- fibus eter and
Description
dress bute Index ID Access
hex **
(dec)
Cust
fcty
Custom
par Custom nonE None See: ---- - - - - - - - - 14005 uint
Par Parameter 1 to L.hy Limit Hysteresis Home RWES
20 Lh.S High Limit Set Page
Select the param- Point
eters that will ap- LL.S Low Limit Set Point
pear in the Home CU.r Load Current RMS
Page. Pro Process
The Parameter 1 i.CA Calibration Offset
value will appear C_F Display Units
in the upper dis- USr.r Replace Settings
play of the Home From
Page. It cannot A. L o Low Set Point
be changed with A. h i High Set Point
the Up and Down A. h y Hysteresis
Keys in the Home CUSt Custom Menu
Page. StPt Set Point
AC.pu Active Process
The Parameter Value
2 value will ap- AC.SP Active Set Point
pear in the lower op Manual Power
display in the AUt Autotune
Home Page. It can C.ЛЏ Control Mode
be changed with h.Pr Heat Power
the Up and Down C.Pr Cool Power
Keys, if the pa- ti Time Integral
rameter is a writ- td Time Derivative
able one. db Dead Band
h.Pb Heat Proportional
Scroll through the Band
other Home Page h.hy On/Off Heat Hyster-
parameters with esis
the Advance Key C.Pb Cool Proportional
‰ . Band
Note: C. h y On/Off Cool Hyster-
Display Pairs af- esis
fect the pairing r. r t Ramp Rate
of custom pa- t. t Un TRU-TUNE+® Enable
rameters on the idLE Idle Set Point
Home page. For P.Str Profile Start
more information P.ACr Profile Action Re-
on Display Pairs quest
see the section gSd1 Guaranteed Soak
in this guide en- Deviation 1
titled "Modifying gSd2 Guaranteed Soak
the Display Pairs". Deviation 2

** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 158 • Cha pte r 8 F a c tor y Pa g e

 Factory Page
CIP
Class Data
Modbus Instance Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Attri- fibus eter and
Description
dress bute Index ID Access
hex **
(dec)
iid Custom (1 to 20) 1 to 4 ---- ---- - - - - 14003 uint
iid Instance ID RWES
Select which
instance of the
parameter will
be selected.
LoC
FCty
Lock Menu
LoC.o Security Setting 1 to 3 2 Instance 1 0x67 - - - - 3002 uint
LoC.o Operations Page Map 1 Map 2 (103) RWE
Change the se- 1832 2302 1
curity level of 2
the Operations
Page.
LoC.P Security Setting 1 to 3 3 Instance 1 0x67 - - - - 3008 uint
LoC.P Profiling Page Map 1 Map 2 (103) RWE
Change the 1844 2314 1
security level 8
of the Profiling
Page.
pas.E Security Setting off Off Off ---- ---- - - - - 3009 uint
LoC.P Password Enable on On RWE
Set to On to
require a pass-
word for menu
changes.
rLoC Security Setting 1 to 5 5 Instance 1 0x67 - - - - 3010 uint
rLoC Read Lock Map 1 Map 2 (103) RWE
Set the read se- 1848 2318 1
curity clearance 0x0A
level. The user (10)
can access the
selected level and
all lower levels.
If the Set Lock-
out Security lev-
el is higher than
the Read Lock-
out Security, the
Read Lockout
Security level
takes priority.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 159 • Cha pte r 8 F a c to r y Pa g e

 Factory Page
CIP
Class Data
Modbus Instance Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Attri- fibus eter and
Description
dress bute Index ID Access
hex **
(dec)
SLoC Security Setting 0 to 5 5 Instance 1 0x67 - - - - 3011 uint
SLoC Write Security Map 1 Map 2 (103) RWE
Set the write se- 1844 2314 1
curity clearance 0x0B
level. The user (11)
can access the
selected level
and all lower
levels.
If the Set Lockout
Security level is
higher than the
Read Lockout Se-
curity, the Read
Lockout Security
level takes pri-
ority.
LoC.L Security Setting 1 to 5 5 ---- ---- - - - - 3016 uint
LoC.L Locked Access RWE
Level
Determines user
level menu vis-
ibility when
Password Enable
is set to on. See
Features section
under Password
Security.
roLL Security Setting off Off Off ---- ---- - - - - 3019 uint
roLL Rolling Password on On RWE
When power is
cycled a new
Public Key will
be displayed and
User Password
changes.
pas.u Security Setting 10 to 999 63 ---- ---- - - - - 3017 uint
PAS.u User Password RWE
Used to acquire
access to menus
made available
through the
Locked Access
Level setting.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 160 • Cha pte r 8 F a c tor y Pa g e

 Factory Page
CIP
Class Data
Modbus Instance Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Attri- fibus eter and
Description
dress bute Index ID Access
hex **
(dec)
pas.a Security Setting 10 to 999 156 ---- ---- - - - - 3018 uint
PAS.A Administrator RWE
Password
Used to acquire
full access to all
menus includ-
ing disabling or
changing pass-
words.
LoC
FCty
Unlock Menu
CodE Security Setting Customer Specific 0 ---- ---- - - - - 3020 uint
CodE Public Key R
If Rolling Pass-
word turned
on, generates a
random number
when power is
cycled. If Roll-
ing Password
is off fixed
number will be
displayed. The
key can be used
to gain access
when password
is not known.
pass Security Setting -1999 to 9999 0 ---- ---- - - - - 3022 int
PASS Password RW
Enter the User
or Administrator
password to gain
access. After
valid password
is supplied exit
this menu and
re-enter the
Security Menu
via the Factory
Page.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 161 • Cha pte r 8 F a c to r y Pa g e

 Factory Page
CIP
Class Data
Modbus Instance Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Attri- fibus eter and
Description
dress bute Index ID Access
hex **
(dec)
diag
FCty
Diagnostics Menu
Pn Diagnostics 15 characters ---- ---- 0x65 115 1009 string
Pn Part Number (101) R
Display this 1
controller's part 9
number.
rEu Diagnostics 1 to 10 ---- Instance 1 0x65 116 1003 string
rEu Software Revi- Map 1 Map 2 (101) R
sion 4 4 1
Display this 3
controller's firm-
ware revision
number.
S.bLd Diagnostics 0 to 2,147,483,647 ---- Instance 1 0x65 -- 1005 dint
S.bLd Software Build Map 1 Map 2 (101) -- R
Number 8 8 1
Display the 5
firmware build
number.
Sn Diagnostics 0 to 2,147,483,647 ---- Instance 1 0x65 -- 1032 string
Sn Serial Number Map 1 Map 2 (101) -- R
Display the se- 12 12 1
rial number. 0x20
(32)
dAtE Diagnostics 0 to 2,147,483,647 ---- Instance 1 0x65 -- 1008 dint
dAtE Date of Manu- Map 1 Map 2 (101) -- R
facture 14 14 1
Display the date 8
code (YYWW).
Where YY = year
and WW= week..
No Dis- Diagnostics 0 to 2,147,483,647 ---- Instance 1 0x65 -- 1001 dint
play Hardware ID Map 1 Map 2 (101) -- R
Display the 0 0 1
Hardware ID. 1
No Dis- Diagnostics 0 to 2,147,483,647 ---- Instance 1 0x65 -- 1002 dint
play Firmware ID Map 1 Map 2 (101) -- R
Display the 2 2 1
Firmware ID. 2
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 162 • Cha pte r 8 F a c tor y Pa g e

 Factory Page
CIP
Class Data
Modbus Instance Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Attri- fibus eter and
Description
dress bute Index ID Access
hex **
(dec)
iP.aC Diagnostics dhCP DHCP (1281) DHCP ---- ---- - - - - 17013 - - - -
iP.AC IP Address Mode F.Add Fixed Address
Actual address (1284)
mode (DHCP or
Fixed).
iP.A1 Diagnostics 0 to 255 169 ---- ---- - - - - 17014 R
ip.A1 IP Actual Address
Part 1
Actual IP address
of this module.

Note:
Although it ap-
pears as if this
can be changed
here this is a read
only parameter.
Go to Setup Page
and then the Com
Menu to change.
iP.A2 Diagnostics 0 to 255 254 ---- ---- - - - - 17015 R
ip.A2 IP Actual Address
Part 2
Actual IP address
of this module.

Note:
Although it ap-
pears as if this
can be changed
here this is a read
only parameter.
Go to Setup Page
and then the Com
Menu to change.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 163 • Cha pte r 8 F a c to r y Pa g e

 Factory Page
CIP
Class Data
Modbus Instance Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Attri- fibus eter and
Description
dress bute Index ID Access
hex **
(dec)
iP.A3 Diagnostics 0 to 255 1 ---- ---- - - - - 17016 R
ip.A3 IP Actual Address
Part 3
Actual IP address
of this module.

Note:
Although it ap-
pears as if this
can be changed
here this is a read
only parameter.
Go to Setup Page
and then the Com
Menu to change.
iP.A4 Diagnostics 0 to 255 1 ---- ---- - - - - 17017 R
ip.A4 IP Actual Address
Part 4
Actual IP address
of this module.

Note:
Although it ap-
pears as if this
can be changed
here this is a read
only parameter.
Go to Setup Page
and then the Com
Menu to change.
CAL
FCty
Calibration Menu
ЛЏu Calibration (1 -3.4e38 to 3.4e38 Instance 1 0x68 -- 4021 float
Mv to 2) Map 1 Map 2 (104) -- R
Electrical Mea- 400 400 1 to 2
surement Instance 2 0x15
Read the raw Map 1 Map 2 (21)
electrical value 480 490
for this input in
the units cor-
responding to
the Sensor Type
(Setup Page, An-
alog Input Menu)
setting.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 164 • Cha pte r 8 F a c tor y Pa g e

 Factory Page
CIP
Class Data
Modbus Instance Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Attri- fibus eter and
Description
dress bute Index ID Access
hex **
(dec)
ELi.o Calibration (1 -1,999.000 to 9,999.000 0.0 Instance 1 0x68 -- 4010 float
ELi.o to 2) Map 1 Map 2 (104) -- RWES
Electrical Input 378 378 1 to 2
Offset Instance 2 0x0A
Change this val- Map 1 Map 2 (10)
ue to calibrate 458 468
the low end of
the input range.
ELi.S Calibration (1 -1,999.000 to 9,999.000 1.0 Instance 1 0x68 -- 4011 float
ELi.S to 2) Map 1 Map 2 (104) -- RWES
Electrical Input 380 380 1 to 2
Slope Instance 2 0xB
Adjust this value Map 1 Map 2 (11)
to calibrate the 460 470
slope of the in-
put value.
ELo.o Calibration (1 -1,999.000 to 9,999.000 0.0 Instance 1 0x76 -- 18005 float
ELo.o or 3) Map 1 Map 2 (118) -- RWES
Electrical Out- 728 848 1 or 3
put Offset Instance 3 5
Change this val- Map 1 Map 2
ue to calibrate 808 928
the low end
of the output
range.
ELo.S Calibration (1 -1,999.000 to 9,999.000 1.0 Instance 1 0x76 -- 18006 float
ELo.S or 3) Map 1 Map 2 (118) -- RWES
Electrical Out- 730 850 1 or 3
put Slope Instance 3 6
Adjust this value Map 1 Map 2
to calibrate the 810 930
slope of the out-
put value.
Pn Calibration (1 fCty Factory Fac- ---- ---- -- ---- uint
Pn to 3) UsEr User tory -- R
Part Number
Displays cur-
rent setting for
control model
number.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 165 • Cha pte r 8 F a c to r y Pa g e

 Factory Page
CIP
Class Data
Modbus Instance Pro- Param- Type
Parameter Name
Display Range Default Relative Ad- Attri- fibus eter and
Description
dress bute Index ID Access
hex **
(dec)
CodE Calibration (1 2501 User Settings 4999 ---- ---- -- ---- uint
CodE to 3) 606 Factory model num- -- RWES
Public Key ber
Changes the
control to User
or back to origi-
nal model num-
ber as shown on
the side of the
control.
** R: Read, W: Write, E: EEPROM, S: User Set

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 166 • Cha pte r 8 F a c tor y Pa g e

 9 Chapter 9: Features
Changing PM Integrated Model Number to PM Express . . . . . . 169
Saving and Restoring Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Tuning the PID Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Autotune. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Manual Tuning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Autotuning with TRU‑TUNE+®. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Calibration Offset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Filter Time Constant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Sensor Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Sensor Backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Set Point Minimum and Maximum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Scale High and Scale Low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Range High and Range Low. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Receiving a Remote Set Point. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Ten Point Linearization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Duplex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
NO-ARC Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Retransmitting a Process Value or Set Point. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Cool Output Curve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Resetting a Tripped Limit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Control Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Output Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Auto (closed loop) and Manual (open loop) Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
On-Off Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Proportional and (P) Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Proportional and Integral (PI) Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Proportional, Integral and Derivative (PID) Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Dead Band. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Variable Time Base. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Single Set Point Ramping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Cascade Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Compressor Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Differential Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Ratio Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Duplex Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Motorized Valve Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 167 • Cha pte r 9 Fe a tu r e s

 9 Chapter 9: Features (cont.)
Timer Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Setting up the timer function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Process and Deviation Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Set Points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Hysteresis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Latching. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Silencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Blocking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Current Sensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Open and Shorted Load Circuit Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Open Loop Detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Programming the EZ Key/s. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Using Lockout and Password Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Using Lockout Method 1 (Read and Set Lock) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Using Lockout Method 2 (Password Enable). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Modbus - Using Programmable Memory Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . 198
CIP - Communications Capabilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
CIP Implicit Assemblies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Profibus DP - (Decentralized Peripherals) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Software Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Using EZ-ZONE Configurator Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 168 • Cha pte r 9 F ea tu r e s

 Changing PM Integrated Model Number to PM Express
EZ-ZONE PM firmware revisions of 13 and above allow the user to switch between a PM Inte-
grated control to a PM Express. Switching to a PM Express eliminates the complexity of the
advanced PM Integrated control by allowing the user to operate with a simplified menu struc-
ture.
Note:
When switching from an integrated control to an Express version, optional PM hardware
(even though installed) and firmware features not available in a PM Express will no longer
work. To see exactly what is impacted by this change, compare the chart below to the or-
dering information page in this document.
Controller PM _ _ _ _ _ - A A A A B A A
EZ-ZONE® Integrated Controller Changes to PM Express
Red-green 7-segment displays
Package Size
No Change
Primary Function
C PID Controller with Universal Input
R
B Changes to C
T
J PID Controller with Universal Input
N
Changes to J
E
S Custom Firmware
Power Supply
1 100 to 240VÅ (ac)
2 Changes to 1
3 15 to 36VÎ (dc) and 24VÅ (ac)
4 Changes to 3
Output 1 and 2 Hardware Options
Output 1 Output 2
CA Switched dc/open collector None
CH Switched dc/open collector NO-ARC 15 A power control
CC Switched dc/open collector Switched dc
CJ Switched dc/open collector Mechanical relay 5 A, form A
CK Switched dc/open collector Solid-state relay 0.5 A, form A
EA Mechanical relay 5 A, form C None
EH Mechanical relay 5 A, form C NO-ARC 15 A power control
EC Mechanical relay 5 A, form C Switched dc
EJ Mechanical relay 5 A, form C Mechanical relay 5 A, form A
EK Mechanical relay 5 A, form C Solid-state relay 0.5 A, form A
FA Universal process None
FC Universal process Switched dc (cannot use variable time base)
FJ Universal process Mechanical relay 5 A, form A (cannot use variable time base)
FK Universal process Solid-state relay 0.5 A, form A (cannot use variable time base)
AK None Solid-state relay 0.5 A, form A
KH Solid-state relay 0.5 A, form A NO-ARC 15 A power control
KK Solid-state relay 0.5 A, form A Solid-state relay 0.5 A, form A
Communications Options or Additional Digital I/O
None
- Standard Bus EIA-485 always included - all models
Auxillary Control Functions
None
Output 3 and 4 Hardware Options
None
Additional Options
B Changes to Express
Custom Options
AA Standard EZ-ZONE face plate
AB EZ-ZONE logo and no Watlow name
AC No logo and no Watlow name
AG Conformal Coating
12 Class 1, Div. 2 (Not available with Integrated Limit Controller or mechanical relay outputs)

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 169 • Cha pte r 9 Fe a tu r e s

 How to Change the Control Model Number
1. Enter Factory Page FCty, Calibration Menu CaL via front panel by pressing the Infinity ˆ
or Reset Key and the Advance Key ‰ together or using EZ-ZONE Configurator software.
2. Once there, use the Advance Key ‰ to navigate to the Part Number pn prompt (green
display). The red display will show factory FCty indicating the factory model number as
shown on the decal located on the side of the control is currently in effect.
3. Push the Advance Key ‰, Public Key Co dE prompt will be displayed in the green display
and the number 4999 in the red display.
4. Using the up or down Arrow Keys enter 2501 and push the Advance Key ‰ to execute the
change. The controller will reboot and the new controller model number is in effect. All
previous settings are lost and the controller must be reprogrammed for the application. Be
sure to label the controller with the new model number for future reference.
Note:
As noted above, when switching from a PM Standard to a PM Express version, optional
hardware (even though installed) may no longer work. Also, all settings will be defaulted
to the selected model when switched.
Note:
After switching the model number to a PM Express this document will no longer apply to
the control. Click on the link that follows to acquire the latest version of the PM PID Ex-
press User's Guide. http://www.watlow.com/literature/manuals.cfm
Once there, simply enter express in the "Keyword" field to find the appropriate document.
How to Restore Original PM Factory Settings and Model Number
1. Enter Factory Page FCty, Calibration Menu CaL via front panel by pressing the Infinity ˆ
or Reset Key and the Advance Key ‰ together or using EZ-ZONE Configurator software.
2. Once there, use the Advance Key ‰ to navigate to the Part Number pn prompt (green dis-
play). The red display will show user USEr indicating the user's selected model number is
currently in effect.
3. Push the Advance Key ‰ where the Public Key Co dE prompt will appear in the lower dis-
play and the number 4999 in the upper display.
4. Using the up or down arrow keys enter 606 and push the Advance Key ‰ to execute the
change. The controller will reboot and the new controller model number is in effect. All
previous settings are lost and the controller must be reprogrammed for the application. Be
sure to label the controller with the new model number for future reference.
Note:
When switching from a PM Express back to the original model number all original optional
hardware will again be enabled for use (assuming all original hardware is still installed).
Also, when executing this step the control will be factory defaulted back to the original
model number (as shown on the side of the control) at zone address 1. This User's Guide
would once again apply to this control.

Saving and Restoring Settings

Recording setup and operations parameter settings for future reference is very important. If
you unintentionally change these, you will need to program the correct settings back into the
controller to return the equipment to operational condition.

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 170 • Cha pte r 9 F ea tu r e s

 After you program the controller and verify proper operation, select Save Settings As Us r. s
(Setup Page, Global Menu) to save the settings into either of two files (sEt1 or sEt2) in the
control memory.
Note:
Saving the settings overwrites any previously saved collection of settings. Be sure to docu-
ment all the controller settings.
If the settings in the controller are altered a user can return the controller to one of three
settings. If previously saved, sEt1 or sEt2 can be restored as well as the factory fCty set-
tings. Navigate to the Setup Page, Global Menu to find the Restore USr. r prompt. A digital
input or the Function Key can also be configured to restore parameters.
Note:
When restoring factory defaults, I/O assemblies for Modbus, DeviceNet, Profibus and Eth-
ernet along with the zone address will be overwritten when restoring factory defaults.

Tuning the PID Parameters

Autotune
Process Set Point
When an autotune is performed on the Autotune begins Autotune complete
EZ-ZONE® PM, the set point is used to calcu-
late the tuning set point.
For example, if the active set point is 200°
and Autotune Set Point A. tsp (Operations Autotune Set Point
Page, Loop Menu) is set to 90 percent, the (90 percent of Process Set Point)
Temperature

autotune function utilizes 180° for tuning.

This is also how autotuning works in previ-
ous Watlow Winona controllers. In addition,
changing the active set point in previous
controllers causes the autotune function to
restart; where with the EZ-ZONE PM chang-
ing the set point after an autotune has been Time

started has no affect.

A new feature in EZ-ZONE PM products will allow set point changes while the control is
autotuning, this includes while running a profile or ramping. When the auto tune is initially
started it will use the current set point and will disregard all set point changes until the tun-
ing process is complete. Once complete, the controller will then use the new set point. This is
why it is a good idea to enter the active set point before initiating an autotune.
Autotuning calculates the optimum heating and/or cooling PID parameter settings based on
the system's response. Autotuning can be enabled whether or not TUNE-TUNE+® is enabled.
The PID settings generated by the autotune will be used until the autotune feature is rerun,
the PID values are manually adjusted or TRU-TUNE+ is enabled.
To initiate an autotune, set Autotune Request AUt (Operations Page, Loop Menu) to yEs. You
should not autotune while a profile is running. If the autotune cannot be completed in 60 min-
utes, the autotune will time-out and the original settings will take effect.
Depending on which loops are being tuned the lower display may flash tUn1 or tUn2 and
the set point while the autotuning is underway. The temperature must cross the Autotune Set

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 171 • Cha pte r 9 Fe a tu r e s

 Point five times to complete the autotuning process. Once complete, the controller controls at
the normal set point, using the new parameters.
Select a set point for the tune with Autotune Set Point. The Autotune Set Point is expressed
as a percent of the Closed Loop Set Point.
If you need to adjust the tuning procedure's aggressiveness, use Autotune Aggressiveness
tag r (Setup Page, Loop Menu). Select Under Damped Un d r to bring the process value to
the set point quickly. Select over damped o vEr to bring the process value to the set point
with minimal overshoot. Select critical damped Cri t to balance a rapid response with mini-
mal overshoot.

Manual Tuning
In some applications, the autotune process may not provide PID parameters for the process
characteristics you desire. If that is the case, you may want to tune the controller manually.
1. Apply power to the controller and establish a set point typically used in your process.
2. Go to the Operations Page, Loop Menu, and set Heat Proportional Band h . pb and/or Cool
Proportional Band C. pb to 5. Set Time Integral ti to 0. Set Time Derivative td to 0.
3. When the system stabilizes, watch the process value. If it fluctuates, increase the Heat
Proportional Band or Cool Proportional Band value in 3 to 5° increments until it stabilizes,
allowing time for the system to settle between adjustments.
4. When the process has stabilized, watch Heat Power h . pr or Cool Power C. pr (Operations
Page, Monitor Menu). It should be stable ±2%. At this point, the process temperature should
also be stable, but it will have stabilized before reaching the set point. The difference be-
tween the set point and actual process value can be eliminated with Integral.
5. Start with an Integral value of 6,000 and allow 10 minutes for the process temperature to
reach the set point. If it has not, reduce the setting by half and wait another 10 minutes.
Continue reducing the setting by half every 10 minutes until the process value equals the
set point. If the process becomes unstable, the Integral value is too small. Increase the val-
ue until the process stabilizes.
6. Increase Derivative to 0.1. Then increase the set point by 11° to 17°C. Monitor the system’s
approach to the set point. If the process value overshoots the set point, increase Deriva-
tive to 0.2. Increase the set point by 11° to 17°C and watch the approach to the new set
point. If you increase Derivative too much, the approach to the set point will be very slug-
gish. Repeat as necessary until the system rises to the new set point without overshoot or
sluggishness.
For additional information about autotune and PID control, see related features in this chap-
ter.

Autotuning with TRU‑TUNE+®

The TRU-TUNE+ adaptive algorithm will optimize the controller's PID values to improve con-
trol of dynamic processes. TRU-TUNE+ monitors the Process Value and adjusts the control pa-
rameters automatically to keep your process at set point during set point and load changes.
When the controller is in the adaptive control mode, it determines the appropriate output
signal and, over time, adjusts control parameters to optimize responsiveness and stability. The
TRU-TUNE+ feature does not function for on-off control.

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 172 • Cha pte r 9 F ea tu r e s

 The preferred and quickest method for tuning a loop is to establish initial control settings and
continue with the adaptive mode to fine tune the settings. Setting a controller's control mode
to tune starts this two-step tuning process. (See Autotuning in this chapter.) This predictive
tune determines initial, rough settings for the PID parameters. Then the loop automatically
switches to the adaptive mode which fine tunes the PID parameters.
Once the Process Value has been at set point for a suitable period (about 30 minutes for a
fast process to roughly two hours for a slower process) and if no further tuning of the PID pa-
rameters is desired or needed, TRU‑TUNE+™ may be turned off. However, keeping the control-
ler in the adaptive mode allows it to automatically adjust to load changes and compensate for
differing control characteristics at various set points for processes that are not entirely linear.
Once the PID parameters have been set by the TRU‑TUNE+ adaptive algorithm, the process, if
shut down for any reason, can be restarted in the adaptive control mode. Turn TRU‑TUNE+ on
or off with TRU‑TUNE+ Enable t . tUn (Setup Page, Loop Menu).
Use TRU‑TUNE+ Band tb n d (Setup Page, Loop Menu) to set the range above and below the
set point in which adaptive tuning will be active. Adjust this parameter only in the unlikely
event that the controller is unable to stabilize at the set point with TRU‑TUNE+ Band set to
auto (0). This may occur with very fast processes. In that case, set TRU‑TUNE+ Band to a large
value, such as 100.
Use TRU‑TUNE+ Gain t . g n (Setup Page, Loop Menu) to adjust the responsiveness of the adap-
tive tuning calculations. Six settings range from 1, with the most aggressive response and most
potential overshoot (highest gain), to 6, with the least aggressive response and least potential
for overshoot (lowest gain). The default setting, 3, is recommended for loops with thermocou-
ple feedback and moderate response and overshoot potential.
Before Tuning
Before autotuning, the controller hardware must be installed correctly, and these basic con-
figuration parameters must be set:
• Sensor Type sEn (Setup Page, Analog Input Menu), and scaling, if required;
• Function fn (Setup Page, Output Menu) and scaling, if required.
How to Autotune a Loop
1. Enter the desired set point or one that is in the middle of the expected range of set points
that you want to tune for.
2. Initiate an autotune. (See Autotuning in this chapter.)
Note:
Enable TRU-TUNE+ only after autotune is complete. It should be disabled before autotune
is initiated.
When autotuning is complete, the PID parameters should provide good control. As long as the
loop is in the adaptive control mode, TRU-TUNE+ continuously tunes to provide the best pos-
sible PID control for the process.

WARNING! ç
During autotuning, the controller sets the output to 100 percent and attempts to drive
the Process Value toward the set point. Enter a set point and heat and cool power limits
that are within the safe operating limits of your system.

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 173 • Cha pte r 9 Fe a tu r e s

 Inputs
Calibration Offset
Calibration offset allows a device to compensate for an inaccurate sensor, lead resistance or
other factors that affect the input value. A positive offset increases the input value, and a
negative offset decreases the input value. The input offset value can be viewed or changed
with Calibration Offset i . Ca (Operations Page, Analog Input Menu).

Calibration
Before performing any calibration procedure, verify that the displayed readings are not within
published specifications by inputting a known value from a precision source to the analog in-
put. Next, subtract the displayed
value with the known value and
compare this difference to the
published accuracy range specifi- Negative Calibration Offset will
compensate for the difference
cation for that type of input. Temperature Reading
between the Sensor Reading and
from Sensor
Use of the Calibration Offset the Actual Temperature

i . Ca parameter found in the

Operations Page o pEr, Analog
Input Menu ai shifts the read-
Temperature

ings across the entire displayed

range by the offset value. Use
this parameter to compensate for Actual Process Temperature
sensor error or sensor placement
error. Typically this value is set
to zero. Time

Equipment required while performing calibration:

Obtain a precision source for millivolts, volts, milliamperes or resistance depending on the
sensor type to be calibrated. Use copper wire only to connect the precision source to the con-
troller’s input. Keep leads between the precision source and controller as short as possible to
minimize error. In addition, a precision volt/ohm meter capable of reading values to 4 deci-
mal places or better is recommended. Prior to calibration, connect this volt/ohm meter to the
precision source to verify accuracy. Actual input values do NOT have to be exactly the recom-
mended values, but it IS critical that the actual value of the signal connected to the control-
ler be accurately known to at least four digits.

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 174 • Cha pte r 9 F ea tu r e s

 Calibration of Analog Inputs:
To calibrate an analog input, you will need to provide a source of two electrical signals or re-
sistance values near the extremes of the range that the application is likely to utilize. See rec-
ommended values below:
Sensor Type Precision Source Low Precision Source High
thermocouple 0.000 mV 50.000 mV
millivolts 0.000 mV 50.000 mV
volts 0.000V 10.000V
milliamps 0.000 mA 20.000 mA
100 Ω RTD 50.00 Ω 350.0 Ω
1,000 Ω RTD 500.0 Ω 3,500 Ω
thermistor 5 kΩ 50.00 5,000
thermistor 10 kΩ 150.0 10,000
thermistor 20 kΩ 1,800 20,000
thermistor 40 kΩ 1,700 40,000
potentiometer 0.000 1,200
Note:
The user may only calibrate one sensor type. If the calibrator interferences with open
thermocouple detection, set Sensor Type sEn in Setup Page sEt, Analog Input Menu ai to
millivolt ЛЏ u instead of Thermocouple tC to avoid interference between the calibrator
and open thermocouple detect circuit for the duration of the calibration process. Be sure
to set sensor type back to the thermocouple type utilized.
1. Disconnect the sensor from the controller.
2. Record the Calibration Offset i . Ca parameter value in the Operations Page o pEr, Analog
Input Menu ai then set value to zero.
3. Wire the precision source to the appropriate controller input terminals to be calibrated. Do
not have any other wires connected to the input terminals. Please refer to the Install
and Wiring section of this manual for the appropriate connections.
4. Ensure the controller sensor type is programmed to the appropriate Sensor Type sEn to be
utilized in the Setup Page sEt, Analog Input Menu ai.
5. Enter Factory Page fCty, Calibration Menu CaL via front panel or EZ-ZONE Configurator
Software.
6. Select the Calibration CaL input instance to be calibrated. This corresponds to the analog
input to be calibrated.
7. Set Electrical Input Slope ELi . s to 1.000 and Electrical Input Offset ELi . o to 0.000 (this
will cancel any prior user calibration values)
8. Input a Precision Source Low value. Read Electrical Measurement value ЛЏ u of controller
via EZ-Configurator or RUI. This will be referred to as Electrical Measured Low. Record low
value ______________
9. Input a Precision Source High value.
10. Read Electrical Measurement value ЛЏ u of controller via EZ-Configurator or RUI. This will
be referred to as Electrical Measured High. Record high value ______________
11. Calculated Electrical Input Slope = (Precision High – Precision Low) / (Electrical Measured
High - Electrical Measured Low) Calculated Slope value ___________
Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 175 • Cha pte r 9 Fe a tu r e s
 12. Calculated Electrical Input Offset = Precision Low - (Electrical Input Slope * Measured Low)
Calculated Offset value ___________
13. Enter the calculated Electrical Input Slope ELi . s and Electrical Input Offset ELi . o into
the controller.
14. Exit calibration menu.
15. Validate calibration process by utilizing a calibrator to the analog input.
16. Enter calibration offset as recorded in step 2 if required to compensate for sensor error.
Setting Electrical Input Slope ELi . s to 1.000 and Electrical Input Offset ELI. o to 0.000, re-
stores factory calibration as shipped from factory.

Filter Time Constant

Filtering smooths an input signal by applying a first-order filter time constant to the signal. Fil-
tering the displayed value makes it easier to monitor. Filtering the signal may improve the
performance of PID control in a noisy or very dynamic system.

Unfiltered Input Signal

Filtered Input Signal
Temperature

Temperature

Time Time

Adjust the filter time interval with Filter Time fiL (Setup Page, Analog Input Menu). Example:
With a filter value of 0.5 seconds, if the process input value instantly changes from 0 to 100 and
remained at 100, the display will indicate 100 after five time constants of the filter value or 2.5
seconds.

Sensor Selection
You need to configure the controller to match the input device, which is normally a thermo-
couple, RTD or process transmitter.
Select the sensor type with Sensor Type SEn (Setup Page, Analog Input Menu).

Sensor Backup
Sensor backup maintains closed-loop control after an input failure by switching control to in-
put 2. The sensor backup feature is only available in an EZ-ZONE PM Integrated Limit or Re-
mote Set Point controller. Turn sensor backup on or off with Sensor Backup Enable S. ba (Set-
up Page, Analog Input 1).
Note:
When Sensor Backup is enabled the Process Value function will automatically set itself to
Sensor Backup.

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 176 • Cha pte r 9 F ea tu r e s

 Set Point Minimum and Maximum
The controller has the ability to restrict the Set Points for the following modes of operation:
a. For closed loop control use Minimum Set Point and Maximum Set Point found in the Setup
Page, Loop Menu.
b. For Manual Power (open loop control) use Minimum Power and Maximum Power found in
the Setup Page, Loop Menu.
c. If a Limit is in use as part of an integrated control, set the Low Limit Set Point and High
Limit Set point between the settings Minimum Set Point and Maximum Set Point in the Set-
up Page, Limit Menu.

Scale High and Scale Low

When an analog input is selected as process voltage or process current input, you must choose
the value of voltage or current to be the low and high ends. For example, when using a 4 to
20 mA input, the scale low value would be 4.00 mA and the scale high value would be 20.00
mA. Commonly used scale ranges are: 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 5V, 1 to 5V and 0 to 10V.
You can create a scale range representing other units for special applications. You can reverse
scales from high values to low values for analog input signals that have a reversed action. For
example, if 50 psi causes a 4 mA signal and 10 psi causes a 20 mA signal.
Scale low and high low values do not have to match the bounds of the measurement range.
These along with range low and high provide for process scaling and can include values not
measurable by the controller. Regardless of scaling values, the measured value will be con-
strained by the electrical measurements of the hardware. Select the low and high values with
Scale Low s . Lo and Scale High s . hi. Select the displayed range with Range Low r. Lo and
Range High r. hi (Setup Page, Analog Input Menu).

Range High and Range Low

With a process input, you must choose a value to represent the low and high ends of the cur-
rent or voltage range. Choosing these values allows the controller’s display to be scaled into
the actual working units of measurement. For example, the analog input from a humidity
transmitter could represent 0 to 100 percent relative humidity as a process signal of 4 to 20
mA. Low scale would be set to 0 to represent 4 mA and high scale set to 100 to represent 20
mA. The indication on the display would then represent percent humidity and range from 0 to
100 percent with an input of 4 to 20 mA. Select the low and high values with Range Low r. Lo
and Range High r. hi (Setup Page, Analog Input Menu).

Receiving a Remote Set Point

The remote set point feature allows the controller to use a thermocouple, RTD, 1 k potenti-
ometer or process signal at input 2 to establish the set point, which allows its set point to be
manipulated by an external source. A common application would use one ramping controller
with a set-point retransmit output to ramp multiple controllers using the remote set point. Or
you could use an analog output from a PLC to send set point values to an EZ-ZONE PM.
The controller must have two process inputs to use the remote set point feature.
You may select between local and remote set points at the front panel, with an event input,
from a remote computer using the communications feature or from an external switch using
an event input. Make sure all input and output impedances are compatible.

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 177 • Cha pte r 9 Fe a tu r e s

 1. Switch to the remote set point with Remote Enable r. En (Operations Page, Loop Menu). Se-
lect whether the remote set point controls an open- or closed-loop set point with Remote
Set Point Type r. ty.
2. Assign the function of switching to a remote set point to a digital input with Digital Input
Function fn (Setup Page, Digital Input Menu).
3. Assign the function of switching to a remote set point to the EZ Key with Digital Input
Function fn (Setup Page, Function Key Menu).

Ten Point Linearization

The linearization function allows a user to re-linearize a value read from an analog input.
There are 10 data points used to compensate for differences between the sensor value read
(input point) and the desired value (output
Input Point 10
point). Multiple data points enable compensa- 9
Reading from Sensor 8
tion for non-linear differences between the without Linearization
67
Output Point 10
(Actual Value) 5

Temperature
sensor readings and target process values over 4
3
the thermal or process system operating 2 Offset Zone
Input Point 1
range. Sensor reading differences can be
caused by sensor placement, tolerances, an in- Reading from Sensor
with Linearization
accurate sensor or lead resistance. (Displayed Value)
Output Point 1 No Offset

The user specifies the unit of measurement

and then each data point by entering an input Time
point value and a corresponding output point
value. Each data point must be incrementally higher than the previous point. The linerization
function will interpolate data points linearly in between specified data points.
Note:
Output Point 1 will be the minimum value that can be displayed, and Output Point 10
will be the maximum value that can be displayed. Consider setting Output Point 1 to the
minimum operating range, and Output Point 10 to the maximum operating range; for that
sensor type.

Outputs
Duplex
Certain systems require that a single process output, control both heating and cooling outputs.
An EZ-ZONE® PM controller with a process output can function as two separate outputs. With
a 4 to 20mA output the heating output will operate from 12 to 20mA (0 to +100 percent) and
the cooling output will operate from 12 to 4mA (0 to -100 percent).
In some cases this type of output is required by the device that the EZ-ZONE PM controls, such
as a three-way valve that opens one way with a 12 to 20mA signal and opens the other way
with a 4 to 12mA signal. This feature reduces the overall system cost by using a single output
to act as two outputs.
Outputs 1 and 3 can be ordered as process outputs. Select duplex dUpL as the Output Func-
tion fn (Setup Page, Output Menu). Set the output to volts v oLt or milliamps ЛЏ a with Out-
put Type o . ty. Set the range of the process output with Scale Low S. Lo and Scale High s . hi.

NO-ARC Relay
A NO-ARC relay provides a significant improvement in the life of the output relay over conven-
Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 178 • Cha pte r 9 F ea tu r e s
 tional relays. Conventional mechanical relays have an expected life of 100,000 cycles at the
rated full-load current. The shorter life for conventional relays is due to the fact that when
contacts open while current is flowing metal degradation occurs. This action produces un-
avoidable electrical arcing causing metal to transfer from one contact to the other. The arc-
ing conditions continue on each subsequent contact opening until over time the resistance
through the contacts increases causing the contacts to increase in temperature. Eventually,
the contacts will weld together and the relay remains in the on state.
The Watlow NO-ARC relay is a hybrid relay. It uses a mechanical relay for the current load
and a triac (solid-state switch) to carry the turn-on and turn-off currents. NO-ARC relays ex-
tend the life of the relay more than two million cycles at the rated full-load current.
Although a NO-ARC relay has significant life advantages, a few precautions must be followed
for acceptable usage:
Do not use:
• Hybrid relays for limit contactors. A limit or safety device must provide a positive mechani-
cal break on all hot legs simultaneously
• DC loads with hybrid relays. The triacs used for arc suppression will turn off only with ac
line voltage
• Hybrid switches to drive any inductive loads, such as relay coils, transformers or solenoids
• Cycle times less than five seconds on hybrid switches
• On loads that exceed 264V ac through relay
• On loads that exceed 15 amperes load
• On loads less than 100mA
• NO-ARC relays in series with other NO-ARC relays

Retransmitting a Process Value or Set Point

The retransmit feature allows a process output to provide an analog signal that represents the
set point or process value. The signal may serve as a remote set point for another controller
or as an input for a chart recorder Retransmit
documenting system performance Range High

over time.
In choosing the type of retransmit
Output Scale

signal the operator must take into

account the input impedance of the
device to be retransmitted to and
the required signal type, either volt-
age or milliamps. Typically applica- Range Low
Scale Low Retransmit Source Scale High
tions might use the retransmit option
to record one of the variables with a
chart recorder or to generate a set point for other controls in a multi-zone application.
Outputs 1 and 3 can be ordered as process outputs. Select retransmit rЛЏ t as the Output
Function fn (Setup Page, Output Menu). Set the output to volts v o lt or milliamps ЛЏ a with
Output Type o . ty. Select the signal to retransmit with Retransmit Source r. s r.
Set the range of the process output with Scale Low s . Lo and Scale High S. hi. Scale the re-
transmit source to the process output with Range Low r. Lo and Range High r. hi.
When the retransmit source is at the Range Low value, the retransmit output will be at its

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 179 • Cha pte r 9 Fe a tu r e s

 Scale Low value. When the retransmit source is at the Range High value, the retransmit out-
put will be at its Scale High value.

Cool Output Curve

A nonlinear output curve may improve performance when the response of the output device
is nonlinear. If a cool output uses one of the nonlinear curves a PID calculation yields a lower
actual output level than a linear output would provide.
These output curves are used in plastics extruder applications: curve A for oil-cooled extrud-
ers and curve B for water-cooled extruders. Select a nonlinear cool output curve with Cool
Output Curve C. Cr (Setup Menu, Loop Menu).
100

80
Actual Output Power

60
Linear

Curve A
40
Linear
Curve B
Curve 1
20
Curve 2

0
PID Calculation

Resetting a Tripped Limit

When a limit controller is ordered (PM _ _ _ _ _ - _ [L,M] _ _ _ _ _) output 4 will always be
a Form A (normally open) Mechanical Relay and it will always be internally tied to the limit
function. When the limit is in a safe state the internal coil for this relay will be energized,
therefore the relay will be closed. When a condition occurs that causes the limit to trip, the
internal coil will de-energize causing the relay to latch open. When the condition that caused
the limit to trip has been resolved, the relay will remain latched open until manually reset.
The process to reset a latched limit can be different from control to control and is dependent
upon the controller firmware version.
To check the firmware revision of your control do one of the following:
1. Cycle power to the control while observing the number in the top display (this momentary
numerical display reflects the current installed firmware version).
2. Navigate to the Factory Page by simultaneously pushing and holding the Advance Key ‰
and the Reset Key for approximately 8 seconds and then use the up or down arrow key
RESET

to navigate to the Diagnostic Menu. Once there, push the Advance Key ‰ twice where the
revision rEv will be shown in the lower display and the upper display will indicate the cur-
rent firmware revision.
Execute One of the Following Steps to Reset a Tripped Limit Prior to Firmware Release 11.0:
1. Push the Reset Key RESET

2. Configure a digital input with the Action Function set to Limit Reset (navigate to the Setup
Page under the Digital I/O Menu).
3. Use a field bus protocol, i.e., Modbus, EtherNet/IP, etc...where a value of zero would be
written to the associated address (navigate to the Operations Page and look for Clear Limit
under the Limit Menu to find appropriate address).
4. Cycle the power to the controller.
Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 180 • Cha pte r 9 F ea tu r e s
 Execute One of the Following Steps to Reset a Tripped Limit with Firmware Release 11.0 and
above:
1. Push the Reset Key RESET

2. Follow the steps below:

2a. Navigate to the Setup Page and then the Limit Menu
2b. Set Source Function A to the desired device that will reset the limit (Digital I/O or
Function Key)
2c. Define the Source Instance
3. Use a field bus protocol, i.e., Modbus, EtherNet/IP, etc...where a value of zero would be
written to the associated address (navigate to the Operations Page and look for Clear Limit
under the Limit Menu to find appropriate address).
4. Cycle the power to the controller.

Control Methods
Output Configuration
Each controller output can be configured as a heat output, a cool output, an alarm output or
deactivated. No dependency limitations have been placed on the available combinations. The
outputs can be configured in any combination. For instance, all three could be set to cool.
Heat and cool outputs use the set point and Operations parameters to determine the output
value. All heat and cool outputs use the same set point value. Heat and cool each have their
own set of control parameters. All heat outputs use the same set of heat control parameters
and all cool outputs use the same set of cool output parameters.
Each alarm output has its own set of configuration parameters and set points, allowing inde-
pendent operation.

Auto (closed loop) and Manual (open loop) Control

The controller has two basic modes of operation, auto mode and manual mode. Auto mode al-
lows the controller to decide whether to perform closed-loop control or to follow the settings
of Input Error Failure faiL (Setup Page, Loop Menu). The manual mode only allows open-loop
control. The EZ-ZONE® PM controller is normally used in the auto mode. The manual mode is
usually only used for specialty applications or for troubleshooting.
Manual mode is open-loop control that allows the user to directly set the power level to the
controller’s output load. No adjustments of the output power level occur based on tempera-
ture or set point in this mode.
In auto mode, the controller monitors the input to determine if closed-loop control is possible.
The controller checks to make certain a functioning sensor is providing a valid input signal. If
a valid input signal is present, the controller will perform closed-loop control. Closed-loop con-
trol uses a process sensor to determine the difference between the process value and the set
point. Then the controller applies power to a control output load to reduce that difference.
If a valid input signal is not present, the controller will indicate an input error message in
the upper display and Attn in the lower display and respond to the failure according to the
setting of Input Error Failure FaiL. You can configure the controller to perform a bumpless
transfer bpLs, switch power to output a preset fixed level ЛЏ a n, or turn the output power
off.

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 181 • Cha pte r 9 Fe a tu r e s

 Bumpless transfer will allow the controller to transfer to the manual mode using the last pow-
er value calculated in the auto mode if
the process had stabilized at a ±5 per-
cent output power level for the time in- Set Point Actual Temperature

Temperature
terval or 10 seconds, (whichever is lon- Sensor
Break
ger) prior to sensor failure, and that
power level is less than 75 percent. Re-
verse Bumpless functionality will take ef- 100%
Output Power
fect when the control is changed from
Manual to Auto mode. The control will 40%

Power
2 minutes Locks in
preload the Open Loop Set Point value Output
0% Power
into the Integral Term, which will allow Time
for a bumpless transition. The normal PID
action will then take over to control the output to the Closed Loop Set Point value.
Note:
Reverse bumpless ignores the transition from Off to Auto.
Input Error Latching i . Er (Setup Page, Analog Input Menu) determines the controller’s re-
sponse once a valid input signal returns to the controller. If latching is on, then the controller
will continue to indicate an input error until the error is cleared. To clear a latched alarm,
press the Advance Key ‰ then the Up Key ¿. If latching is off, the controller will automati-
cally clear the input error and return to reading the temperature. If the controller was in the
auto mode when the input error occurred, it will resume closed-loop control. If the controller
was in manual mode when the error occurred, the controller will remain in open-loop control.
The Manual Control Indicator Light % is on when the controller is operating in manual mode.
You can easily switch between modes if the Control Mode C. ЛЏ parameter is selected to ap-
pear in the Home Page.
To transfer to manual mode from auto mode:
1. Press the Advance Key ‰ until C. ЛЏ appears in the lower display. The upper display will
display aUto for auto mode.
2. Use the Up ¿ or Down ¯ keys to select ЛЏ a n. The manual set point value will be recalled
from the last manual operation.
To transfer to auto mode from manual mode:
1. Press the Advance Key ‰ until C. ЛЏ appears in the lower display. The upper display will
display ЛЏ a n for manual mode.
2. Use the Up ¿ or Down ¯ keys to select aUto. The automatic set point value will be re-
called from the last automatic operation.
Changes take effect after three seconds or immediately upon pressing either the Advance Key
‰ or the Infinity Key ˆ.
On-Off Control
On-off control switches the output either full on or full off, depending on the input, set point
and hysteresis values. The hysteresis value indicates the amount the process value must devi-
ate from the set point to turn on the output. Increasing the value decreases the number of
times the output will cycle. Decreasing hysteresis improves controllability. With hysteresis set
to 0, the process value would stay closer to the set point, but the output would switch on and
off more frequently, and may result in the output “chattering.” On-off control can be selected

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 182 • Cha pte r 9 F ea tu r e s

 with Heat Algorithm h . ag or Cool Algorithm C. ag (Setup Page, Loop Menu). On-off hysteresis
can be set with On/Off Heat Hysteresis h . hy or On/Off Cool Hysteresis C. hy (Operations Page,
Loop Menu).
Note:
Input Error Failure Mode faiL does not function in on-off control mode. The output goes
off.
On/Off System Cycles On/Off System Cycles
The cooling action switches on when
The heating action switches off when the process The cooling action the process temperature rises above
temperature rises above the set point. switches the set point plus the hysteresis.
on at startup.
Temperature

Temperature
Set Point Hysteresis
Process Temperature Set Point
Hysteresis

Process Temperature

The heating action switches on when the process temperature The cooling action switches off when the process
The heating action drops below the set point minus the hysteresis. temperature drops below the set point.
switches on at startup.
Time Time

Proportional and (P) Control

Some processes need to maintain a temperature or process value closer to the set point than
on-off control can provide. Proportional control provides closer control by adjusting the out-
put when the temperature or process value is within a proportional band. When the value is
in the band, the controller adjusts the output based on how close the process value is to the
set point.
Proportional Control
The closer the process value is to the set Overshoot
Set Point
point, the lower the output power. This is
similar to backing off on the gas pedal of a
car as you approach a stop sign. It keeps the
Temperature

Proportional Band Droop

temperature or process value from swinging
as widely as it would with simple on-off con-
trol. However, when the system settles down,
the temperature or process value tends to
“droop” short of the set point.
With proportional control the output power Time
level equals (set point minus process value)
divided by the proportional band value. In an application with one output assigned to heating
and another assigned to cooling, each will have a separate proportional parameter. The heat-
ing parameter takes effect when the process temperature is lower than the set point, and the
cooling parameter takes effect when the process temperature is higher than the set point.
Adjust the proportional band with Heat Proportional Band h . pb or Cool Proportional Band
C. pb (Operations Page, Loop Menu).
Proportional and Integral (PI) Control
The droop caused by proportional control can be corrected by adding integral (reset) control.
When the system settles down, the integral value is tuned to bring the temperature or pro-
cess value closer to the set point. Integral determines the speed of the correction, but this
may increase the overshoot at startup or when the set point is changed. Too much integral
action will make the system unstable. Integral is cleared when the process value is outside

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 183 • Cha pte r 9 Fe a tu r e s

 of the proportional band. Adjust the integral with Time Integral ti (Operations Page, Loop
Menu).

Proportional, Integral and Derivative (PID) Control

Use derivative (rate) control to minimize the overshoot in a PI-controlled system. Derivative
(rate) adjusts the output based on the rate of change in the temperature or process value.
Too much derivative (rate) will make the system sluggish. Derivative action is active only
when the process value is within twice the proportional value from the set point. Adjust the
derivative with Time Derivative td (Operations Page, Loop Menu).
PID Control
Set Point Reduced Overshoot

Proportional Band

Proportional Band x 2
Temperature

Heating Slows

Time

Dead Band
In a PID application the dead bands above and below the set point can save an application’s
energy and wear by maintaining process temperature within acceptable ranges.
Proportional action ceases when the process value is within the dead band. Integral action
continues to bring the process temperature to the set point. Using a positive dead band
value keeps the two systems from fighting each other.

Positive Dead Band

Cool Output Active

Temperature

Set Point

Heat Output Active

Time

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 184 • Cha pte r 9 F ea tu r e s

 Dead Band (cont.)
When the dead band value is zero, the heating output activates when the temperature
drops below the set point, and the cooling output switches on when the temperature exceeds
the set point.
Zero Dead Band

Cool Output Active

Set Point
Temperature

Heat Output Active

Time

When the dead band value is a negative value, both heating and cooling outputs are ac-
tive when the temperature is near the set point. Adjust the dead band with Dead Band d b
(Operations Page, Loop Menu).
Negative Dead Band

Cool Output Active

Set Point
Temperature

Heat Output Active

Time

Variable Time Base

Variable time base is the preferred method for controlling a resistive load, providing a very
short time base for longer heater life. Unlike phase-angle firing, variable-time-base switching
does not limit the current and voltage applied to the heater. With variable time base outputs,
the PID algorithm calculates an output between 0 and 100%, but the output is distributed in
groupings of three ac line cycles. For each group of three ac line cycles, the controller de-
cides whether the power should be on or off. There is no fixed cycle time since the decision
is made for each group of cycles. When used in conjunction with a zero cross (burst fire) de-
vice, such as a solid-state power controller, switching is done only at the zero cross of the ac
line, which helps reduce electrical noise (RFI). Variable time base should be used with solid-
state power controllers, such as a solid-state relay (SSR) or silicon controlled rectifier (SCR)
power controller. Do not use a variable time base output for controlling electromechanical re-
lays, mercury displacement relays, inductive loads or heaters with unusual resistance charac-
teristics.

100 percent output 50 percent output

10 ON, 0 OFF 3 ON, 3 OFF

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 185 • Cha pte r 9 Fe a tu r e s

 Variable Time Base (cont.)

66 percent output

6 ON, 3 OFF

The combination of variable time base output and a solid-state relay can inexpensively ap-
proach the effect of analog, phase-angle fired control. Select the AC Line Frequency AC. Lf (Set-
up Page, Global Menu), 50 or 60 Hz.

Single Set Point Ramping

Ramping protects materials and systems that cannot tolerate rapid temperature changes. The
value of the ramp rate is the maximum degrees per minute or hour that the system tempera-
ture can change.
Select Ramp Action rp (Setup Page, Loop Menu):
o ff ramping not active.
str ramp at startup.
Stpt ramp at a set point change.
b o th ramp at startup or when the set point changes.
Select whether the rate is in degrees per minute or degrees per hour with Ramp Scale r.SC.
Set the ramping rate with Ramp Rate r. rt (Setup Page, Loop Menu).
Heating System without Ramping Heating System with Ramping

Set Point Set Point

Temperature
Temperature

degrees
per minute

Temperature reaches Set Point quickly

Temperature ramps to Set Point at a set rate
Time Time

Cascade Control
The PM (PM4/8/9) can be configured for Cascade control with enhanced firmware. Cascade is
used to optimize the performance of thermal systems with long lag times. It utilizes a control
strategy in which one control loop provides the set point for another loop. See Chapter 10 for
application examples.

Compressor Control
The PM control can be configured for Compressor control with enhanced firmware. A typical
use scenario for compressor control is for cooling and/or dehumidification. The application
may have one or two loops of control which utilize the compressor to accomplish the cooling
and/or dehumidification (negative power levels). Because the compressor is a mechanical de-
vice, it is desirable to minimize unwanted starts and stops. Either loop can attempt to start
or stop the compressor, but this algorithm will make the determination when it should or
should not run. Because you may not turn the compressor off until the loop is in the heat or
humidify region, the input values (Source Function A and B) to the compressor algorithm must
be loop power (+/- 100%).

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 186 • Cha pte r 9 F ea tu r e s

The compressor will turn on and off under the following conditions:
Loop 1 % Power
Heat 100%
Off - When Source A Value >= Power
Off Level 1
On - When Source A Value <= Power 2%
2% Compressor
Off Power
On Level 1 0%
0% Compressor
Loop 2 On Power

Off - When Source B Value >= Power

Off Level 2 Cool -100%
Time In Seconds
On - When Source B Value <= Power Compressor On Delay = 45 Seconds
On Level 2 Compressor
On
Off

To prevent unwanted on/off cycling Compressor Off Delay = 20 Seconds

and compressor wear, there are two

settings (On and Off Time) that allow the user to define how fast a compressor may be turned
off and back on again. The rules for these settings follow:
- On Time specifies minimum compressor OFF time.
- Off Time specifies minimum compressor ON time.
Lastly, the Time Delay setting is used to avoid having the compressor remain on indefinitely in
the event the loop control modes are set to off, such as when a profile ends. The rule for the
Time Delay setting follows:
Off - Source A Value and Source B Value = 0.0% for a period longer than Time Delay

Differential Control
The PM can be configured for Differential Control with enhanced firmware. After configuring
the appropriate inputs and their associated internal functions Differential Control allows the
PM to drive an output based on the difference between those analog inputs. See Chapter 10
for application examples.

Ratio Control
The PM control can be configured for Ratio control with enhanced firmware, especially useful
in applications that mix materials. Ratio control is commonly used to ensure that two or more
flows are kept at the same ratio even if the flows are changing. See Chapter 10 for applica-
tion examples.

Duplex Control
Certain systems require that a single process output, control both heating and cooling out-
puts. A PM control with a ®

process output can function Fluid S a mple Cont a ine r

as two separate outputs. Input 1 Output 1 hot water

temperature
With a 4 to 20mA output the transmitter

heating output, for instance,

will operate from 12 to 20mA
(0 to +100%) and the cooling
outputs will operate from 12
to 4mA (0 to -100%). In some cold water

cases this type of output is

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 187 • Cha pte r 9 Fe a tu r e s
 required by the device, such as a three-way valve that opens one way with a 12 to 20mA sig-
nal and opens the other way with a 4 to 12mA signal. This feature reduces the overall system
cost by using a single output to act as two outputs.

Motorized Valve Control

A motorized valve is used is to regulate the flow of fluid which in turn impacts the loop pro-
cess value. A valve is opened or closed by closing contacts to drive the value in the intended
direction. See Chapter 10 for application examples.

Timer Function
1. When Timer Enable ti.En is set to yes yEs and the timer is started (you define which key
combination this is), the controller will switch from Set Point C.sp1 to Closed Loop Timer
Set Point Ct.s1. If the timer is interrupted, the timer is terminated and the time remain-
ing is reset to its initial value.
2. When Timer Start Method ti.st is set to:
a. Immediate iЛЏd, the timer starts as soon as the counter is initiated. When Time Re-
maining t.r1 equals zero, the set point changes from Closed Loop Timer Set Point Ct.s1
back to Set Point C.SP1. A flashing colon 00:00 indicates that a countdown is in prog-
ress.
b. Ready Band rdy, the set point changes and when the temperature is within ready
band, the ready band indicator ‰ lights up and the countdown timer starts and contin-
ues as long as the temperature is within the ready band. When Time Remaining t.r1
equals zero, the set point changes from Closed Loop Timer Set Point Ct.s1 back to Set
Point C.sp1. A flashing colon 00:00 indicates that a countdown is in progress.
c. Ready Acknowledge rdya, the set point changes, and when the temperature is within
the ready band, the ready band indicator ‰ lights up. The user must then acknowledge
(you define which key combination for this) that the countdown timer should start and
continue as long as the temperature is within the ready band. When Time Remaining
t.r1 equals zero, the set point changes from Closed Loop Timer Set Point Ct.s1 back to
Set Point C.sp1. A flashing colon 00:00 indicates that a countdown is in progress.
d. Power PФІr, the timer starts when the controller is turned on. When Time Remaining
t.r1 equals zero, the set point changes from Closed Loop Timer Set Point Ct.s1 back to
Set Point C.sp1. A flashing colon 00:00 indicates that a countdown is in progress.
3. In Setup Page, Output Menu, Output Function fn can be assigned as Timer Event Output 1
tE.o1 or Timer Event Output 2 tE.o2. Timer 1 is active during timing and timer 2 is deac-
tivated during timing. This signal may be used to monitor that timing is occurring. Process
outputs may not be assigned to Timer Event Outputs.
4. The home display is customized in the Factory Page, Custom Menu. You may program the
display to alternate between display pairs. See display pairs in the Setup Page, Global
Menu. As an example, we could show the process temperature in the upper display and
have the lower display alternate between the countdown time remaining and the active
set point.
Note:
The timer feature is only available for control loop 1 of two-loop controllers. Time is
entered in hours, minutes and seconds. Countdown time will use the entered time but
display the time remaining in either hh:mm or mm:ss format, based on your settings. The
colon pulses in one-second intervals during a countdown, to indicate that timing is under-
way. Parameters that appear in the Home page have the number 1 at the end of the dis-
Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 188 • Cha pte r 9 F ea tu r e s
 played parameter. As an example, hoUr in the Setup Page, Timer Menu will be displayed
as hoU1 in the Home Page.

Setting up the timer function

1. Press and hold up ¿ and down ¯ arrow keys for 6 seconds to enter into the Setup Page
SEt.
2. Up arrow ¿ to Timer Menu tЛЏr.
3. Advance ‰ to Timer Enable ti.En to make selection using the up ¿ and down ¯ arrow
keys to select from the options below:
yEs Yes
no No
4. Advance ‰ to Timer Start Method ti.st to select the method that will start the timer.
5. Use the up arrow ¿ to select from the options below:
iЛЏd Immediate
rdy Ready Band
rdya Ready Ack
pФІr Power
6. Advance ‰ to Source Function A sfn.a to select which input will start/terminate the tim-
er. Use the up arrow ¿ to select from the options below:
nonE None
dio Digital I/O
fUn Function Key
7. Advance ‰ to Source Instance A and use the up arrow ¿ to make a selection below:
If Source Function A of previous step is set to None nonE:
1 Does not matter which number is here
si.a Source Instance A
If Source Function A of previous step is set to Digital I/O dio:
5 Select 5 to 12
si.a Source Instance A
If Source Function A of previous step is set to Function Key fUn:
1 EZ1 Key
2 EZ2 Key
6 Hold infinity key for 2 seconds
7 Infinity ˆ and Down arrow ¯
8 Infinity ˆ and Up arrow ¿
si.a Source Instance A
8. Advance ‰ to Source Function C sfn.C to select the analog source for the ready band. Use
the up arrow ¿ to select from the options below:
pu Process Value
nonE None
ai Analog Input
Lnr Linearization
9. Advance ‰ and use the up arrow ¿ to make a selection below:
1 1 or (2, if second instance of Source Function C)

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 189 • Cha pte r 9 Fe a tu r e s

 10. Advance ‰ to Source Function D sfn.d to select which input will acknowledge the ready
band. Use the up arrow ¿ to select from the options below:
nonE None
dio Digital I/O
fUn Function Key
11. Advance ‰ to Source Instance D and use the up arrow ¿ to make a selection below:
If Source Function A of previous step is set to None nonE:
1 Does not matter which number is here
si.d Source Instance D
If Source Function A of previous step is set to Digital I/O dio:
5 Select 5 to 12
si.d Source Instance D
If Source Function A of previous step is set to Function Key fUn:
1 EZ1 Key
2 EZ2 Key
6 Hold infinity key for 2 seconds
7 Infinity ˆ and Down arrow ¯
8 Infinity ˆ and Up arrow ¿
si.d Source Instance D
12. Advance ‰ to Time Remaining t.r, read only, display in hh:mm or mm:ss.
13. Advance ‰ to Ready Band State r.bs, read only, displayed as yes yEs or no no.
14. Advance ‰ to Ready Band rdy to enter the value for Ready Band using Up ¿ or Down ar-
row ¯.
15. Advance ‰ to Time Format t.for to select the time format. Use the up arrow ¿ to make
selection below:
thЛЏ Time Hours:Minutes
tЛЏs Time Minutes:Seconds
16. Advance ‰ to Countdown Time to enter hours, minutes and seconds using the Up ¿ or
Down arrow ¯.
hoUr Hours, then Advance ‰
ЛЏin Minutes, then Advance ‰
SEC Seconds
17. Advance ‰ to Closed Loop Timer Set Point Ct.SP to enter the temperature during count-
ing using the Up ¿ or Down arrow ¯.
18. Advance ‰ to Signal Time st to enter time in seconds for Timer Event Output 3 tE.o3 to
be active at end of countdown time.
19. Press and hold the Infinity ˆ or Reset key for more than 2 seconds to go to Home Page.
20. See programming custom home page in factory page, custom menu to change the display
parameters such as active process value, closed loop set point time, closed loop timer set
point and time remaining as appropriate for the application.

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 190 • Cha pte r 9 F ea tu r e s

 Alarms
Alarms are activated when the output level, process value or temperature leaves a defined
range. A user can configure how and when an alarm is triggered, what action it takes and
whether it turns off automatically when the alarm condition is over. Configure alarm outputs
in the Setup Page before setting alarm set points. Alarms do not have to be assigned to an
output. Alarms can be monitored and controlled through the front panel or by using software.

Process and Deviation Alarms

A process alarm uses one or two absolute set points to define an alarm condition. A deviation
alarm uses one or two set points that are defined relative to the control set point. High and
low alarm set points are calculated by adding or subtracting offset values from the control
set point. If the set point changes, the window defined by the alarm set points automatically
moves with it. Select the type with Type a . ty (Setup Page, Alarm Menu).

Set Points
The high set point defines the process value or temperature that will trigger a high side
alarm. The set point defines the temperature that will trigger a low side alarm. For devia-
tion alarms, a negative set point represents a value below closed loop set point. A positive set
point represents a value above closed loop set point. View or change alarm set points with
Low Set Point a . Lo and High Set Point a . hi (Operations Page, Alarm Menu).

Hysteresis
An alarm state is triggered when the process value reaches the high or low set point. Hys-
teresis defines how far the process must return into
the normal operating range before the alarm can be High Side Alarm Range Alarm High Set Point

cleared.
Alarm Hysteresis

Hysteresis is a zone inside each alarm set point. This

zone is defined by adding the hysteresis value to the
Temperature

Normal Operating Range

low set point or subtracting the hysteresis value from

the high set point. View or change hysteresis with Hys- Alarm Hysteresis

teresis a . hy (Setup Page, Alarm Menu). Alarm Low Set Point

Low Side Alarm Range

Latching Time

Alarm Set Points and Hysteresis

A latched alarm will remain active after the alarm con-
dition has passed. It can only be deactivated by The alarm state begins when the temperature
the user. An active message, such as an alarm reaches the Alarm High Set Point

message, will cause the display to toggle be- Alarm High

tween the normal settings and the active mes- Set Point

sage in the upper display and a ttn in the low- Alarm Hysteresis

er display. Push the Advance Key ‰ to display Normal Operating Range

Temperature

ig n r in the upper display and the message The alarm state continues until the
temperature drops to the Alarm High
source in the lower display. Use the Up ¿ or Process
Temperature
Set Point minus the hysteresis. A
latching alarm could be turned off by
Down ¯ keys to scroll through possible respons- the operator at this point. A
non-latching alarm would turn off
es, such as Clear CLr or Silence SiL. Then push automatically.
Alarm Low
the Advance ‰ or Infinity ˆ key to execute the Set Point

action. Time

Alarm Response with Hysteresis

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 191 • Cha pte r 9 Fe a tu r e s

 See the Keys and Displays chapter and the Home Page chapter for more details. An alarm
that is not latched (self-clearing) will deactivate automatically when the alarm condition has
passed. Turn latching on or off with Latching a . La (Setup Page, Alarm Menu).

Silencing
If silencing is on the operator can disable the alarm output while the controller is in an alarm
state. The process value or temperature has to enter the normal operating range beyond the
hysteresis zone to activate the alarm output function again. An active message, such as an
alarm message, will cause the display to toggle between the normal settings and the active
message in the upper display and a ttn in the lower display.
1. Push the Advance Key ‰ to display ig n r in the upper display and the message source in
the lower display.
2. Use the Up ¿ and Down ¯ keys to scroll through possible responses, such as Clear CLr or
Silence siL. Then push the Advance ‰ or Infinity ˆ key to execute the action.
See the Keys and Displays chapter and the Home Page chapter for more details. Turn silencing
on or off with Silencing asi (Setup Page, Alarm Menu).

Blocking
Blocking allows a system to warm up after it has been started up. With blocking on, an alarm
is not triggered when the process temperature is initially lower than the low set point or high-
er than the high set point. The process temperature has to enter the normal operating range
beyond the hysteresis zone to activate the alarm function. If the EZ-ZONE PM has an output
that is functioning as a deviation alarm, the alarm is blocked when the set point is changed,
until the process value re-enters the normal operating range. Turn blocking on or off with
Blocking a . bL (Setup Page, Alarm Menu).

Current Sensing
When utilizing the Current Sensing capabilities of this control it is important to know that the
measurements taken utilize the AC Line Frequency aC. Lf setting found in the Global Menu of
the Setup Page. If this setting does not represent the incoming line frequency of this control
the readings will be in error and may appear to be frozen. Generally speaking, the RMS value
is displayed when viewing the Current CU. r prompt. The display will appear frozen with no
current flow and will be erroneous below 2 mA.
Note:
If an alarm is configured to monitor current as its source, the low alarm will be effective
only when the current level is equal to or greater than 2 mA. If there is no current pres-
ent, the low alarm will not be activated.

Open and Shorted Load Circuit Detection

A Current Error C. Er (Operations Page, Current Menu) can detect either an open or shorted
load condition. A shorted condition would be present if the control is calling for 0% power
while current is detected as flowing through the current transformer. Conversely, an open
condition would be present when the control is calling for power with no current flow detect-
ed through the transformer.
A Heater Error h . Er (Operations Page, Current Menu) is used to determine if the load current
flow is within the specified limits as set by the user through the Current Set Points (High Set
Point C. hi and Low Set Point C. Lo); navigate to the Operations Page and than the Current
Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 192 • Cha pte r 9 F ea tu r e s
 Menu to modify.
Read and monitor the real-time current level through the Load Current RMS CU. r prompt
while the most recent faults can be read via the Current Error C. Er and Heater Error h . Er
prompts. All of these prompts can be found in the Operations Page under the Current Menu.
CT Application Note:
If two CTs are wired in series for three phase applications, there is a summation of the
two currents that are slightly out of phase. The user must scale the reading for this sum-
mation as the RM is not intended for 3 phase current measurement. If using the CT as an
alarm source, ensure that the alarm is pointing to the correct source for the current mea-
surement (Load Current RMS (CU.r) parameter). In addition, if using more than one CT,
always wire them in series.

Open Loop Detection

When Open Loop Detection is enabled L. dE, the controller will look for the power output to
be at 100%. Once there, the control will then begin to monitor the Open Loop Detect Devia-
tion L. dd as it relates to the value entered for the Open Loop Detect Time L. d t. If the spec-
ified time period expires and the deviation does not occur, an Open Loop Error will be trig-
gered. Once the Open Loop Error condition exists the control mode will go off and an Open
Loop message will be display. If the process value goes in the opposite direction, a Reversed
Loop message is display. The sensor is likely wired in reverse polarity.
Note:
All prompts identified in this section can be found in the Loop Menu of the Setup Page.

Programming the EZ Key/s

You can program the EZ Key either in the Setup Menu or with configuration software, such as
EZ-ZONE Configurator, using a personal computer.
The following examples show how to program the EZ Key to start and stop a profile.
1. To go to the Setup Page from the Home Page, press both the Up ¿ and Down ¯ keys for six
seconds. Ai will appear in the upper display and sEt will appear in the lower display.
2. Press the Up Key ¿ until fUn appears in the upper display and sEt will appear in the lower
display.
3. Press the Advance Key ‰ until Digital Input Level LEv appears in the lower display. Use an ar-
row key to specify the state of the key (high or low) when the controller is powered up. Func-
tions will toggle with each press of the EZ Key, such as Profile Start/Stop.
Note:
If the level is set to low, the profile will execute automatically on power up.
4. Press the Advance Key ‰. The lower display will show Digital Function fn. Press the Up
¿ or Down ¯ key to scroll through the functions that can be assigned to the EZ Key When
Profile Start/Stop p . s ts appears in the upper display and fn appears in the lower display,
press the Advance Key ‰ once to select that function and move to the Function Instance
fi parameter.
5. Press the Up ¿ or Down ¯ key to scroll to the profile that you want the EZ Key to control.
6. The instance tells the controller which of the numbered functions should be acted upon.
For profiles, there are 4 instances. Press the Infinity Key ˆ once to return to the submenu,
twice to return to the main menu or three times to return to the Home Page.

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 193 • Cha pte r 9 Fe a tu r e s

 Using Lockout and Password Security
If unintentional changes to parameter settings might raise safety concerns or lead to down-
time, you can use the lockout feature to make them more secure. There are two methods of
lockout that can be deployed, both of which are accessible from the Factory Page.
Method 1- Change the value of the Read Lock rLoC (1 to 5) and Set Lock sLoC (0 to 5)
prompts where the higher the value or setting for each translates to a higher secu-
rity clearance (greater access).
Method 2- Enable Password Security pas . E and then modify the Lock Level LoC. L value
which ranges from 1 to 5. See the section entitled Using Lockout Method 2 for
more detail.

Using Lockout Method 1 (Read and Set Lock)

All Pages have security levels assigned where two of those cannot be changed (Home and Set-
up). Defaults (factory settings) for each are shown below:
- Home Page = 1
- Operations Page = 2 (changeable to 1, 2 or 3)
- Setup Page = 4
- Profiling Page = 3 (changeable to 1, 2 or 3)
- Factory Page = 5*
* The Factory Page is always visible where all menus within it may or may not be visible/writ-
able. For further detail see table "Factory Page Menus".
The table below represents the various levels of lockout for the Set Lockout Security prompt
sLoC and the Read Lockout Security prompt rLoC. Looking at the table, "Y" equates to yes
(can write/read) where "N" equates to no (cannot write/read). The colored cells simply dif-
ferentiate one level from the next while also showing the level where read/write is enabled.
As stated previously, the Set Lockout has 6 levels (0 to 5) of security where the Read Lockout
has 5 (1 to 5). Therefore, level "0" applies to Set Lockout only.
Lockout Security sLoC and rLoC
Security Level
Pages
0 1 2 3 4 5
Home Page (cannot be changed) N Y Y Y Y Y
Operations Page N N Y Y Y Y
Setup Page (cannot be changed) N N N N Y Y
Profile Page N N N Y Y Y
Factory Page Y Y Y Y Y Y
Being able to change the page security level for the Operations and Profile pages allows a
user to give access to the Profile Page while locking out the Operations Page. The following
example shows how the Lockout feature may be used to accomplish this:
Changing Security Levels:
1. From the Home Page, press and hold the Infinity Key ˆ and the Advance Key ‰ for approxi-
mately six seconds. CUst will appear in the upper display and fCty will appear in the lower
display.

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 194 • Cha pte r 9 F ea tu r e s

 2. Press the Up Key ¿ until LoC appears in the upper display and fCty will appear in the low-
er display.
3. Press the Advance Key ‰ until Lock Operations prompt LoC. o appears in the bottom display.
4. Press the Up Key ¿ to change the default value from 2 to 3.
5. Press the Advance Key ‰ again and change the Lock Profiling prompt LoC. p appears in the
bottom display.
6. Press the Down Key ¯ to change the default value from 3 to 2.
7. Press the Advance Key ‰ until Read Lock rLoC appears in the bottom display.
8. Press the Down Key ¯ to change the default value from 5 to 2.
9. Press the Advance Key ‰ until Set Lock sLoC appears in the bottom display.
10. Press the Down Key ¯ to change the default value from 5 to 4.
With the above settings, the Home Page and the Profiling Page can be accessed, and all writ-
able parameters can be written to. Due to the Read lock setting of 2, all pages with security
levels greater than 2 will be locked out (inaccessible).
Another example of Method 1 lockout usage could be that an operator wants read access to
all pages while allowing read/write access to the Home Page and the Lockout Menu only. To
setup this scenario follow the steps below:
1. From the Home Page, press and hold the Infinity Key ˆ and the Advance Key ‰ for approxi-
mately six seconds. CUst will appear in the upper display and fCty will appear in the lower
display.
2. Press the Up Key ¿ until LoC appears in the upper display and fCty will appear in the low-
er display.
3. Press the Advance Key ‰ until Read Lock rLoC appears in the bottom display and change it
to 5.
4. Press the Advance Key ‰ until Set Lock SLoC appears in the bottom display and change it to
1.
Although the Factory Page is always visible, some menus within it can be restricted.
Lockout Security sLoC and rLoC
Factory Page Menus
Security Level
Menus
0 1 2 3 4 5
Custom Menu N N N N N Y
Lockout Menu* Y Y Y Y Y Y
Diagnostic Menu** N Y Y Y Y Y
Calibration Menu N N N N N Y
* Using lockout Method 1 with SLoC set to 0, all writable parameters within the control
will be inhibited (not writable) with two exceptions, SLoC and rLoC. As shown below,
both of these parameters can always be seen and modified.
** Diagnostic Menu and all associated prompts are always visible and never writable

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 195 • Cha pte r 9 Fe a tu r e s

 Lockout Security sLoC and rLoC
Factory Page Menu Parameters
Security Level
Parameters
0 1 2 3 4 5
LoC. o N Y Y Y Y Y
LoC. p N Y Y Y Y Y
pas . E N Y Y Y Y Y
rLoC Y Y Y Y Y Y
sLoC Y Y Y Y Y Y
Note:
Using Method 1 Lockout all settings can be modified by anyone who knows how to find
their way to the SLoC and rLoC parameters.

Using Lockout Method 2 (Password Enable)

It is sometimes desirable to apply a higher level of security to the control where a password
would be required to access the control. If Password Enabled pas . E in the Factory Page un-
der the LoC Menu is set to on, an overriding Password Security will be in effect. Without the
appropriate password, specified menus will remain inaccessible. Page and Menu access is de-
fined in the Locked Access Level LoC. L prompt. On the other hand, a User with a password
would have visibility restricted by the Read Lockout Security rLoC. As an example, with Pass-
word Enabled and the Locked Access Level LoC. L set to 1 and rLoC is set to 3, the available
Pages for a User without a password would be limited to the Home and Factory Pages (locked
level 1). If the User password is entered all pages would be accessible with the exception of
the Setup Page as defined by level 3 access.
How to Enable Password Security
Follow the steps below:
1. From the Home Page, press and hold the Infinity Key ˆ and the Advance Key ‰ for approxi-
mately six seconds. CUst will appear in the upper display and fCty will appear in the lower
display.
2. Press the Up Key ¿ until LoC appears in the upper display and fCty will appear in the low-
er display.
3. Press the Advance Key ‰ until Password Enable PAS. E appears in the bottom display and
change it to 5.
4. Press the Up Key ¿ to turn it o n. Once on, four new prompts will appear:
a. Locked Access Level LoC. L, (1 to 5) corresponding to the lockout table above.
b. Rolling Password roLL, will change the Customer Code every time power is cycled.
c. User Password pas . u, which is needed for a User to acquire access to the control.
d. Administrator Password pas . A, which is needed to acquire administrative access to
the control.
The Administrator can either change the User and or the Administrator password or leave
them in the default state. Once Password Security is enabled they will no longer be visible to
anyone other than the Administrator. In other words the Lock Menu LoC is not available to a
User. As can be seen in the formula that follows either the User or Administrator will need to
Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 196 • Cha pte r 9 F ea tu r e s
 know what those passwords are to acquire a higher level of access to the control. Back out of
this menu by pushing the Infinity Key ˆ. Once out of the menu, the Password Security will be
enabled.
How to Acquire Access to the Control
To acquire access to any inaccessible Pages or Menus, go to the Factory Page and enter the
ULoC menu. Once there follow the steps below:
Note:
If Password Security (Password Enabled pas . E is On) is enabled the two prompts men-
tioned below in the first step will not be visible. If the password is unknown, call the indi-
vidual or company that originally setup the control.
1. Acquire either the User Password pas . u or the Administrator Password pas . A.
2. Press the Advance ‰ key one time where the Code Co dE prompt will be visible.
Note:
a. If the Rolling Password is off, press the Advance Key ‰ one more time where the Pass-
word pass prompt will be displayed. Proceed to either step 7a or 8a. Pushing the Up
¿ or Down ¯ arrow keys enter either the User or Administrator Password. Once en-
tered, press and hold the Infinity ˆ key for two seconds to return to the Home Page.
b. If the Rolling Password roLL was turned on proceed on through steps 3 - 9.
3. Assuming the Code Co dE prompt (Public Key) is still visible on the face of the control sim-
ply push the Advance Key ‰ to proceed to the Password pass prompt. If not, find your
way back to the Factory Page as described above.
4. Execute the calculation defined below (7b or 8b) for either the User or Administrator.
5. Enter the result of the calculation in the upper display play by using the Up ¿ and Down
¯ arrow keys or use EZ-ZONE Confgurator Software.
6. Exit the Factory Page by pressing and holding the Infinity Key ˆ for two seconds.
Formulas used by the User and the Administrator to calculate the Password follows:
Passwords equal:
7. User
a. If Rolling Password roLL is Off, Password pass equals User Password [pas;u].
b. If Rolling Password roLL is On, Password pass equals: (pas . u x code) Mod 929 + 70

8. Administrator
a. If Rolling Password roLL is Off, Password pass equals User Password [pas;a].
b. If Rolling Password roLL is On, Password pass equals: (pas . A x code) Mod 997 + 1000
Differences Between a User Without Password, User With Password and Administrator
- User without a password is restricted by the Locked Access Level LoC. L.
- A User with a password is restricted by the Read Lockout Security rLoC never having
access to the Lock Menu LoC.
- An Administrator is restricted according to the Read Lockout Security rLoC however, the
Administrator has access to the Lock Menu where the Read Lockout can be changed.

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 197 • Cha pte r 9 Fe a tu r e s

 Modbus - Using Programmable Memory Blocks
When using the Modbus RTU or Modbus TCP protocols, the PM control features a block of ad-
dresses that can be configured by the user to provide direct access to a list of 40 user config-
ured parameters. This allows the user easy access to this customized list by reading from or
writing to a contiguous block of registers.
To acquire a better understanding of the tables found in the back of this manual (See Appen-
dix: (Modbus Programmable Memory Blocks) please read through the text below which defines
the column headers used.
Assembly Definition Addresses
- Fixed addresses used to define the parameter that will be stored in the "Working Address-
es", which may also be referred to as a pointer. The value stored in these addresses
will reflect (point to) the Modbus address of a parameter within the PM control.
Assembly Working Addresses
- Fixed addresses directly related to their associated "Assembly Definition Addresses" (i.e.,
Assembly Working Addresses 200 & 201 will assume the parameter pointed to by Assembly
Definition Addresses 40 & 41).
When the Modbus address of a target parameter is stored in an "Assembly Definition Address"
its corresponding working address will return that parameter’s actual value. If it’s a writable
parameter, writing to its working register will change the parameter’s actual value. As an
example, Modbus register 360 represents the Analog Input 1 Process Value (See Operations
Page, Analog Input Menu). If the value 360 is loaded into Assembly Definition Address 90 and
value 361 is loaded into Assembly Definition Address 91, the process value sensed by analog
input 1 will also be stored in Modbus registers 250 and 251. Notice that by default this param-
eter is also stored in working registers 240 and 241 as well.
Note:
When modifying the Modbus Assembly registers, single register writes (function 06) are not
allowed. Multiple register writes (function 16) must be used to modify the assembly.
The table identified as "Assembly Definition Addresses and Assembly Working Addresses" (see
Appendix: Modbus Programmable Memory Blocks) reflects the assemblies and their associated
addresses.

CIP - Communications Capabilities

With the introduction of CIP a user can now collect data, configure a device and control in-
dustrial devices. CIP is an open protocol at the application layer fully managed by the Open
DeviceNet Vendors Association (ODVA, http://www.odva.org). Being that this is an open pro-
tocol there are many independent vendors offering a wide array of devices to the end user.
CIP provides the ability to communicate utilizing both implicit messaging (real-time I/O mes-
saging), and explicit messaging (information/configuration messaging). For implicit communi-
cations using a PLC, simply configure the PM assembly size into the I/O structure of the PLC
(See: CIP Implicit Assemblie Structures). The assembly structures can also be changed by the
user. Explicit communications requires the use of specific addressing information. DeviceNet
requires that the node address be specified where EtherNet/IP requires just the Class, In-
stance and Attribute.
• Node address or MAC ID (0 - 63, DeviceNet only)
• Class ID (1 to 255)

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 198 • Cha pte r 9 F ea tu r e s

 • Instance ID (0 to 255)
• Attribute ID (1 to 255)
EtherNet/IP and DeviceNet are both based on CIP and use the same addressing scheme. In
the following menu pages notice the column header identified as CIP. There you will find the
Class, Instance and Attribute in hexadecimal, (decimal in parenthesis) which makes up the ad-
dressing for both protocols. The Watlow implementation of CIP does not support connected
explicit messages but fully supports unconnected explicit messaging.
Rockwell Automation (RA) developed the DF1 serial protocol within the framework of the
PCCC application protocol. With the introduction of CIP, the PCCC protocol was encapsulated
within it to enable continued communication over Ethernet to the legacy RA programmable
controllers, e.g., SLC, Micrologic and PLC-5 controllers equipped with Ethernet capabilities.
The Watlow implementation of CIP also supports the PCCC protocol.
EtherNet/IP (Industrial Protocol) is a network communication standard capable of handling
large amounts of data at speeds of 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps, and at up to 1,500 bytes per packet.
It makes use of standard off-the-shelf Ethernet chip sets and the currently installed physical
media (hardware connections). DeviceNet was the first field bus offering of the ODVA group
and has been around for many years. DeviceNet can communicate at 125, 250 and 500 kilo-
bytes per second with a maximum limitation of 64 nodes (0 to 63) on the network.
Note:
If the control is brought back to the factory defaults (See Appendix: CIP Implicit Assembly
Structures) the user configured assemblies will be overwritten.
Note:
The maximum number of implicit input/output members using DeviceNet is 200. When us-
ing EtherNet/IP the maximum is 100.

CIP Implicit Assemblies

Communications using CIP (EtherNet/IP and DeviceNet) can be accomplished with any PM Inte-
grated control equipped with either DeviceNet or EtherNet/IP communications cards. As was
already mentioned, reading or writing when using CIP can be accomplished via explicit and or
implicit communications. Explicit communications are usually executed via a message instruc-
tion within the PLC but there are other ways to do this as well outside of the focus of this
document.
Implicit communications is also commonly referred to as polled communications. When us-
ing implicit communications there is an I/O assembly that would be read or written to. The
default assemblies and the assembly size is embedded into the firmware of the PM control.
Watlow refers to these assemblies as the T to O (Target to Originator) and the O to T (Origina-
tor to Target) assemblies where the Target is always the EZ-ZONE PM controller and the Origi-
nator is the PLC or master on the network. The size of the O to T assembly is initially set to
20 (32-bit) members where the T to O assembly consists of 21 (32-bit) members. All assembly
members are user configurable with the exception of the first T to O member. The first mem-
ber of the T to O assembly is called the Device Status, it is unique and cannot be changed. If
the module has been properly configured when viewing this 32-bit member in binary format
bits 12 and 16 should always be set to 1 where all of the other bits should be 0. The 20 mem-
bers that follow Device Status are user configurable. The Appendix of this User's Guide con-
tains the PM implicit assemblies (See Appendix: CIP Implicit Assembly Structures).

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 199 • Cha pte r 9 Fe a tu r e s

 Compact Assembly Class
Along with the standard implicit assembly where each module parameter (member) occupies
one 32-bit assembly location there is also a Compact Class assembly. The need for the Com-
pact Class assembly members became apparent as the number of member instances grew
with the EZ-ZONE family of controls. Because there is a limited number of implicit assembly
members (20 input, 20 output), the Compact Class enables the user to modify the standard
assembly offering to their liking while also achieving much better utilization of each bit within
the 32-bit member. As an example, if a standard Implicit Assembly member were configured
to monitor Alarm State 1 the entire 32-bit member would be consumed where just 7 bits out
of the 32 will be used to reflect: Startup (88), None (61), Blocked (12), Alarm Low (8), Alarm
High (7) or Error (28) for Alarm 1 only. With Compact Class assembly member 12 (identified
in this document as "12 A Alarm Read") in use, the alarm states of all 4 alarms can be placed
in one 32-bit assembly member using just 2 bits for each state. Bits 0 and 1 would represent
Alarm State 1, bits 2 and 3 Alarm State 2, etc... Each pair of 2 bits can represent the follow-
ing states: 00 = None, 01 = Alarm Low, 10 = Alarm High and 11 = Other. There is a variety of
predefined Compact Class members that can be used (See Appendix: Compact Class Assembly
Structure) to modify the default implicit assemblies.
Note:
As is the case with any available parameter within the PM control the Compact Class
members can also be read or written to individually via an explicit message as well.
Modifying Implicit Assembly Members
To change any given member of either assembly (T to O or O to T) simply write the new
class, instance and attribute (CIA) to the member location of choice. As an example, if it were
desired to change the 14th member of the T to O assembly from the default parameter (Cool
Power) to the Compact Class 12th member (See Appendix: Compact Class Assembly Structure)
write the value of 0x71, 0x01 and 0x0C (Class, Instance and Attribute respectively) to 0x77,
0x02 and 0x0D. Once the change is executed, reading this member location (as was discussed
above) will return the Alarm States (1-4) to paired bits 0 through 7 where 00 = None, 01 =
Alarm Low, 10 = Alarm High and 11 = Other. The CIP communications instance will always be
instance 2.

Profibus DP - (Decentralized Peripherals)

This protocol is typically used to operate sensors and actuators via a centralized controller
within industrialized production topologies. Data rates up to 12 Mbit/s on twisted pair cables
and/or fiber optics are possible. This protocol is available in three functionally graded version;
DP-V0, DP-V1 and DP-V2. It should be noted that Watlow products utilizing this protocol sup-
port DP-V0 and DP-V1 only.
DP-V0 - provides the basic functionality of DP, including cyclic data exchange, station, module
and channel specific diagnostics and four different interrupt types for diagnostics and
process interrupts.
Cyclic Data refers to input/output data that is pre-configured to pass from the Profibus-DP
Class 1 Master and the Slave at a known rate. Cyclic data is expected on both the sender and
the receiver end of the message.

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 200 • Cha pte r 9 F ea tu r e s

 Note:
To use DP-V0 (cyclic data transfer) first configure and then register the General Station
Description (GSD) file. Watlow provides a software tool allowing for total customization of
the data to be read and or written to. Acquire this software tool (Profibus GSD Editor) via
the CD that shipped with the product or, as an alternative, point your browser to: http://
www.watlow.com/products/controllers/software.cfm and navigate to the bottom of the
page and click on "Software and Demos" to download the software.
Using the GSD Editor a user can configure up to a maximum of 135 different parameters that
can be read or written to from Zone 1 through 16. DP-V1 - contains enhancements geared to-
wards process automation, in particular acyclic data communication for parameter assignment,
operation, visualization and interrupt control of intelligent field devices, in conjunction with
cyclic user data communication.
Acyclic Data is a message that can be sent and or received at a ny time where they typically
have a lower priority then cyclic messages. This type of messaging is typically used for the
purpose of configuration or performing some sort of a diagnostic function.

Software Configuration
Using EZ-ZONE Configurator Software
To enable a user to configure the PM control using a personal computer (PC), Watlow has pro-
vided free software for your use. If you have not yet obtained a copy of this software insert
the CD (Controller Support Tools) into your CD drive and install the software. Alternatively,
if you are viewing this document electronically and have a connection to the internet simply
click on the link below and download the software from the Watlow web site free of charge.
http://www.watlow.com/products/software/zone_config.cfm
Once the software is installed double click on the EZ-ZONE Configurator icon placed on your
desktop during the installation process. If you cannot find the icon follow the steps below to
run the software:
1. Move your mouse to the "Start" button
2. Place the mouse over "All Programs"
3. Navigate to the "Watlow" folder and then the sub-folder "EZ-ZONE Configurator"
4. Click on EZ-ZONE Configurator to run.
The first screen that will appear is shown below.

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 201 • Cha pte r 9 Fe a tu r e s

 If the PC is already physically connected to the EZ-ZONE PM control click the next button to go
on-line.
Note:
When establishing communications from PC to the EZ-ZONE PM control an interface con-
verter will be required. The Standard Bus network uses EIA-485 as the interface. Most PCs
today would require a USB to EIA-485 converter. However, some PCs may still be equipped
with EIA-232 ports, therefore an EIA-232 to EIA-485 converter would be required.
As can be seen in the above screen shot the software provides the user with the option of
downloading a previously saved configuration as well as the ability to create a configuration
off-line to download later. The screen shots that follow will take the user on-line.
After clicking the next button above it is necessary to define the communications port that
will be used on the PC as shown below. Clicking on the drop down will allow the user to se-
lect the appropriate communications port. This will be the port assigned to the EIA-485 to
USB converter when it was connected to the PC. The "Advanced" button allows the user to de-
termine how many devices to look for on the network (1 to 17).

After clicking on the "Next" button, the software will scan the network for the zone addresses
specified while showing the progress made (as shown in the graphic below. When complete
the software will display all of the available devices found on the network as shown below.
Searching Network for Devices Available Network Devices Displayed

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 202 • Cha pte r 9 F ea tu r e s

 The PM8 is shown highlighted to bring greater clarity to the control in focus. Any EZ-ZONE
device on the network will appear in this window and would be available for the purpose of
configuration or monitoring; simply click on the control of choice. After doing so, the screen
below will appear. In the screen shot below notice that the device part number is clearly dis-
played at the top of the page (yellow highlight added for emphasis). When multiple EZ-ZONE
devices are on the network it is important that the part number be noted prior to configuring
so as to avoid making unwanted configuration changes to another control. Looking closely at
the left hand column (Parameter Menus) notice that it displays all of the available menus and
associated parameters within the control. The menu structure as laid out within this software
follows:
- Setup - Operations - Factory - Profile

Navigating from one menu to the next is easy and clearly visible. Simply slide the scroll bar up
or down to display the menu and parameter of choice. If there is a need to bring greater fo-
cus and clarity to the parameters of interest simply click on the negative symbol next to any
of the Menu items. As an example if it is desired to work within the Operations page click the
negative sign next to Setup where the Setup Page will then collapse. Now click the plus sign
next to Operations to find the menu items of choice without viewing unwanted menus and
parameters. Once the focus is brought to an individual parameter (single click of mouse) as is
the case for Analog Input 1 in the left column; all that can be setup related to that parameter
will appear in the center column. The grayed out fields in the center column simply mean
that this does not apply for the type of sensor selected. As an example, notice that when a
thermocouple is selected, RTD Leads does not apply and is therefore grayed out. To speed up
the process of configuration notice that at the bottom of the center column there is an option
to copy settings. If Analog Input 1 and 2 are the same type of sensor click on "Copy Settings"
where a copy dialog box will appear allowing for quick duplication of all settings. Notice too,
that by clicking on any of those items in the center column that context sensitive help will ap-
pear for that particular item in the right hand column.

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 203 • Cha pte r 9 Fe a tu r e s

 Lastly, when the configuration is complete click the "Finish" button at the bottom right of the
previous screen shot. The screen that follows this action can be seen below.

Although the PM control now contains the configuration (because the previous discussion fo-
cused on doing the configuration on-line) it is suggested that after the configuration process
is completed that the user save this file on the PC for future use. If for some reason some-
one inadvertently changed a setting without understanding the impact, it would be easy and
perhaps faster to download a saved configuration back to the control versus trying to figure
out what was changed. Of course, there is an option to exit without saving a copy to the lo-
cal hard drive. After selecting Save above, click the "Finish" button once again. The screen be-
low will than appear. When saving the configuration, note the location where the file will be
placed (saved in) and enter the file name (File name) as well. The default path for saved files
follows:
Users\"Username"\My Documents\Watlow\EZ-Zone Configurator\Saved Configurations
The user can save the file to any folder of choice.

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 204 • Cha pte r 9 F ea tu r e s

Chapter 10: Applications
Example 1: Single Loop Control
Requirements:
One input is required and at least one output adjusts the controlled part of the process.
Overview:
Controls one process value to a user entered Closed Loop Set Point based on an control algorithm.
Single Loop Control
He Co Cl
at ol os
Al Al Set ed L
go go Po o
rit rit in op
hm hm t 1
Output n
0 to 100%
Heat
Analog Input 1 Source A Heat Power
Cool Power
Cool
Control Loop 1
0 to 100%
Output n

Control loop 1 will control Analog Input 1 to Closed Loop Set Point 1.

Example 2: Sensor Backup

Requirements:
Two analog inputs and the enhanced software option are required and at least one output adjusts
the controlled part of the process.
Overview:
The Sensor Backup feature controls a process based on a primary sensor on Analog Input 1. If this
sensor fails, then the process is controlled based on the secondary sensor on Analog Input 2.
Sensor Backup
Fu
n cti F
on ilte
r

Analog Input 1 Source A

Analog Input 2 Source B Output Cl

o
PV Function Se sed
t P Lo
oin op
t1
Output n
0 to 100%
Heat
Source A Heat Power
Cool Power
Cool
Control Loop 1
0 to 100%
Output n

When function is set for Sensor Backup, the PV Function output equals Source A if sensor of Analog
Input 1 reading is valid or Source B if sensor reading is invalid. Control loop 1 will control the valid
Analog Input sensor to Closed Loop Set Point 1.

Wat lo w E Z - Z O N E ® PM Integrated C ontr olle r • 205 • Cha pte r 10 Applic a ti o n s

 Example 3: Square Root
Requirements:
One analog input and the enhanced software option are required and at least one output adjusts
the controlled part of the process.
Overview:
Calculates the square root value of the sensor connected to Analog Input 1.
Square Root
Fu
n cti F
on ilte
r

Analog Input 1 Source A

Output Cl
o
PV Function Se sed
t P Lo
oin op
t1
Output n
0 to 100%
Heat
Source A Heat Power
Cool Power
Cool
Control Loop 1
0 to 100%
Output n

When function is set for Square Root, the PV Function output equals square root value of Source A.
Control loop 1 will control Analog Input 1 to Closed Loop Set Point 1.

Example 4: Ratio
Requirements:
Two analog inputs and the enhanced software option are required and at least one output adjusts
the controlled part of the process.
Overview:
The Ratio feature allows control of one process as a ratio of another process. This is especially use-
ful in applications that mix two materials, whether steam, paint or food ingredients. Analog Input 1
monitors the controlled part of the process. Analog Input 2 of the controller measures the part of
the process that is either uncontrolled or controlled by another device. The part of the process
controlled will be maintained at a level equal to the quantity measured at input 2 multiplied by
the ratio term set by the user as Closed Set Point 1. When function is set for Ratio, the PV Func-
tion output equals Source A as a ratio to Source B. Control loop 1 will control Analog Input 1 to
Closed Loop Set Point 1.
Applications of ratio control: Input 1 Output 1 ®
mixed paint

• Blending two or more flows to produce a Input 2

mixture with specified composition. controlled flow flow flow
of pigment transmitter transmitter
• Blending two or more flows to produce a Mixing Tank

mixture with specified physical proper- motorized uncontrolled

valve flow of
ties. unmixed paint
• Maintaining correct air and fuel mixture
to combustion.

Wat lo w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 206 • Cha pte r 10 Applic ati o n s

 Ratio
Fu
n cti F
on ilte
r

Analog Input 1
controlled Source A

Analog Input 2 Source B Output

uncontrolled Cl
o
PV Function Se sed
t P Lo
oin op
t1
Output n
0 to 100%
Heat
Source A Heat Power
Cool Power
Cool
Control Loop 1
0 to 100%
Output n

Example 5: Differential
Requirements:
Two analog inputs and the enhanced software option are required and at least one output adjusts
the controlled part of the process.
Overview:
Differential control maintains one process at a difference to another process. When function is set
for Differential, the PV Function output equals Source A minus Source B. Control loop 1 will control
Analog Input 1 difference to Analog Input 2 based on Closed Loop Set Point 1.
Differential
Fu
n cti F
on ilte
r

Analog Input 1 Source A

®

Analog Input 2 Source B Output Cl

o
PV Function Se sed Input 1 Output 1
t P Lo
oin op
t1 Input 2
Output n
0 to 100%
Heat
Source A Heat Power
Cool Power
Cool
Control Loop 1
0 to 100%
Output n

Example 6: Cascade
Requirements:
Two loops of control, two inputs and at least 1 output and the enhanced software option.
Overview: Cascade control can handle a difficult process with minimal overshoot, while reach-
ing the set point quickly. This minimizes damage to system components and allows for over siz-
ing heaters for optimal heat-up rates. Heater life is also extended by reducing thermal cycling of
the heater. Systems with long lag times between the energy source (heater, steam, etc.) and the
measured process value cannot be controlled accurately or efficiently with a single control loop,
because a lot of energy can build up before a response is detected. This can cause the system to
overshoot the set point, which could damage the heater, product or heat transfer medium, such as
Wat lo w E Z - Z O N E ® PM Integrated C ontr olle r • 207 • Cha pte r 10 Applic a ti o n s
 a heat transfer fluid.
The majority of the user configuration is done via the Math function. There are two user select-
able settings that will enable Cascade control, Deviation Scale or process Scale. When Process Scale
is selected the remote set point will be within the defined Range low/high and Scale low/high set-
tings. As an example, the graph below shows a heat/cool application where the temperature range
is between 32º to 1200º. With the scaling set as shown 100% cool will equate to 32º, likewise when
the control is calling for 100% heat the temperature equates to 1200º.
When Deviation Scale is selected the Closed Loop Set Point (CLSP) will not deviate beyond the
specified settings. With the settings as shown in the graph below the CLSP (500º) will not deviate
beyond ± 25º.
Range High Process Scale Deviation Scale
+1200°

Heat +25
Temperature

Calculated inner loop (2) set point ± deviation

CLSP = 500
0°

-25
Cool

Range Low
32°
Heat/Cool -100 % Heat/Cool +100 %
-100 % +100 % 0%
Scale Low 0% Scale High Scale Low Scale High

The graph below illustrates a system with a long lag time and the advantages in using cascade con-
trol. Curve A represents a single-control system with PID parameters that allow a maximum heat-up
rate. Too much energy is introduced and the set point is overshot. In most long-lag-time systems
the process value may never settle out to an acceptable error. Curve C represents a single-control
system tuned to minimize overshoot. This results in unacceptable heat-up rates, with the final val-
ue taking hours to reach. Curve B shows a cascade system that limits the energy introduced into
the system allowing an optimal heat-up rate with minimal overshoot.
Note: Cascade
Curve A (PID)
When using cascade control, two loops of
control are required. Changing the control
Set
mode in either loop will affect both loops Point
of control. In other words, if loop one is
changed to manual mode, loop two will also Curve B (Cascade)
Temperature

be changed to manual mode automatically. Curve C (Single-control)

When the Math function is set for Process or

Deviation Scale and Source E is not connected
or false, cascade control is enabled.
Note: Time
When the Math function is set for Process or
Deviation Scale the PM automatically makes the connections for each Control Loop as shown in
the graphic below. Each loop, 1 (process) and 2 (energy) outer and inner respectively, cannot
be changed. If it is desired to display the inner loop process variable and set point, the home
page must be changed via the Factory Page, Custom Menu.

Wat lo w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 208 • Cha pte r 10 Applic ati o n s

 Cascade control uses two control loops (outer - loop 1 and inner - loop 2) to control the process.
The outer loop (Analog Input 1) monitors the pro- Cascade
cess or part temperature, which is then compared Outer Loop 1 He Co Clo
at ol
Alg Al Set ed L
s S R Ra
to the Closed Loop Set Point. The result of the Process
g Fu Sca cale ang nge
ori or Po oo nc le e
i
thm thm nt i p tio Lo Hig Low High Fil
1 n w h ter
comparison, the error signal, is acted on by the
PID settings and the Range and Scale high/low set-
Process Sensor
tings. Ultimately, the outer loop produces a re- Analog Input 1
Closed Loop SP
Output
Source E
mote set point for the inner loop. The inner loop Control Loop 1
DIO Math Function
input (Analog input 2) monitors the energy source or
Function Key

(heating and cooling), which is compared to the

Inner Loop 2
remote set point generated by the outer loop. Energy

The result of the comparison, the error signal, is -100% = Range Low Output n
acted on by the PID settings in the cascade inner +100% = Range High
Heat
Remote Set 0 to 100%
loop (2), which generates an output power level Point
Heat Power
Analog Input 2 Cool Power
between -100% to +100%. If the power level is pos- Energy Source Control Loop 2
0 to 100% Cool

itive the heat will be on; if the power level is Output n

negative the cool will come on. Power from the

energy sources are supplied by the outputs of choice always referenced to Control loop 2.
When cascade control is disabled (Source E is Outer Loop
Thermocouple
true), the Math function output will equal Con- Input 1
Output 1 Oil In Oil Out
trol Loop 1, Closed Loop Set Point.
Input 2

Note:
Limit
If an input sensor on the outer loop fails Heater
Inner Loop
Thermocouple

when using deviation cascade the inner loop Limit Thermocouple

Lube Oil Tank
will continue to drive the output.

Example 7: Wet Bulb / Dry Bulb Wet Bulb/Dry Bulb

Requirements: Clo
Se sed
Two analog inputs and at least one output are t P Lo
oin op
t1
required to adjust the controlled part of the Output n
0 to 100%
processes. Heat
Analog Input 1 Source A Heat Power
Overview: Cool Power
Cool
Wet Bulb/Dry Bulb is a configuration where a Control Loop 1
Temperature
0 to 100%
Output n
dry bulb connected to Analog Input 1 measures Fu
nc
tio Filt
temperature on Analog Input 1. A wet bulb sen- n er

sor that is maintained with moisture has air

moved over the sensor. As moisture evaporates Source B

from the wet bulb, the temperature drops. A Analog Input 2 Source A Output Clo
Se sed
wet bulb input on Analog Input 2, in combination PV Function t P Lo
oin op
t2
with the dry bulb temperature, senses relative Output n
humidity. The controller calculates the tempera- 0 to 100%
Heat
ture difference between the two sensors to de- Source A Heat Power
Cool Power
termine percent relative humidity. The humidify Control Loop 2
Cool
0 to 100%
and dehumidify outputs are disabled when Ana- Humidity Output n

log Input 1 temperature falls below 32 F/0 C, or

goes above 212 F/100 C. When function is set for Wet Bulb/Dry Bulb, the PV Function output equals
calculated humidity. Control loop 1 will control Analog Input 1 to Closed Loop Set Point 1. Control
loop 2 will control Analog Input 2 to Closed Loop Set Point 2.
Wat lo w E Z - Z O N E ® PM Integrated C ontr olle r • 209 • Cha pte r 10 Applic a ti o n s
 Example 8: Vaisala
Requirements: Two analog inputs and the enhanced software option are required and at least two
outputs adjusts the controlled temperature and humidity processes.
Overview:
Vaisala Model HMM-30C Solid-state Relative Humidity Sensor is supported with the Vaisala configu-
ration. Analog Input 1 is used to measure temperature and Analog Input 2 must be a process input
connected to a Vaisala sensor. The controller provides temperature compensation for the Vaisala
sensor. The humidify and dehumidify outputs are disabled when Analog Input 1 temperature falls
below -40 F/- 40 C, or goes above 320 F/160 C. When function is set for Vaisala, the PV Function
output equals the calculated relative humidity compensated by the sensor on Analog Input 1.
Vaisala
Clo
Se sed
t P Lo
oin op
t1
Output n
0 to 100%
Heat
Analog Input 1 Source A Heat Power
Cool Power
Cool
Control Loop 1
0 to 100%
Temperature Output n
Fu
nc
tio Filt
n er

Source B

Analog Input 2 Source A Output Clo

PV Function Se sed
t P Lo
oin op
t2
Output n
0 to 100%
Heat
Source A Heat Power
Cool Power
Cool
Control Loop 2
0 to 100%
Humidity Output n

Wat lo w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 210 • Cha pte r 10 Applic ati o n s

 Example 9: Motorized Valve Control
A typical scenario where a motorized valve is used is to regulate the flow of fluid which in turn im-
pacts the loop process value. A valve is opened or closed by closing contacts to drive the value in
the intended direction. Motorized Valves come in a number of configurations. Some valves have a
position feedback mechanism that allows the control to measure the valve’s position via an internal
potentiometer called slide-wire. The controller can measure the potentiometer resistance to deter-
mine the initial valve position on power up.
This method may not be desirable Motorized Valve Control
for three reasons:

Val
Coo
Hea

ve
Close oint 1
1) It requires a second input on the

l Alg
t Alg

Set P

Tra
Dea
orith

vel
controller to measure valve posi-

orith

d Loo

dB
Output n

Tim
and
im
im
tion.

e
Special Function
2) The controller and the valve are Analog Input 1 Source A Heat Power Source Function A Close
Output 1

more expensive. Open Special Function

3) Additional wiring is required for Control Loop 1 Special Output Function 1 Output 2
Output n
the slide-wire feedback.
Other valves take an analog signal and have a localized control mechanism that regulates the valve
position. These are typically more expensive valves because of the control mechanism built-in plus
it requires an analog signal which is not always available. The actual valve position is not critical
because it is a part of a closed loop control.
The Motorized Valve control algorithm is also designed to work with a type of valve that provides
two discrete signals: one to open the valve and another to close the valve. The algorithm turns
on/off the appropriate signal for an appropriate amount of time to approximate the valve posi-
tion. This works when the valve is inside a closed control loop because when the valve is not in the
correct position, the PID algorithm will adjust the valve further open or close as needed. These
valves have travel limit switches which deactivates the motor once the valve is fully open or fully
closed so the controller can not cause the valve to over travel and burn out the motor, or the mo-
tor is built so it can not overheat at max locked rotor amperes.
To use the motorized feature, the user programs the Special Output Function to Motorized Valve.
Then the Source Function A is selected to either
Heat or Cool Power and Source Instance A is set to
®

Gas Furnace match the control loop, typically 1.

Output 1 = Close
Valve
Actuator
Next the user enters the amount of time in seconds
Temperature
Sensor
Output 2 = Open
that the valve requires power to go from a closed
state to an open state. The user enters the dead
Gas Flow band in percent PID power to prevent the valve from
excessive cycling. Larger numbers reduce activity on
the valve and smaller numbers improve controllabil-
ity. Select a value that compromises on these two competing goals.
Lastly, assign an output to Special Output Function 1 that is wired to close the valve. Assign an
output to Special Output Function 2 that is wired to open the valve. Typically, these two out-
puts are normally open mechanical relays but solid state relays or switch DC outputs may be pro-
grammed in the same manner.

Wat lo w E Z - Z O N E ® PM Integrated C ontr olle r • 211 • Cha pte r 10 Applic a ti o n s

 Definitions:
- Current Position is an approximation of the valve's position as it relates to a power level (0 -
100%) where 0% is fully closed and 100% is fully open.
- Dead Time is the minimum on time that the valve will travel once it is turned on in either the
closed or open direction. Dead Time = Valve Dead Band / 100 * Valve Travel Time.
- On Time is the amount of time the valve needs to be turned on (either open or close) to elimi-
nate the error between the estimated valve position and the desired power level. A positive On
Time value indicates the need to open the valve while a negative value indicates the need to
close the valve. On Time = (Input 1 Value - Current Position) / 100 * Valve Travel Time
When power is applied to the controller, the valve is closed and time is set to 0.
- Special Output Function 1 is the close signal to the valve.
- Special Output Function 2 is the open signal to the valve

Wat lo w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 212 • Cha pte r 10 Applic ati o n s

Chapter 11: Appendix
Troubleshooting Alarms, Errors and Control Issues
Indication Description Possible Cause(s) Corrective Action
Alarm won’t Alarm will not clear • Latching is active • Reset alarm when process
clear or reset or reset with keypad is within range or disable
or digital input latching
• Alarm set to incorrect • Set output to correct
output alarm source instance
• Alarm is set to incorrect • Set alarm source to cor-
source rect input instance
• Sensor input is out of • Correct cause of sensor
alarm set point range input out of alarm range
• Alarm set point is incor- • Set alarm set point to
rect correct trip point
• Alarm is set to incorrect • Set alarm to correct
type type: process, deviation
or power
• Digital input function is • Set digital input function
incorrect and source instance
Alarm won’t Alarm will not acti- • Silencing is active • Disable silencing, if re-
occur vate output quired
• Blocking is active • Disable blocking, if re-
quired
• Alarm is set to incorrect • Set output to correct
output alarm source instance
• Alarm is set to incorrect • Set alarm source to cor-
source rect input instance
• Alarm set point is incor- • Set alarm set point to
rect correct trip point
• Alarm is set to incorrect • Set alarm to correct
type type: process, deviation
or power
Alarm Error Alarm state cannot • Sensor improperly wired • Correct wiring or replace
AL.E1 be determined due or open sensor
AL.E2 to lack of sensor • Incorrect setting of sen- • Match setting to sensor
AL.E3 input
sor type used
AL.E4
• Calibration corrupt • Check calibration of con-
troller

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 213 • Cha pte r 11 A p p e n d i x

 Indication Description Possible Cause(s) Corrective Action
Alarm Low Sensor input below • Temperature is less than • Check cause of under
AL.L1 low alarm set point alarm set point temperature
AL.L2 • Alarm is set to latching • Clear latched alarm
AL.L3 and an alarm occurred in
AL.L4
the past
• Incorrect alarm set point • Establish correct alarm
set point
• Incorrect alarm source • Set alarm source to prop-
er setting
Alarm High Sensor input above • Temperature is greater • Check cause of over tem-
AL.h1 high alarm set point than alarm set point perature
AL.h2 • Alarm is set to latching • Clear latched alarm
AL.h3 and an alarm occurred in
AL.h4
the past
• Incorrect alarm set point • Establish correct alarm
set point
• Incorrect alarm source • Set alarm source to prop-
er setting
Error Input Sensor does not • Sensor improperly wired • Correct wiring or replace
Er.i1 provide a valid sig- or open sensor
Er.i2 nal to controller • Incorrect setting of sensor • Match setting to sensor
type used
• Calibration corrupt • Check calibration of con-
troller
Ambient Error Sensor does not • Ambient error - cold junc- • Return to factory for re-
Er.ab provide a valid sig- tion circuitry not working pair
nal to controller
Limit won’t Limit will not clear • Sensor input is out of • Correct cause of sensor
clear or reset or reset with key- limit set point range input out of limit range
pad or digital input • Limit set point is incor- • Set limit set point to cor-
rect rect trip point
• Digital input function is • Set digital input function
incorrect and source instance
Limit Error Limit state cannot • Sensor improperly wired • Correct wiring or replace
Li.E1 be determined due or open sensor
to lack of sensor in- • Incorrect setting of sen- • Match setting to sensor
put, limit will trip sor type used
• Calibration corrupt • Check calibration of con-
troller

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 214 • Cha pte r 11 Ap p e n d i x

 Indication Description Possible Cause(s) Corrective Action
Limit Low Sensor input below • Temperature is less than • Check cause of under
Li.L1 low limit set point limit set point temperature
• Limit outputs latch and • Clear limit
require reset
• Incorrect alarm set point • Establish correct limit set
point
Limit High Sensor input above • Temperature is greater • Check cause of over tem-
Li.h1 high limit set point than limit set point perature
• Limit outputs latch and • Clear limit
require reset
• Incorrect alarm set point • Establish correct limit set
point
Loop Open Er- Open Loop Detect is • Setting of Open Loop De- • Set correct Open Loop
ror active and the pro- tect Time incorrect Detect Time for applica-
Lp.o1 cess value did not tion
Lp.o2 deviate by a user- • Setting of Open Loop De- • Set correct Open Loop
selected value in a tect Deviation incorrect Deviation value for appli-
user specified pe- cation
riod with PID power • Determine cause of open
• Thermal loop is open
at 100%. thermal loop: misplaced
sensors, load failure, loss
of power to load, etc.
• Open Loop Detect func- • Deactivate Open Loop
tion not required but ac- Detect feature
tivated
Loop Reversed Open Loop Detect is • Setting of Open Loop De- • Set correct Open Loop
Error active and the pro- tect Time incorrect Detect Time for applica-
Lp.r1 cess value is head- tion
Lp.r2 ed in the wrong • Setting of Open Loop De- • Set correct Open Loop
direction when the tect Deviation incorrect Deviation value for appli-
output is activated cation
based on deviation
value and user- • Output programmed for • Set output function cor-
selected value. incorrect function rectly
• Thermocouple sensor • Wire thermocouple cor-
wired in reverse polarity rectly, (red wire is nega-
tive)
Ramping Controller is ramp- • Ramping feature is acti- • Disable ramping feature if
rp1 ing to new set point vated not required
rp2

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 215 • Cha pte r 11 A p p e n d i x

 Indication Description Possible Cause(s) Corrective Action
Autotuning Controller is • User started the • Wait until autotune com-
tUN1 autotuning the con- autotune function pletes or disable autotune
tUN2 trol loop feature
• Digital input is set to • Set digital input to func-
start autotune tion other than autotune,
if desired
No heat/cool Output does not ac- • Output function is incor- • Set output function cor-
action tivate load rectly set rectly
• Control mode is incor- • Set control mode appro-
rectly set priately (Open vs Closed
Loop)
• Output is incorrectly • Correct output wiring
wired
• Load, power or fuse is • Correct fault in system
open
• Control set point is incor- • Set control set point in
rect appropriate control mode
and check source of set
point: remote, idle, pro-
file, closed loop, open
loop
• Incorrect controller mod- • Obtain correct controller
el for application model for application
No Display No display indica- • Power to controller is off • Turn on power
tion or LED illumi- • Fuse open • Replace fuse
nation • Breaker tripped • Reset breaker
• Safety interlock switch • Close interlock switch
open
• Separate system limit • Reset limit
control activated
• Wiring error • Correct wiring issue
• Incorrect voltage to con- • Apply correct voltage,
troller check part number

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 216 • Cha pte r 11 Ap p e n d i x

 Indication Description Possible Cause(s) Corrective Action
No Serial Com- Cannot establish se- • Address parameter incor- • Set unique addresses on
munication rial communications rect network
with the controller • Incorrect protocol se- • Match protocol between
lected devices
• Baud rate incorrect • Match baud rate between
devices
• Parity incorrect • Match parity between de-
vices
• Wiring error • Correct wiring issue
• EIA-485 converter issue • Check settings or replace
converter
• Incorrect computer or • Set correct communica-
PLC communications port tion port
• Incorrect software setup • Correct software setup to
match controller
• Wires routed with power • Route communications
cables wires away from power
wires
• Termination resistor may • Place 120 Ω resistor
be required across EIA-485 on last
controller
Process Process is unstable • Controller not tuned cor- • Perform autotune or
doesn’t con- or never reaches rectly manually tune system
trol to set set point • Control mode is incor- • Set control mode appro-
point rectly set priately (Open vs Closed
Loop)
• Control set point is incor- • Set control set point in
rect appropriate control mode
and check source of set
point: remote, idle, pro-
file, closed loop, open
loop
Temperature Process value con- • Controller output incor- • Verify output function is
runway tinues to increase rectly programmed correct (heat or cool)
or decrease past set • Thermocouple reverse • Correct sensor wiring
point. wired (red wire negative)
• Controller output wired • Verify and correct wiring
incorrectly
• Short in heater • Replace heater
• Power controller connec- • Replace or repair power
tion to controller defec- controller
tive
• Controller output defec- • Replace or repair control-
tive ler

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 217 • Cha pte r 11 A p p e n d i x

 Indication Description Possible Cause(s) Corrective Action
Device Error Controller displays • Controller defective • Replace or repair control-
100 internal malfunc- ler
rEtn tion message at • Sensor input over driven • Check sensors for ground
power up. loops, reverse wiring or
out of range values.
Heater Error Heater Error • Current through load is • Check that the load cur-
h.Er above current trip set rent is proper. Correct
point cause of over current
and/or ensure current
trip set point is correct.
• Current through load is • Check that the load cur-
below current trip set rent is proper. Correct
point cause of undercurrent
and/or ensure current
trip set point is correct.
Current Error Load current incor- • Shorted solid-state or • Replace relay
C.Er rect. mechanical relay
• Open solid-state or me- • Replace relay
chanical relay
• Current transformer load • Route load wire through
wire associated to wrong current transformer from
output correct output, and go to
the C.si Source Output
Instance parameter (Set-
up Page, Current Menu)
to select the output that
is driving the load.
• Defective current trans- • Replace or repair sensor
former or controller or controller
• Noisy electrical lines • Route wires appropriate-
ly, check for loose con-
nections, add line filters
Menus inac- Unable to access • Security set to incorrect • Check LoC settings in
cessible sEt, opEr, fCty level Factory Page and enter
or prof menus or appropriate password in
particular prompts ULoC setting in Factory
in Home Page Page
• Digital input set to lock- • Change state of digital
out keypad input
• Custom parameters in- • Change custom param-
correct eters in Factory Page

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 218 • Cha pte r 11 Ap p e n d i x

 Indication Description Possible Cause(s) Corrective Action
EZ-Key/s do EZ-Key/s do not • EZ-Key function incorrect • Verify EZ-Key function in
not work activate required the Setup Menu
function • EZ-Key function instance • Correct and change the
not correct function instance if not
correct
• Keypad malfunction • Replace or repair control-
ler
RUI value to Value to low to be • Incorrect setup • Check scaling of source
low displayed in 4 digit data
uaL.L LED display <-1999
RUI value to Value to high to be • Incorrect setup • Check scaling of source
high displayed in 4 digit data
uaL.h LED display >9999

Detection of and Rules Around Abnormal Sensor Conditions

Inputs Detection of Abnormal Conditions
Thermocouple
Shorted No direct detection, Open loop firmware detection.
Open Yes, Parasitic pull-up
Reversed Yes, firmware detection
Current Source
Shorted Range limiting only
Open Range limiting only
Reversed Range limiting only
Voltage Source
Open Range limiting only
Shorted Range limiting only
Reversed Range limiting only
RTD
S1 open Yes, pulled up.
S2 open Not implemented.
S3 open Yes, pulled up.
S1 short to S2 Yes, pulled up
S1 short to S3 Yes, pulled down to under range.
S2 shorted to S3 Not implemented, Possible, monitor S2 voltage.
S1 and S2 open Yes, pulled down to under range.
S1 and S3 open Yes, S1 pulled up.
S2 and S3 open Yes pulled up.
Thermistor
S1 open Yes, pulled up to sensor over range.
S3 open Yes, pulled up to sensor over range.
S1 short to S3 Yes, pulled down to sensor under range.
S1 and S3 open Yes, S1 pulled up to sensor over range.

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 219 • Cha pte r 11 A p p e n d i x

 Modbus - Programmable Memory Blocks
The Modbus assembly or programmable memory blocks consists of 40 pointers to the parame-
ters of your choosing starting at Modbus register 40 (shown on the following page). The point-
ers are 32-bits long so are stored in two sequential registers. As an example, if it is desired to
move an alias to the analog input of the PM (register 360) into pointer registers 40 and 41, a
single multi-write command (0x10 function) would be used writing 360 into register 40 and 361
into register 41.

Once the parameters of choice have been defined and written to the specified pointer regis-
ters, the working registers will then represent the parameters written. In the example above,
the 32-bit floating point analog input (360 and 361) was first written to registers 40 and 41
which in turn defines working registers 200 and 201 as Analog Input 1. As can be seen in the
far right-hand column in the graphic above, reading back registers 200 and 201 the tempera-
ture, as detected by the first analog input is displayed.
The screen shot above was taken from a program that can be found on the Watlow Support
Tools DVD (shipped with the product) as well as on the Watlow website. On the DVD, it can
be found under "Utility Tools" and is identified as "Modbus TCP Diagnostic Program for EZ-ZONE
PM, RM and ST". A similar program can be found here as well for Modbus RTU. If it is easier
to go to the web to acquire this software, click on the link below and type "modbus" in the
search field where both versions can be found and downloaded. http://www.watlow.com/lit-
erature/software.cfm

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 220 • Cha pte r 11 Ap p e n d i x

 Assembly Definition Addresses and Assembly Working Addresses
Pointer Registers Working Registers
40 & 41 200 & 201
42 & 43 202 & 203
44 & 45 204 & 205
46 & 47 206 & 207
48 & 49 208 & 209
50 & 51 210 & 211
52 & 53 212 & 213
54 & 55 214 & 215
56 & 57 216 & 217
58 & 59 218 & 219
60 & 61 220 & 221
62 & 63 222 & 223
64 & 65 224 & 225
66 & 67 226 & 227
68 & 69 228 & 229
70 & 71 230 & 231
72 & 73 232 & 233
74 & 75 234 & 235
76 & 77 236 & 237
78 & 79 238 & 239
80 & 81 240 & 241
82 & 83 242 & 243
84 & 85 244 & 245
86 & 87 246 & 247
88 & 89 248 & 249
90 & 91 250 & 251
92 & 93 252 & 253
94 & 95 254 & 255
96 & 97 256 & 257
98 & 99 256 & 259
100 & 101 260 & 261
102 & 103 262 & 263
104 & 105 264 & 265
106 & 107 266 & 267
108 & 109 268 & 269
110 & 111 270 & 271
112 & 113 272 & 273
114 & 115 274 & 275
116 & 117 276 & 277
118 & 119 278 & 279

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 221 • Cha pte r 11 A p p e n d i x

 Modbus Default Assembly Structure 40-119
Assembly Pointer Assembly Working
Assembly Pointer Assembly Working Registers Addresses
Registers Addresses Registers 80 & 81 Registers 240 & 241
Registers 40 & 41 Registers 200 & 201 Pointer 21 = 360 & 361
Analog Input 1 Process Value of Pointer 21
Pointer 1 = 1880 & 1881
Loop Control Mode Value of Pointer 1 Value

Registers 82 & 83 Registers 242 & 243

Registers 42 & 43 Registers 202 & 203
Pointer 22 = 362 & 363
Value of Pointer 22
Pointer 2 = 2160 & 2161
Value of Pointer 2
Analog Input 1 Error Status
Closed Loop Set Point

Registers 84 & 85 Registers 244 & 245

Registers 44 & 45 Registers 204 & 205
Pointer 23 = 440 & 441
Analog Input 2 Process Value of Pointer 23
Pointer 3 = 2162 & 2163 Value of Pointer 3
Open Loop Set Point Value

Registers 86 & 87 Registers 246 & 247

Registers 46 & 47 Registers 206 & 207

Pointer 4 = 1480 & 1481 Value of Pointer 4 Pointer 24 = 442 & 443 Value of Pointer 24
Alarm 1 High Set Point Analog Input 2 Error Status

Registers 48 & 49 Registers 208 & 209 Registers 88 & 89 Registers 248 & 249

Pointer 5 = 1482 & 1483 Value of Pointer 5 Value of Pointer 25

Alarm 1 Low Set Point
Pointer 25 = 1496 & 1497
Alarm 1 State

Registers 50 & 51 Registers 210 & 211 Registers 90 & 91 Registers 250 & 251

Pointer 6 = 1530 & 1531 Value of Pointer 6 Pointer 26 = 1546 & 1547 Value of Pointer 26
Alarm 2 High Set Point Alarm 2 State

Registers 52 & 53 Registers 212 & 213 Registers 92 & 93 Registers 252 & 253
Pointer 7 = 1532 & 1533 Pointer 27 = 1596 & 1597
Value of Pointer 7 Value of Pointer 27
Alarm 2 Low Set Point
Alarm 3 State

Registers 54 & 55 Registers 214 & 215

Registers 94 & 95 Registers 254 & 256
Pointer 8 = 1580 & 1581 Value of Pointer 8
Alarm 3 High Set Point Pointer 28 = 1646 & 1647
Value of Pointer 28
Alarm 4 State

Registers 56 & 57 Registers 216 & 217

Registers 96 & 97 Registers 256 & 257
Pointer 9 = 1582 & 1583
Alarm 3 Low Set Point Value of Pointer 9 Pointer 29 = 1328 & 1329
Value of Pointer 29
Digital Input 5 Status

Registers 58 & 59 Registers 218 & 219

Registers 98 & 99 Registers 258 & 259
Pointer 10 = 1630 & 1631
Value of Pointer 10
Alarm 4 High Set Point Pointer 30 = 1348 & 1349
Value of Pointer 30
Digital Input 6 Status

Registers 60 & 61 Registers 220 & 221

Pointer 11 = 1632 & 1633 Registers 100 & 101 Registers 260 & 261
Alarm 4 Low Set Point Value of Pointer 11
Pointer 31 = 1882 & 1883 Value of Pointer 31
Control Mode Active

Registers 62 & 63 Registers 222 & 223

Registers 102 & 103 Registers 262 & 263
Pointer 12 = 2540 & 2541
Value of Pointer 12
Profile Action Request Pointer 32 = 1904 & 1905 Value of Pointer 32
Heat Power

Registers 64 & 65 Registers 224 & 225

Registers 104 & 105 Registers 264 & 265
Pointer 13 = 2520 & 2521 Value of Pointer 13
Profile Start Pointer 33 = 1906 & 1907 Value of Pointer 33
Cool Power

Registers 66 & 67 Registers 226 & 227

Registers 106 & 107 Registers 266 & 267
Pointer 14 = 1890 & 1891 Value of Pointer 14
Heat Proportional Band Pointer 34 = 690 & 691 Value of Pointer 34
Limit State

Registers 68 & 69 Registers 228 & 229

Registers 108 & 109 Registers 268 & 269
Pointer 15 = 1892 & 1893 Value of Pointer 15 Pointer 35 = 2520 & 2521 Value of Pointer 35
Cool Proportional Band Profile Start

Registers 70 & 71 Registers 230 & 231 Registers 110 & 111 Registers 270 & 271
Pointer 16 = 1894 & 1895 Pointer 36 = 2540 & 2541
Value of Pointer 16 Value of Pointer 36
Time Integral Profile Action Request

Registers 72 & 73 Registers 232 & 233 Registers 112 & 113 Registers 272 & 273

Pointer 17 = 1896 & 1897 Pointer 37 = 2524 & 2525

Value of Pointer 17 Active File Value of Pointer 37
Time Derivative

Registers 114 & 115 Registers 274 & 275

Registers 74 & 75 Registers 234 & 235
Pointer 38 = 2526 & 2527
Pointer 18 = 1900 & 1901 Active Step Value of Pointer 38
Value of Pointer 18
Heat Hysteresis

Registers 116 & 117 Registers 276 & 277

Registers 76 & 77 Registers 236 & 237
Pointer 39 = 2528 & 2529
Pointer 19 = 1902 & 1903 Active Set Point Value of Pointer 39
Value of Pointer 19
Cool Hysteresis

Registers 118 & 119 Registers 278 & 279

Registers 78 & 79 Registers 238 & 239
Pointer 40 = 2536 & 2537
Step Time Remaining Value of Pointer 40
Pointer 20 = 1898 & 1899
Value of Pointer 20
Deadband

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 222 • Cha pte r 11 Ap p e n d i x

 CIP Implicit Assembly Structures
CIP Implicit O to T (Originator to Target) Assembly Structure
CIP Implicit Assembly
Originator (Master) to Target (PM)
PM Assembly Parameter
Assembly PM PLC
Class, Instance, Parameter Class, Instance,
Members Data Type Data Type
Attritbute Attritbute
1 0x77, 0x01, 0x01 DINT Loop Control Mode 0x97, 0x01, 0x01 DINT
2 0x77, 0x01, 0x02 DINT Closed Loop Set Point 0x6B, 0x01, 0x01 REAL
3 0x77, 0x01, 0x03 DINT Open Loop Set Point 0x6B, 0x01, 0x02 REAL
4 0x77, 0x01, 0x04 DINT Alarm 1 - Alarm High Set Point 0x6D, 0x01, 0x01 REAL
5 0x77, 0x01, 0x05 DINT Alarm 1 - Alarm Low Set Point 0x6D, 0x01, 0x02 REAL
6 0x77, 0x01, 0x06 DINT Alarm 2 - Alarm High Set Point 0x6D, 0x02, 0x01 REAL
7 0x77, 0x01, 0x07 DINT Alarm 2 - Alarm Low Set Point 0x6D, 0x02, 0x02 REAL
8 0x77, 0x01, 0x08 DINT Alarm 3 - Alarm High Set Point 0x6D, 0x03, 0x01 REAL
9 0x77, 0x01, 0x09 DINT Alarm 3 - Alarm Low Set Point 0x6D, 0x03, 0x02 REAL
10 0x77, 0x01, 0x0A DINT Alarm 4 - Alarm High Set Point 0x6D, 0x04, 0x01 REAL
11 0x77, 0x01, 0x0B DINT Alarm 4 - Alarm Low Set Point 0x6D, 0x04, 0x02 REAL
12 0x77, 0x01, 0x0C DINT Profile Action Request 0x7A, 0x01, 0x0B DINT
13 0x77, 0x01, 0x0D DINT Profile Start 0x7A, 0x01, 0x01 DINT
14 0x77, 0x01, 0x0E DINT Heat Proportional Band 0x97, 0x01, 0x06 REAL
15 0x77, 0x01, 0x0F DINT Cool Proportional Band 0x97, 0x01, 0x07 REAL
16 0x77, 0x01, 0x10 DINT Time Integral 0x97, 0x01, 0x08 REAL
17 0x77, 0x01, 0x11 DINT Time Derivative 0x97, 0x01, 0x09 REAL
18 0x77, 0x01, 0x12 DINT Heat Hysteresis 0x97, 0x01, 0x0B REAL
19 0x77, 0x01, 0x13 DINT Cool Hysteresis 0x97, 0x01, 0x0C REAL
20 0x77, 0x01, 0x14 DINT Dead Band 0x97, 0x01, 0x0A REAL

CIP Implicit T to O (Target to Originator) Assembly Structure

CIP Implicit Assembly
Target (PM) to Originator (Master)
PM Assembly Parameter
Assembly PM PLC
Class, Instance, Parameter Class, Instance,
Members Data Type Data Type
Attritbute Attritbute
1 Cannot be changed Binary Device Status none DINT
2 0x77, 0x02, 0x01 DINT Analog Input 1, Analog Input Value 0x68, 0x01, 0x01 REAL
3 0x77, 0x02, 0x02 DINT Analog Input 1, Input Error 0x68, 0x01. 0x02 REAL
4 0x77, 0x02, 0x03 DINT Analog Input 2, Analog Input Value 0x68, 0x02, 0x01 REAL
5 0x77, 0x02, 0x04 DINT Analog Input 2, Input Error 0x68, 0x02, 0x02 REAL
6 0x77, 0x02, 0x05 DINT Alarm 1, Alarm State 0x6D, 0x01, 0x09 DINT
7 0x77, 0x02, 0x06 DINT Alarm 2, Alarm State 0x6D, 0x02, 0x09 DINT
8 0x77, 0x02, 0x07 DINT Alarm 3, Alarm State 0x6D, 0x03, 0x09 DINT
9 0x77, 0x02, 0x08 DINT Alarm 4, Alarm State 0x09, 0x04, 0x09 DINT
10 0x77, 0x02, 0x09 DINT Event Status 0x6E, 0x01, 0x05 DINT
11 0x77, 0x02, 0x0A DINT Event Status 0x6E, 0x02, 0x05 DINT
12 0x77, 0x02, 0x0B DINT Control Mode Active 0x97, 0x01, 0x02 DINT
13 0x77, 0x02, 0x0C DINT Heat Power 0x97, 0x01, 0x0D REAL
14 0x77, 0x02, 0x0D DINT Cool Power 0x97, 0x01, 0x0E REAL
15 0x77, 0x02, 0x0E DINT Limit State 0x70, 0x01, 0x06 DINT
16 0x77, 0x02, 0x0F DINT Profile Start 0x7A, 0x01, 0x01 DINT
17 0x77, 0x02, 0x10 DINT Profile Action Request 0x7A, 0x01, 0x0B DINT
18 0x77, 0x02, 0x11 DINT Current Profile 0x7A, 0x01, 0x03 DINT
19 0x77, 0x02, 0x12 DINT Current Step 0x7A, 0x01, 0x04 DINT
20 0x77, 0x02, 0x13 DINT Active Set Point 0x7A, 0x01, 0x05 REAL
21 0x77, 0x02, 0x14 DINT Step Time Remaining 0x7A, 0x01, 0x09 DINT

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 223 • Cha pte r 11 A p p e n d i x

 As can be seen on the previous page the PM Implicit Assembly defaults (factory settings) to a
populated assembly structure. If it is desired to modify any of the given assembly members
there are many software tools available to do so. It is outside of the scope of this document
to describe how to use those. What can be found in this document is the process to build the
assembly structure. If viewing this document electronically simply click on the link below to
read the section entitled " Modifying Implicit Assembly Members". Otherwise, turn back to the
table of contents to find the above named section.

Compact Class Assembly Structure

On the next four pages, the 17 available members of the Compact
Class are displayed. As an orientation to the format as displayed in
this document, notice that each member begins with header identi-
fied as "Assembly" and below the header you will see the member
number along with parameter information contained within. While looking at these illustra-
tions keep in mind that each member is actually 32-bits in length. To better illustrate this
information in this document, the following 6 pages present these members divided in half
where the letter "A" in the page header and assembly number represents the most significant
16-bits where the letter "B" in the title and assembly number represents the least significant
16-bits of each member. In the event that these pages are printed out and then mixed up,
simply match up the page headers placing them side by side. As an example, Compact Class 1
A through 7 A should be paired with Class 1 B through 7 B, left to right.
For further explanation as to what the Compact Class assembly is, navigate to the section en-
titled "Compact Assembly Class"

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 224 • Cha pte r 11 Ap p e n d i x

 Compact Class 1 A through 7 A
Instance i
Class,
Assembly
Instance, Attribute 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
1A C = 0x71 (113)
Analog Input I = 1 to 4 Filtered Analog Input Value
Read A=1
Bits 16 to 31, Signed 16 bits with implied tenths precision (-32768.8 to 3276.7)

Instance i
Class,
Assembly
Instance, Attribute 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
2A C = 0x71 (113)
Control I = 1 to 4 Closed Loop Set Point
Read/Write A=2
Bits 16 to 31, Signed 16 bits with implied tenths precision (-32768.8 to 3276.7)

Instance i + 1
Class,
Assembly
Instance, Attribute 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
3A C = 0x71 (113)
Control I = 1 to 4 Closed Loop Set Point
Read/Write A=3
Bits 16 to 31, Signed 16 bits with implied tenths precision (-32768.8 to 3276.7)

Instance i
Class,
Assembly
Instance, Attribute 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
4A C = 0x71 (113)
Control I = 1 to 4 Heat Proportional Band
Read/Write A=4
Bits 16 to 31, Unsigned 16 bits with implied tenths precision (0 to 6553.5)

Instance i
Class,
Assembly
Instance, Attribute 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
5A C = 0x71 (113)
Control I = 1 to 4 Cool Proportional Band (instance i)
Read/Write A=5
Bits 16 to 31, Unsigned 16 bits with implied tenths precision (0 to 6553.5)

Instance i + 1
Class,
Assembly
Instance, Attribute 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
6A C = 0x71 (113) Input
Limit I = 1 to 4 Limit State Error Analog Input Value
Read A=6 Status
Bits 16 to 28, Signed 16 bits whole (-4096 to 4095)
Bit 29, Analog Input Error Status (0 = None, 1 = Error)
Bits 30 and 31, Limit State (00 =None, 01 = Low Limit, 10 = Limit High, 11 = Other)

Instance i + 1
Class,
Assembly
Instance, Attribute 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
7A C = 0x71 (113) Limit Clear
Limit I = 1 to 4 Spare Latched Analog Input Value
Read/Write A=7 Clear Error
Bits 16 to 28, Signed 13 bits whole (-4096 to 4095)
Bit 29, Clear Latched Input Error (0 = Ignore, 1 = Clear)
Bits 30, Limit Clear (0 = Ignore, 1 = Clear)

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 225 • Cha pte r 11 A p p e n d i x

Compact Class 1 B through 7 B
Instance i

Assembly 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Input Loop Actual
1B Error Error Control Tune Control Loop Output Power
Status Status Mode Status
Bits 0 to 10, Signed 10 bits with implied tenths precision (-100.0 to 100.0)
Bit 11, Loop Tuning Status (0 = Off, 1 = Anything Else)
Bits 12 and 13, Actual Control Mode (00 = Off, 01 = Manual, 10 = Auto)
Bit 14, Loop Error Status (0 = None, 1 = Error)
Bit 15, Analog Input Error (0 = None, 1 = Error)

Instance i

Assembly 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Open Initiate
2B Spare Loop Control Mode Open Loop Set Point
Tune
Clear
Bits 0 to 10, Signed 10 bits with implied tenths precision (-100.0 to 100.0)
Bit 11, Initiate Tune (0 = No, 1 = Yes)
Bits 12 and 13, Actual Control Mode (00 = Off, 01 = Manual, 10 = Auto)
Bit 14, Open Loop Clear (0 = Ignore, 1 = Clear)

Instance i

Assembly 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
3B Closed Loop Set Point

Bits 0 to 15, Signed 16 bits with implied tenths precision (-3276.8 to 3276.8)

Instance i
Assembly 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
4B Integral Time

Bits 0 to 15, Unsigned 16 bits whole (0 to 65535)

Instance i

Assembly 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
5B Derivative Time

Bits 0 to 15, Unsigned 16 bits whole (0 to 65535)

Instance i

Assembly 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Input
6B Limit State Error Analog Input Value
Status
Bits 0 to 12, Signed 13 bits whole (-4096 to 4095)
Bits 13, Analog Input Error Status (0 = None, 1 = Error)
Bit 14 and 15, Limit State (00 = None, 01 = Limit low, 10 = Limit high, 11 = Other)

Instance i

Assembly 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Limit Clear
7B Spare Limit Set Point High
Clear Latched
Error
Bits 0 to 12, Signed 13 bits whole (-4096 to 4095)
Bit 13, Clear Latched Input Error (0 = Ignore, 1 = Clear)
Bit 14, Limit Clear (0 = Ignore, 1 = Clear)

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 226 • Cha pte r 11 Ap p e n d i x

Compact Class 8 A through 13 A
Instance i + 15 Instance i + 14 Instance i + 13 Instance i + 12 Instance i + 11 Instance i + 10 Instance i + 9 Instance i + 8
Class,
Assembly
Instance, Attribute 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
8A C = 0x71 (113)
Limit I = 1 to 4 Limit State Limit State Limit State Limit State Limit State Limit State Limit State Limit State
Read A=8
Bits 16 to 31, Paired bits representing the state of up to 16 limits (00 = None, 01 = Limit low,, 10 = Limit High)

Instance i + 15 Instance i + 14 Instance i + 13 Instance i + 12 Instance i + 11 Instance i + 10 Instance i + 9 Instance i + 8

Class,
Assembly
Instance, Attribute 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
9A C = 0x71 (113) Limit Limit Limit Limit Limit Limit
Limit I = 1 to 4 Spare Spare Clear Spare
Clear Spare Clear Spare Limit Spare Clear Spare Limit Spare Clear
Read/Write Clear Clear Clear
A=9
Bits 16 to 31, Paired bits representing the state of up to 16 limits (00 = None, 01 = Limit low,, 10 = Limit High)

Instance i
Class,
Assembly
Instance, Attribute 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
10 A C = 0x71 (113) Limit Clear
Limit I = 1 to 4 Spare Latched Limit Set Point High
Read/Write A = 0x0A (10) Clear Error
Bits 16 to 28, Signed 13 bits whole (-4096 to 4095) - Bit 29, Clear Latched Input Error (0 = Ignore, 1 = Clear)
Bits 30, Limit Clear (0 = Ignore, 1 = Clear)

Instance i + 1
Class,
Assembly
Instance, Attribute 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
11 A C = 0x71 (113)
CT I = 1 to 4 Spare Heater Error Current Error Current RMS
Read A = 0x0B (11)
Bits 16 to 26, Unsigned 11 bits (0 to 2047)
Bits 27 and 28, Current Error (00 = None, 01 = Shorted, 10 = Open)
Bits 29 and 30, Heater Error (00 = None, 01 = Low, 10 = High)

Instance i + 15 Instance i + 14 Instance i + 13 Instance i + 12 Instance i + 11 Instance i + 10 Instance i + 9 Instance i + 8

Class,
Assembly
Instance, Attribute 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
12 A C = 0x71 (113)
Alarm I = 1 to 4 Alarm State Alarm State Alarm State Alarm State Alarm State Alarm State Alarm State Alarm State
Read A = 0x0C (12)
Bits 16 to 31, Paired bits reflecting the state of up to 16 alarms (00 = None, 01 = Alarm Low, 10 = Alarm High, 11 = Other)

Instance i + 15 Instance i + 14 Instance i + 13 Instance i + 12 Instance i + 11 Instance i + 10 Instance i + 9 Instance i + 8

Class,
Assembly
Instance, Attribute 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
13 A C = 0x71 (113) Alarm Alarm
I = 1 to 4 Alarm
Alarm Alarm Clear Alarm Silence Alarm Clear Silence Alarm Clear Silence Alarm Clear Silence
Read/Write A = 0x0D (13)
Bits 16 to 31, Paired bits reflecting the state of up to 16 alarms (0 = Ignore, 1 = Clear)

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 227 • Cha pte r 11 A p p e n d i x

Compact Class 8 B through 13 B
Instance i + 7 Instance i + 6 Instance i + 5 Instance i + 4 Instance i + 3 Instance i + 2 Instance i + 1 Instance i
Assembly 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
8B Limit State Limit State Limit State Limit State Limit State Limit State Limit State Limit State

Bits 0 to 15, Paired bits representing the state of up to 16 limits (00 = None, 01 = Limit low,, 10 = Limit High)

Instance i + 7 Instance i + 6 Instance i + 5 Instance i + 4 Instance i + 3 Instance i + 2 Instance i + 1 Instance i

Assembly 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Spare Limit Limit Limit Spare Limit Limit Limit Limit Limit
9B Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Clear
Clear Clear Clear Clear Clear Clear Clear
Bits 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 and 14, Limit Clear for instance i to instance i ( 0 = Ignore, 1 = Clear)

Instance i

Assembly 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
10 B Spare Limit Set Point Low

Bits 0 to 12, Signed 13 bits whole (-4096 to 4095)

Instance i

Assembly 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
11 B Spare Heater Error Current Error Current RMS

Bits 11 and 12, Current Error (00 = None, 01 = Shorted, 10 = Open)

Bits 13 and 14, Heater Error (00 = None, 01 = Low, 10 = High)

Instance i + 7 Instance i + 6 Instance i + 5 Instance i + 4 Instance i + 3 Instance i + 2 Instance i + 1 Instance i

Assembly 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
12 B Alarm State Alarm State Alarm State Alarm State Alarm State Alarm State Alarm State Alarm State

Bits 0 to 15, Paired bits reflecting the state of up to 16 alarms (00 = None, 01 = Alarm Low, 10 = Alarm High, 11 = Other)

Instance i + 7 Instance i + 6 Instance i + 5 Instance i + 4 Instance i + 3 Instance i + 2 Instance i + 1 Instance i

Assembly 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Alarm Alarm Clear Alarm Silence
13 B Alarm Clear Alarm Silence Alarm Clear Silence Alarm Clear Alarm Silence

Bits 0 to 15, Paired bits reflecting the state of up to 16 alarms (0 = Ignore, 1 = Clear)

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 228 • Cha pte r 11 Ap p e n d i x

Compact Class 14 A through 19 A
Instance i
Class,
Assembly
Instance, Attribute 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
14 A C = 0x71 (113)
Alarm I = 1 to 4 Alarm Alarm Set Point High
Read/Write A = 0x0E (14) Clear
Bits 16 to 30, Signed 15 bits with implied tenths precision (-1638.4 to 1638.3)
Bit 31, Alarm Clear (0 = Ignore, 1 = Clear)

Instance i + 1
Class,
Assembly
Instance, Attribute 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
15 A C = 0x71 (113) Input
Analog Input I = 1 to 4 Error Filtered Analog Input Value
Read A = 0x0F (15) Status
Bits 16 to 30, Signed 15 bits with implied tenths precision (-1638.4 to 1638.3)
Bit 31, Analog Input Error (0 = None, 1 = Error)

Instance i + 1
Class,
Assembly
Instance, Attribute 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
16 A C = 0x71 (113)
Analog Input I = 1 to 4 Filtered Analog Input Value
Read A = 0x10 (16)
Bits 16 to 31, Signed 16 bits with implied tenths precision (-3276.8 to 3276.8)

Instance i + 15 Instance i + 14 Instance i + 13 Instance i + 12 Instance i + 11 Instance i + 10 Instance i + 9 Instance i + 8

Class,
Assembly
Instance, Attribute 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
17 A C = 0x71 (113) Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input
Analog Input I = 1 to 4 Spare Error Spare Error Spare Error Spare Error Spare Error Spare Error Spare Error Spare Error
Read A = 0x11 (17) Status Status Status Status Status Status Status Status
Bits 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30, Analog Input Error Status (0 = None, 1 = Error)

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 229 • Cha pte r 11 A p p e n d i x

Compact Class 14 B through 17 B
Instance i

Assembly 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Alarm
14 B Silence Alarm Set Point Low

Bits 0 to 14, Signed 15 bits with implied tenths precision (-1638.4 to 1638.3)
Bit 15, Alarm Silence (0 = Ignore, 1 = Silence)

Instance i

Assembly 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Input
15 B Error Filtered Analog Input Value
Status
Bits 0 to 14, Signed 15 bits with implied tenths precision (-1638.4 to 1638.3)
Bit 15, Analog Input Error (0 = None, 1 = Error)

Instance i

Assembly 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
16 B Filtered Analog Input Value

Bits 0 to 15, Signed 16 bits with implied tenths precision (-3276.8 to 3276.8)

Instance i + 7 Instance i + 6 Instance i + 5 Instance i + 4 Instance i + 3 Instance i + 2 Instance i + 1 Instance i

Assembly 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input
17 B Spare Error Spare Error Spare Error Spare Error Spare Error Spare Error Spare Error Spare Error
Status Status Status Status Status Status Status Status
Bits 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, Analog Input Error Status(0 = None, 1 = Error)

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 230 • Cha pte r 11 Ap p e n d i x

 PM Specifications
LineVoltage/Power (Minimum/Maximum Ratings)
• 85 to 264V~ (ac), 47 to 63Hz
• 20 to 28VÅ (ac), 47 to 63Hz
• 12 to 40VÎ (dc)
• 14VA maximum power consumption (PM4, 8 & 9)
• 10VA maximum power consumption (PM6)
• Data retention upon power failure via non-volatile memory
• Compliant with SEMIF47-0200, Figure R1-1 voltage sag requirements @ 24V ~ (ac) or higher
Environment
• 0 to 149°F (-18 to 65°C) operating temperature
• -40 to 185°F (-40 to 85°C) storage temperature
• 0 to 90% RH, non-condensing
Accuracy
• Calibration accuracy and sensor conformity: ± 0.1% of span, ± 1°C @ the calibrated ambient
temperature and rated line voltage
• Types R, S, B; 0.2%
• Type T below -50°C; 0.2%
• Calibration ambient temperature @ 77 ± 5°F (25 ± 3°C)
• Accuracy span :1000 °F (540°C) min.
• Temperature stability: ±0.1 °F/°F (±0.1°C/°C) rise in ambient max.
Agency Approvals
• UL® Listed to UL 61010-1 File E185611
• UL Reviewed to CSA C22.2 No.61010-1-04
• UL 50 Type 4X, NEMA 4X indoor locations, IP65 front panel seal (indoor use only)
• FM Class 3545 File 3029084 temperature limit switches
• CE-See Declaration of Conformity RoHS and W.E.E.E. complaint
• ODVA-EtherNet/IP™ and DeviceNet Compliance
• UL Listed to ANSI/ISA 12.12.01-2007 File E184390
• This equipment is suitable for use in Class 1, Div.2, Groups A, B, C and D or non-hazardous
locations only. Temperature Code T4A
• UL reviewed to Standard No. CSA C22.2 No.213-M1987, Canadian Hazardous locations
• All models, CSA C22.2 No. 24 File 158031 Class 4813-02, CSA Approved
Controller
• User selectable heat/cool, on-off, P, PI, PD, PID or alarm action, not valid for limit control-
lers
• Auto-tune with TRU-TUNE®+ adaptive control algorithm
• Control sampling rates: input = 10Hz, outputs = 10Hz

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 231 • Cha pte r 11 A p p e n d i x

 Profile Ramp/Soak - Real Time Clock and Battery Back-up
• Accuracy (typical): ±30PPM at 77°F (25°C)
• +30/-100 PPM at -4 to 149°F (-20 to 65°C)
• Battery type: Rayovac 3V (BR1225) lithium (recycle properly). Battery is available only on
models with real-time clock
• Battery typical life: three cumulative years of life without power at 77°F (25°C)
Isolated Serial Communications
• EIA232/485, Modbus® RTU
• EtherNet/IP™, DeviceNet™ (ODVA certified)
• Modbus® TCP
• Profibus DP
Wiring Termination—Touch-Safe Terminals
• Input, power and controller output terminals are touch safe removable 3.30 to 0.0507 mm2
(12 to 22 AWG)
• Wire strip length 7.6 mm (0.30 in.)
• Torque 0.56 Nm (5.0 in-lb)
Universal Input
• Thermocouple, grounded or ungrounded sensors
-- >20MΩ input impedance
• Max. 2KΩ source resistance
• RTD 2- or 3-wire, platinum, 100Ω and 1000Ω @ 0°C (32°F) calibration to DIN curve (0.00385
Ω/Ω/°C)
• Process, 0-20mA @100Ω, or 0-10VÎ (dc) @ 20kΩ input impedance; scalable, 0-50mV
Voltage Input Ranges
- Accuracy ±10mV ±1 LSD at standard conditions
- Temperature stability ±100 PPM/°C maximum
Milliamp Input Ranges
- Accuracy ±20µA ±1 LSD at standard conditions
- Temperature stability ±100 PPM/°C maximum
Resolution Input Ranges
- 0 to 10V: 200 µV nominal
- 0 to 20 mA: 0.5 mA nominal
• Potentiometer: 0 to 1,200Ω
• Inverse scaling
• Current: input range is 0 to 50mA, 100Ω input impedance
• Response time: 1 second max., accuracy ±1mA typical
Accuracy Accuracy
Input Type Max Error @ 25 Deg C Units
Range Low Range High
J ±1.75 0 750 Deg C
K ±2.45 -200 1250 Deg C
T ±1.55 -200 350 Deg C
N ±2.25 0 1250 Deg C

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 232 • Cha pte r 11 Ap p e n d i x

 Accuracy Accuracy
Input Type Max Error @ 25 Deg C Units
Range Low Range High
E ±2.10 -200 900 Deg C
R ±3.9 0 1450 Deg C
S ±3.9 0 1450 Deg C
B ±2.66 870 1700 Deg C
C ±3.32 0 2315 Deg C
D ±3.32 0 2315 Deg C
F (PTII) ±2.34 0 1343 Deg C
RTD, 100 ohm ±2.00 -200 800 Deg C
RTD, 1000 ohm ±2.00 -200 800 DegC
mV ±0.05 -50 50 mV
Volts ±0.01 0 10 Volts
mAdc ±0.02 0 20 mAmps DC
mAac ±5 0 50 mAmps AC

Operating Range
Input Type Range Low Range High Units
J -210 1200 Deg C
K -270 1371 Deg C
T -270 400 Deg C
N -270 1300 Deg C
E -270 1000 Deg C
R -50 1767 Deg C
S -50 1767 Deg C
B 0 1816 Deg C
C 0 2315 Deg C
D 0 2315 Deg C
F (PTII) 0 1343 Deg C
RTD (100 ohm) -200 800 Deg C
RTD (1000 ohm) -200 800 Deg C
mV 0 50 mV
Volts 0 10 Volts
mAdc 0 20 mAmps DC
mAac 0 50 mAmps AC
Potentiometer, 1K range 0 1200 Ohms
Resistance, 5K range 0 5000 Ohms
Resistance, 10K range 0 10000 Ohms
Resistance, 20K range 0 20000 Ohms
Resistance, 40K range 0 40000 Ohms

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 233 • Cha pte r 11 A p p e n d i x

 Thermistor Input
Max Error @ Accuracy Accuracy Range
Input Type Units
25 Deg C Range Low High
Thermistor, 5K range ±5 0 5000 Ohms
Thermistor, 10K range ±10 0 10000 Ohms
Thermistor, 20K range ±20 0 20000 Ohms
Thermistor, 40K range ±40 0 40000 Ohms
• 0 to 40KΩ, 0 to 20KΩ, 0 to 10KΩ, 0 to 5KΩ
• 2.252KΩ and 10KΩ base at 25°C
• Linearization curves built in
• Third party Thermistor compatibility requirements

Alpha Beta Thermistor

Base R @ 25C YSI
Techniques THERM Curve
2.252K Curve A 2.2K3A 004 A
10K Curve A 10K3A 016 B
10K Curve C 10K4A 006 C

Current Measurement
• Accepts 0 - 50mA signal (user programmable range)
• Displayed operating range and resolution can be scaled and are user programmable
• Requires optional current transformer
2 Digital Input/Output Option - 2 DIO
• Digital input update rate 10Hz
- DC voltage
- Max. input 36V @ 3mA
- Min. high state 3V at 0.25mA
- Max. low state 2V
- Dry contact
- Min. open resistance 10KΩ
- Max. closed resistance 50Ω
- Max. short circuit 13mA
• Digital output update rate 10Hz
- SSR drive signal
- Update rate 10 Hz
- Maximum open circuit voltage is 22 to 25Î (dc)
- PNP transistor source
- Typical drive; 21mA @ 4.5V for DO5, and 11mA @ 4.5V for DO6
- Current limit 24mA for Output 5 and 12mA Output 6
- Output 5 capable of driving one 3 - pole DIN-A-MITE
- Output 6 capable of driving one 1 - pole DIN-A-MITE
Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 234 • Cha pte r 11 Ap p e n d i x
 6 Digital Input/Output Option - 6 DIO
• Digital input or output
• Update rate 10Hz
• Switched DC
- Internal supply limited to 400mA, maximum open circuit voltage of 25V, typical 8V at
80mA.
• Open Collector
- Max. switched voltage is 32VÎ (dc)
- Max. switched current per output is 1.5A
- Max. switched current for all 6 outputs is 8A
Output Hardware
• Switched DC
- Maximum open circuit voltage is 22 to 25 VDC
- 30mA max. per single output / 40mA max. total per paired outputs (1 & 2, 3 & 4)
- Typical drive; 4.5VDC @ 30 mA
- Short circuit limited to <50 mA
- Use dc- and dc+ to drive external solid-state relay
- 1-pole DIN-A-MITE: up to 4 in parallel or 4 in series
- 2-pole DIN-A-MITE: up to 2 in parallel or 2 in series
- 3-pole DIN-A-MITE: up to 2 in series

• Switched dc/open collector = 30VÎ (dc) max. @ 100mA max. current sink
• Solid State Relay (SSR), FormA, 0.5A @ 24VÅ (ac) min., 240VÅ (ac) max., 1A at 50°F linear
derating to 0.5A at 149°F resistive, opto-isolated, without contact suppression, 120/240VÅ
(ac) 20 VA pilot duty
• Electromechanical relay, Form C, 5A, 24 to 240VÅ (ac) or 30VÎ (dc) max., resistive load,
100,000 cycles at rated load, 125 VA pilot duty at 120/240VÅ (ac), 25 VA at 24VÅ (ac)
• Electromechanical relay, FormA, 5A, 24 to 240VÅ (ac) or 30VÎ (dc) max., resistive load,
100,000 cycles at rated load, 125 VA pilot duty at 120/240VÅ (ac), 25 VA at 24VÅ (ac)
• NO-ARC relay, FormA, 15A, 24 to 240VÅ (ac), no VÎ (dc), resistive load, 2 million cycles at
rated load
• Universal process/retransmit, Output range selectable:
- 0 to 10VÎ (dc) into a min. 1,000Ω load
- 0 to 20mA into max. 800Ω load
Resolution
- dc ranges: 2.5mV nominal
- mA ranges: 5 µA nominal
Calibration Accuracy
- dc ranges: ±15 mV
- mA ranges: ±30 µA
Temperature Stability
- 100 ppm/°C
Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 235 • Cha pte r 11 A p p e n d i x
 Operator Interface
• Dual 4 digit, 7 segment LED displays
• Advance, infinity, up and down keys, plus optional programmable EZ-KEY/s depending on
model size
• Typical display update rate 1Hz
• RESET key substituted for infinity on all models including the limit control
Dimensions
Behind Panel
Size Width Height Display Character Height
(max.)
100.3
up: 11.43 mm (0.450 in)
100.8 mm mm 100.3 mm
1/4 middle: 9.53 mm (0.375 in)
(3.97 in) (3.95 (3.95 in)
low: 7.62 mm (0.300 in)
in)
53.3
101.6 mm mm 53.3 mm up: 10.80 mm (0.425 in)
1/16
(4.00 in) (2.10 (2.10 in) low: 6.98 mm (0.275 in)
in)
100.3
top: 11.4 mm (0.450 in)
1/8 101.6 mm mm 54.8 mm
middle: 9.53 mm (0.375 in)
(H) (4.00 in) (3.95 (2.16 in)
bottom: 7.62 mm (0.300 in)
in)
54.8
top: 11.4 mm (0.450 in)
101.6 mm mm 100.3 mm
1/8 (V) middle: 9.53 mm (0.375 in)
(4.00 in) (2.16 (3.95 in)
bottom: 7.62 mm (0.300 in)
in)

Weight
1/4 DIN (PM4) 1/8 DIN (PM8 and 9)
• Controller: 331 g (11.7 oz.) • Controller: 284 g (10 oz.)
1/16 DIN (PM6) User's Guide
• Controller: 186 g (6.6 oz.) • User's Guide: 284.86 g (10.1 oz)
Modbus® is a trademark of AEG Schneider Automation Inc.
EtherNet/IP™ is a trademark of ControlNet International Ltd. used under license by Open
DeviceNet Vendor Association, Inc. (ODVA).
UL® is a registered trademark of Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
DeviceNet™ is a trademark of Open DeviceNet Vendors Associatlon.
Note:
These specifications are subject to change without prior notice.

Wat l o w E Z - Z O N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 236 • Cha pte r 11 Ap p e n d i x

 Ordering Information for PM Integrated Controller Models
Controller P M __ __ __ __ __ - __ __ __ __ __ __ __
EZ-ZONE® Integrated Controller Models
TRU-TUNE+® Adaptive Tune, red-green 7-segment displays

Package Size
4 Panel Mount 1/4 DIN
6 Panel Mount 1⁄16 DIN
8 Panel Mount 1⁄8 DIN Vertical
9 Panel Mount 1⁄8 DIN Horizontal
Primary Function
C PID Controller with Universal Input
R PID Controller with Universal Input and Profiling Ramp and Soak
B PID Controller with Universal Input and Profiling Ramp and Soak
and Battery Backup with Real Time Clock
T PID Controller with Universal Input and Countdown Timer
J PID Controller with Thermistor Input
N PID Controller with Thermistor Input and Profiling Ramp and Soak
E PID Controller with Thermistor Input and Profiling Ramp and Soak
and Battery Backup with Real Time Clock
S Custom Firmware
- Options B and E are not available with PM6
Power Supply, Digital Input/Output
1 100 to 240VÅ (ac)
2 100 to 240VÅ (ac) plus 2 Digital I/O points
3 15 to 36VÎ (dc) and 24VÅ (ac)
4 15 to 36VÎ (dc) and 24VÅ (ac), plus 2 Digital I/O points
Output 1 and 2 Hardware Options
Output 1 Output 2
CA Switched dc/open collector None
CH Switched dc/open collector NO-ARC 15 A power control
CC Switched dc/open collector Switched dc
CJ Switched dc/open collector Mechanical relay 5 A, form A
CK Switched dc/open collector Solid-state relay 0.5 A, form A
EA Mechanical relay 5 A, form C None
EH Mechanical relay 5 A, form C NO-ARC 15 A power control
EC Mechanical relay 5 A, form C Switched dc
EJ Mechanical relay 5 A, form C Mechanical relay 5 A, form A
EK Mechanical relay 5 A, form C Solid-state relay 0.5 A, form A
FA Universal process None
FC Universal process Switched dc (cannot use variable time base)
FJ Universal process Mechanical relay 5 A, form A (cannot use variable time base)
FK Universal process Solid-state relay 0.5 A, form A (cannot use variable time base)
AK None Solid-state relay 0.5 A, form A
KH Solid-state relay 0.5 A, form A NO-ARC 15 A power control
KK Solid-state relay 0.5 A, form A Solid-state relay 0.5 A, form A
Communications Options or Additional Digital I/O
A None
C 6 Digital I/O - Not available with PM6
D 6 Digital I/O and EIA-485 Modbus RTU - Not available with PM6
1 EIA 485 Modbus RTU®
2 Modbus RTU 232/485
3 EtherNet/IP™, Modbus TCP
5 DeviceNet
6 Profibus DP
- Standard Bus EIA-485 always included - all models
Auxilliary Control Functions
A None
C 2nd PID Channel with Universal Input - Not available on PM6
J 2nd PID Channel with Thermistor Input - Not available on PM6
R Auxillary 2nd input (Universal Input)
P Auxillary 2nd input (Thermistor Input)
T Current Transformer Input (The following options are Not Valid for outputs 3 & 4: FA, FC, FJ and FK)
L Integrated Limit Controller with Universal Input (Valid options for outputs 3 & 4: CJ, EJ, or AJ only)
M Integrated Limit Controller with Thermistor Input (Valid options for outputs 3 & 4: CJ, EJ, or AJ only)
- PM6 When ordering Communications Options 2 - 6, option A must be ordered above
Auxillary input can be configured for remote set point, back-up sensor, ratio, differential or wet-bulb/dry-bulb input
Output 3 and 4 Hardware Options
Output 3 Output 4
AA None None
AJ None Mechanical relay 5 A, form A
AK None Solid-state relay 0.5 A, form A
CA Switched dc/open collector None
CC Switched dc/open collector Switched dc
CH Switched dc/open collector NO-ARC 15 A power control
CJ Switched dc/open collector Mechanical relay 5 A, form A
CK Switched dc/open collector Solid-state relay 0.5 A, form A
EA Mechanical relay 5 A, form C None
EC Mechanical relay 5 A, form C Switched dc
EH Mechanical relay 5 A, form C NO-ARC 15 A power control
EJ Mechanical relay 5 A, form C Mechanical relay 5 A, form A
EK Mechanical relay 5 A, form C Solid-state relay 0.5 A, form A
FA Universal Process None
FC Universal Process Switched dc (cannot use variable time base)
FJ Universal Process Mechanical relay 5 A, form A (cannot use variable time base)
FK Universal Process Solid-state relay 0.5 A, form A (cannot use variable time base)
KH Solid-state relay 0.5 A, form A NO-ARC 15 A power control
KK Solid-state relay 0.5 A, form A Solid-state relay 0.5 A, form A
- With Communications Options 2 - 6, option AA must be ordered with PM6 above
- Output options CH,EH and KH not available with PM6
Additional Options
A Standard
C Enhanced firmware including: Compressor Control, Cascade, Ratio, Differential, Square-root, Motorized Valve Control without feedback
D Standard with isolated input 1, input 2 always isolated
F Enhanced firmware with isolated input 1, input 2 always isolated
Note: Auxiliary Control Function C or J required for cascade control.
Custom Options
AA Standard EZ-ZONE face plate
AB EZ-ZONE logo and no Watlow name
AC No logo and no Watlow name
AG No logo and no Watlow name
XX Custom firmware, overlays, parameter settings
12 Class 1, Div. 2 (Not available with Integrated Limit Controller or mechanical relay outputs)

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 237 • Cha pte r 11 A p p e n d i x

 Declaration of Conformity

Series EZ-ZONE® PM
WATLOW Electric Manufacturing Company ISO 9001since 1996.
1241 Bundy Blvd.
Winona, MN 55987 USA

Declares that the following product:

®
Designation: Series EZ-ZONE PM (Panel Mount)
Model Numbers: PM (3, 6, 8, 9 or 4)(Any Letter or number) – (1, 2, 3 or 4)(A, C, E, F or
K) (A, C, H, J or K)(Any letter or number) – (Any letter or number)(A, C,
E, F or K)(A, C, H, J or K) (Any three letters or numbers)
Classification: Temperature control, Installation Category II, Pollution degree 2, IP65
Rated Voltage and Frequency: 100 to 240 V~ (ac 50/60 Hz) or 15 to 36 Vdc/ 24 V~ac 50/60 Hz
Rated Power Consumption: 10 VA maximum PM3, PM6 Models.
14 VA maximum PM8, PM9, PM4 Models

Meets the essential requirements of the following European Union Directives by using the relevant
standards show below to indicate compliance.

2004/108/EC Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive

EN 61326-1 2013 Electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratory use
– EMC requirements (Industrial Immunity, Class B Emissions).
EN 61000-4-2 2009 Electrostatic Discharge Immunity
EN 61000-4-3 2010 Radiated Field Immunity 10V/M 80–1000 MHz, 3 V/M 1.4–2.7 GHz
EN 61000-4-4 2012 Electrical Fast-Transient / Burst Immunity
EN 61000-4-5 2006 Surge Immunity (Also compliant with IEC 61000-4-5 2014)
EN 61000-4-6 2014 Conducted Immunity
EN 61000-4-11 2004 Voltage Dips, Short Interruptions and Voltage Variations Immunity
EN 61000-3-2 2009 Harmonic Current Emissions (Also compliant with IEC 61000-3-2 2014)
1
EN 61000-3-3 2013 Voltage Fluctuations and Flicker
SEMI F47 2000 Specification for Semiconductor Sag Immunity Figure R1-1
1
For mechanical relay loads, cycle time may need to be extended up to 160 seconds to meet flicker
requirements depending on load switched and source impedance.

2006/95/EC Low-Voltage Directive

EN 61010-1 20112 Safety Requirements of electrical equipment for measurement,
control and laboratory use. Part 1: General requirements
2
Compliance with 3rd Edition requirements with use of external surge suppressor installed on 230 Vac~ power line units.
Recommend minimum 1000 V peak to maximum 2000 V peak, 70 joules or better part be used.

Compliant with 2011/65/EU RoHS2 Directive

Per 2012/19/EU W.E.E.E Directive Please Recycle Properly.

Joe Millanes Winona, Minnesota, USA

Name of Authorized Representative Place of Issue

Director of Operations September 2014

Title of Authorized Representative Date of Issue

Signature of Authorized Representative

Wat l o w EEZ-ZONE
CE DOC ® PMI C ontrol l er
Z - Z O N EPM-09-14 • 238 • Cha pte r 11 Ap p e n d i x
 How to Reach Us
Corporate Headquarters Europe
Watlow Electric Manufacturing Company Watlow France Watlow Ibérica, S.L.U.
12001 Lackland Road Tour d'Asnières. C/Marte 12, Posterior, Local 9
St. Louis, MO 63146 4 Avenue Laurent Cély E-28850 Torrejón de Ardoz
Sales: 1-800-WATLOW2 92600 Asnières sur Seine Madrid - Spain
Manufacturing Support: 1-800-4WATLOW France T. +34 91 675 12 92
Email: [email protected] Tél: + 33 (0)1 41 32 79 70 F. +34 91 648 73 80
Website: www.watlow.com Télécopie: + 33(0)1 47 33 36 57 Email: [email protected]
From outside the USA and Canada: Email: [email protected] Website: www.watlow.es
Tel: +1 (314) 878-4600 Website: www.watlow.fr
Watlow UK Ltd.
Fax: +1 (314) 878-6814 Watlow GmbH Linby Industrial Estate
Postfach 11 65, Lauchwasenstr. 1 Linby, Nottingham, NG15 8AA
D-76709 Kronau United Kingdom
Latin America Germany Telephone: (0) 115 964 0777
Watlow de México S.A. de C.V. Tel: +49 (0) 7253 9400-0 Fax: (0) 115 964 0071
Av. Fundición No. 5 Fax: +49 (0) 7253 9400-900 Email: [email protected]
Col. Parques Industriales Email: [email protected] Website: www.watlow.co.uk
Querétaro, Qro. CP-76130 Website: www.watlow.de From outside The United Kingdom:
Mexico Tel: +44 115 964 0777
Tel: +52 442 217-6235 Watlow Italy S.r.l. Fax: +44 115 964 0071
Fax: +52 442 217-6403 Viale Italia 52/54
20094 Corsico MI
Italy
Tel: +39 024588841
Fax: +39 0245869954
Email: [email protected]
Website: www.watlow.it

Asia and Pacific

Watlow Singapore Pte Ltd.
16 Ayer Rajah Crescent, Watlow Korea Co., Ltd.
#06-03/04, #1406, E&C Dream Tower, 46, Yangpyeongdong-3ga
Singapore 139965 Yeongdeungpo-gu, Seoul 150-103
Tel: +65 6773 9488 Fax: +65 6778 0323 Republic of Korea
Email: [email protected] Website: www.watlow.com.sg Tel: +82 (2) 2628-5770 Fax: +82 (2) 2628-5771
Website: www.watlow.co.kr
Watlow Australia Pty., Ltd.
4/57 Sharps Road
Watlow Malaysia Sdn Bhd
Tullamarine, VIC 3043
1F-17, IOI Business Park
Australia
No.1, Persiaran Puchong Jaya Selatan
Tel: +61 3 9335 6449
Bandar Puchong Jaya
Fax: +61 3 9330 3566
47100 Puchong, Selangor D.E.
Website: www.watlow.com
Malaysia
Tel: +60 3 8076 8745 Fax: +60 3 8076 7186
Watlow Electric Manufacturing Company (Shanghai) Co. Ltd. Email: [email protected]
Room 501, Building 10, KIC Plaza Website: www.watlow.com
290 Songhu Road, Yangpu District
Shanghai, China 200433 瓦特龍電機股份有限公司
China 80143 高雄市前金區七賢二路189號 10樓之一
Phone:
電話: 07-2885168 傳真: 07-2885568
Local: 4006 Watlow (4006 928569)
International: +86 21 3381 0188 Watlow Electric Taiwan Corporation
Fax: +86 21 6106 1423 10F-1 No.189 Chi-Shen 2nd Road Kaohsiung 80143
Email: [email protected] Taiwan
Website: www.watlow.cn Your Authorized
Tel: +886-7-2885168 Watlow Distributor
Fax: +886-7-2885568

ワトロー・ジャパン株式会社
〒101-0047 東京都千代田区内神田1-14-4
四国ビル別館9階
Tel: 03-3518-6630 Fax: 03-3518-6632
Email: [email protected] Website: www.watlow.co.jp
Watlow Japan Ltd.
1-14-4 Uchikanda, Chiyoda-Ku
Tokyo 101-0047
Japan TOTAL
Tel: +81-3-3518-6630 Fax: +81-3-3518-6632 CUSTOMER
Email: [email protected] Website: www.watlow.co.jp SATISFACTION
3 Year Warranty

Wa t l o w E Z - ZO N E ® PMI C ontrol l er • 239 • Cha pte r 11 A p p e n d i x